Technical Specification Mep

Mechanical & Electrical Works
PT. Barry Callebaut Comextra Indonesia

Makassar – Indonesia
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL
GENERAL
1. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS
The contractor is deemed to be familiar with climatic conditions prevailing in

Indonesia and to be aware of the high temperature (up to 40 ºC) and the high
relative humidity
The contractor in submitting a tender will be assumed to warrant that all
materials and items of equipment are suitable for continued use and/or
operation in the various climatic encountered
2. STANDARDS
All details of the equipments, materials and installations standard shall comply
with this specification and the current standards and regulations as described in
Volume 11.
Where the materials or equipment offered comply with other standards, the
Contractor shall demonstrate they meet the requirements of this specification
and details shall be provided to be approval
3. SUBMISSION
a. All submissions must be made early enough in the Contract to enable the
Engineer to fully check such item prior to ordering. Generally, a period of at
least two months before any equipment requires to be ordered to meet the
main contractor’s program.
b. No claims for extensions of time or additional costs shall be entertained as
a result of the contractor’s failure to make his submissions in adequate
time.
c. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Contractors failure to make his
submissions in adequate time may result in a delay in the completion of the
whole project, then the Engineer shall have the authority to instruct the
Contractor to order materials and/or equipment of a type from a source
approved and nominated by the Engineer at no increase to the Contract
PT. PRAPANCA ENGINEERING TS - 1

sum.
d. If the Contractor subsequently fails to place such orders within a period of

four weeks from receipt of the engineer’s instruction, then the employer
shall have the right at his sole discretion to order the materials and/or
equipment directly from the manufacturer(s).
The cost of all such orders, including freight, shipping, insurance, handling and
administrative charges shall be deducted from the contract sum or recovered in
any other method at the discretion of the Employer.
4. EQUIPMENT
a. All equipment supplied shall be in accordance with this specification and

the relevant drawings and to the approval of the Engineer.
b. The capacities of all plant and equipment described in the contract are
minimum capacities and the contractor shall check them with the Engineer,
taking into account any variations which may be made to the systems
during the progress of the contract works.
c. The contractor shall be required to demonstrate at site that the duties
required of the equipment are obtainable.
d. Physical sizes of all plant and equipment are to be suitable for the space
allocated for accommodation of such plant and equipment ,taking into
account of requirement of access maintenance purposes.
e. In selecting brand and types of equipment ,the contractor shall ascertain
that facilities for proper maintenance ,repair and replacement are provided.
f. Where the contractor proposes to use an item of equipment other than that
specified or detailed in the drawing ,which requires any redesign of the
system, drawings showing the lay out of the equipment and such redesign
as required therefore shall be prepared by the contractor at his own
expenses Where such approved deviation necessitates a different quantity
and arrangement of material and equipment from that originally specified or
indicated in the drawings. The contractor shall furnish and install any such
additional materials and equipment required by the system at no additional
cost.
g. Equipment catalog and manufacturer specification must be submitted for
the examination and details shall be submitted for approval of the engineer
before equipment ordered.

This item shall include all information necessary for the engineer to
ascertain the equipment comply with this specification and drawings data
and sales catalogue of a general nature will not be accepted.
h Before ordering equipment the contractor shall provide the engineer with
full details of the weights and electrical characteristics of the equipment for
purposes of determining floor loading , power consumption etc.
i Manufacturer test certificate shall be submitted.
5. REJECTION OF UNSUITABLE MATERIALS, ETC.
a. The engineer shall be free to reject any plant, materials and workmanship
which not complying with the requirements of which are in any way
unsuitable and to order their removal and replacement, without additional
cost.
b. The engineer’s decision as to what constitutes compliance with
requirements and suitability shall be final and binding , the true intent and
meaning of the contract being that the whole of the contract works shall be
completed and acceptable by the E ngineer.
c. No rejected item shall be considered as a reason of a delay to meet the
completion date of the project
6. CHECKING DRAWINGS OF OTHER SERVICES
a. During the preparation of working drawings, the contractor shall liaise

closely with the main contractor, other building services and specialist
contractors to ensure complete coordinate of services installed by all
parties.
b. lf directed by the Engineer, the contractor shall without extra charge, make
reasonable modifications in the layout as needed to prevent conflict with
the works for the proper execution of work.
7. AS-FlTTED DRAWINGS
a. Within 14 days of reaching the date of practical completion of the works,

the contractor shall submit to the Engineer three prints of all as fitted

drawings together with one transparent negative of each drawing for the
whole installation. As fitted drawings shall show the complete installation
including all, piping. equipment, electrical wiring , maintenance accesses,
maintenance facilities and all necessary details for the proper maintenance
and operation of the system.
b. The exact scope and details of the manual shall be as describe in the
relevant section of the specification and agreed by the engineer.
8. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
a. Within 14 days of reaching the date of practical completion of the works,

the contractor provide four copies of operation and maintenance manuals
of the whole system ,each manual shall contain detailed description of the
system equipment ,operation and maintenance procedure ,suppliers and
spare part lists of equipment ,equipment installation, operation and
maintenance details and all other for the proper maintenance and operation
of the system.
b. The exact scope and details of the manual shall be as describe in the
relevant section of the specification and agreed by the engineer.
9. BUILDERS WORK
a. All foundations ,footings, pits, gases, structural ducts, trenches holes and
other civil work required for the installation will be provided by the main
contractor.
The contractor shall supply ,full particulars dimensions of the together with
the weights of all equipment.
b. The contractor shall supply detailed working drawings, mark out on the site,
provide foundation embedding material and give all necessary details for all
the builders work. The contractor shall monitor that the work is carried out
in accordance with his requirement and he will be responsible for the cost
of all such work and material due to lack of supervision, in correct
submitted information or details and late submission of working drawings.
c. The contractor shall provide all sleeves and inserts required before the
floors and walls are built, sleeves shall be provided for all mechanical
piping passing through floor slabs and wall constructions, unless otherwise
indicated sleeves shall be of the same materials as the pipes which passing

through.
d. Where any work pierces water proofing including water proof concrete the
method of installation shall have the approval of the engineer. The
contractor shall provided all necessary sleeves ,caulking and flashing
required to make opening absolutely water tight.
10. COORDINATION BETWEEN TRADES
a. The contractor shall liaise with the main contractor and other contractors
and tradesmen who will be carrying out other services work on the site prior
to the commencement of actual installations, due to ensure that the work of
all trades are occupy for the same pipe and duct space in ceiling void.
All contractor shall be aware to leave clear access for future provision of
these services within builders work shafts, plants, plant rooms and false
ceiling. etc.
b.No claims shall be entertained for noncompliance with this clause.
11. SETTING TO WORK
a. As soon as practicable after the completion of any section of the

installation, the contractor shall, when it was authorized by the engineer
,give notice to the main contractor that it is required to operate this section
and shall request the main contractor to clean out all plant spaces remove
all rubbish under his control ( rubbish etc, caused by the contractor or his
contractors must be removed by them selves ). And generally leave the
particular portion of the installation and the access ways thereto in a tidy
and finished state. The sub- contractor shall then set such portion of the
installation to work, adjust all regulators, controls, etc, and adjust the
system so that it complies the specification requirements.
b. In the case where the overall building program is such that the contractor
will need to return for the purposes of regulation, adjusting, etc. to portions
of the buildings which by that time may be shall allow in his tender
accordingly and shall take all necessary precautions against damage when
working in such areas.

12. RESULTS OF TESTS
If the test results show that the plant and equipment is not functioning in a
satisfactory manner or providing the requirements due to incorrectness of faulty
work by the contractor and if this be the case, the contractor shall, when called
upon, carry out at his own expense such alterations, replacements and
adjustments which may be required , which is acceptable by the engineers.
13. GUARDS OR RAILINGS
The contractor shall provide removable guards or railings for moving or rotating
parts.
14. LABELS
The contractor shall provide labels for all equipment, fuses, terminals, switches,
handles, keys, instruments, gauges, valves, circuit and piping diagrams,
indicators and wherever their provision will facilitates the proper operation and
maintenance of the system.
All lettering will be English with a translation into Indonesian adjacent to it.
15. DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD

a. The defects liability period for the purpose of this contract shall be a period
of twelve months from the “ date of practical completion” providing that
during such period the contractor shall have remedied and made good all
faults or defects as described below ,to the engineers and employers
satisfaction.
b. During the defects liability period, the contractor shall at his own cost
remedy and repair with all possible discreet any faults or defects in the
plant or works due, in the opinion of the engineer, to faulty materials
workmanship or design and shall indemnify the employer and or the main
contractor against any damage or injury to the building contents and I or
occupants arising as a result of such faults or defects.
c. If the contractor fails to remedy such faults or defects within a reasonable
time the employer may proceed to do at the risk and expense of the
contractor and without prejudice to such other rights as the employer may
have under the contract.
d. Other requirement shall be as described in the relevant section of the
specification.
16. AS-NEW CONDITION
At the time of handover of the contract works after the period of maintenance
the whole installation shall be in “ as new” condition.
The contractor shall , during the course of the contract , protect all plant and
equipment and shall restore I repaint I repair as necessary before completion of
the contract.
17. MAINTENANCE AND SPARES
a. All equipment shall be designed to facilitate inspection , cleaning,

replacement and repair of individual components without need
unnecessary removal of other components, Identical items of equipment
shall have parts inter changeable one with another or, matched sets
forming interchangeable units and shall be recorded and described in the
operation and maintenance instructions.
b. Facilities shall be provided for proper isolation of equipment for
maintenance work without affecting the working of other parts of the
system, Protection for live parts” shall be given by the use of interlocks,
isolators, shrouding or by combination of these, There shall be warning
labels show when parts remain alive when the isolator is opened and these
parts shall be properly screened from inadvertent contact.
c. All special tools or adjusters required for maintenance of the maintenance
of the equipment shall be supplied by the contractor in a suitable fitted
galvanized box, with padlocking facilities.
d. The contractor shall submit to the engineer a list describing the spares their
number unit rates and where appropriate the anticipated frequency of
replacement.
Such spares and replacement of substantial part of the equipment and
degradation of performance or reliability.

18. CONTRACTOR
a. What is meant by the Contractor in this specification is the implementing
agency that has been selected and been awarded a work contract for the
supply and installation of air conditioning installation of major equipment
until completion.
b. Contractor must learn and understand all laws and regulations,
general requirements along with their supplements, requirements
set up by the manufacturers manufacturing the air conditioning units,
tender document books, bundle of drawings as well as written instructions
that have been issued.
c. Contractor may request an explanation to the Board of Directors /
PMSC / Planners or a designated party when in its opinion on the tender
documents, drawings or other matters there have been things that need
clarifications.
d. Contractor shall study and also examine the implementation of the work
carried out by any other Contractors who also participate in working on the
project if the work of others can affect the smoothness of the Contractor ‟s
work. Whenever an interruption occurs, then the Contractor shall act
upon the suggestions for improvement for all parties.
19. COORDINATION WITH OTHER PARTIES

a. Contractor shall coordinate with other parties for the smooth carrying out of
this project work. Especially coordination with the civil works Contractor,
electrical, plumbing, fire protection Contractor.
b. For all equipment and machinery provided or completed by other
parties or purchased from other parties who fall within the scope of this
installation, the Contractor shall be fully responsible for all these pieces of
equipment and work.
20. WARRANTY PERIOD.

All installation work and its equipment must be guaranteed to work perfectly.
All work included in the scope of this work should be given the warranty
period for 1 (one) year after the handover of the work.
21. MAINTENANCE PERIOD

The maintenance period shall be 180 (one hundred eighty) calendar days
from the date of the first handover to be accompanied by the Minutes of
Handover. The Contractor must repair any defects or deficiencies caused by
lack of perfect or proper execution and / or materials used. This repair work
must be done upon receipt by the contractor the first warning issued by the
Directors / Construction Management / Planners. The Contractor shall repair
any damages caused by the execution of this job.
If the Contractor neglects this warning or the repair work they have done is
not perfect or not as expected, the Construction Management is entitled
to ask someone else to repair or replace at the contractor‟s account.
After the maintenance period elapses and any damage or deficiency has
been remedied or repaired properly by the contractor, then the work may be
handed over for the second time.
22. WORK HANDOVER

The work must be completed entirely and handed over for the first time at the
time prescribed above. Notification of handover of the work must be stated
in writing by the Contractor, by setting forth the desired date of handover,
within 1 week prior to their desired handover to the Construction
Management. If the work has satisfied the requirements, the Construction
Management will accept the work for the first time, expressed in writing in the
Minutes of the First Handover.
23. PERMITS
a. All permits and requirements necessary for carrying out this installation
shall be done by the Contractor and the Contractor shall bear all the
associated costs.
b. All inspection, testing and other particulars along with their official
statements which may be required for the implementation of this
installation shall be conducted by the contractor and the costs related
thereto shall be borne by the Contractor.
c. The Contractor shall be responsible for the use of patented tools, the
possibility of compensation claims and costs required for this. The
Contractor shall submit a written statement regarding this.

I. AIR CONDITIONING WORKS.
A. SCOPE OF WORK
1. EXTENT OF WORK.
The work described in this specification covers, the supply, installation, testing,
commissioning and maintenance of mechanical ventilation and air conditioning
installation of the building in accordance with this specification and associated
drawings, and without abrogating the more extensive described elsewhere in
the specification and drawing includes the following:
a. Supply and installation of all equipment Split air conditioner (split wall, free
standing), fans etc as shown on the drawing.
b. Supply and installation of ventilation air duct, complete with splitter damper,
support, hanger and other necessary material to get proper installation.
c. Supply and installation of intake I fresh air and exhaust grille, complete
with, support, hanger, including frame and all auxiliaries.
d. Supply and installation anti vibration mounting for all equipment.
e. Supply and installation of all access manhole to ceiling space where
required and platform around lU above ceiling for maintenance purposes.
f. Supply and installation of Exhaust Air Fan, Toilet Exhaust and fan units,
following ducting systems and other equipment with the capacity, type and
amount of equipment in accordance with the schedule.
g. The procurement and installation of flue systems following the air
outside and inside insulation, damper, dampers, diffuser / grille, hanger
and other fittings.
h. Painting and labeling of duct and pipe work and equipment as necessary.
i. The carrying out of testing, adjusting, balancing and commissioning
of all equipment and air conditioning systems, including carrying out
measurements and make a report.
j. Training of the employers staff for proper operation of the entire system.
k Provide operation and maintenance guide book.
2. IMPLEMENTATION REQUIREMENTS
a. Installation that is stated in this specification shall be accomplished in
accordance with the applicable laws and regulations currently in force in
Indonesia and do not conflict with the provisions of the Work Safety Service
Agency.
b. All the terms of acceptance of materials, equipment, methods of
installation, the quality of work and others for this installation system shall
be in accordance with the international and national standards such as ARI,

ASHRAE, SMACNA, ASTM, NFPA, AMCA , ASME by always considering as
important the rules / standards / National requirements.
c. All equipment and machinery installed for this system, apart from the
above requirements, also must not deviate from the requirements
issued by their manufacturer.
d. Design Conditions:
a. Ou tsi de Ai r Co n di ti o n s
- Temperature 35 C
- Relative Humidity 78%
b. Conditions in the room (all conditioned room)
- Temperature 24 C ± 1 C
- Relative Humidity 55% ± 5% RH
c.Noise Criteria
- Office 40-45 NC
- Corridors, Public Areas 40-45 NC
3. WATER DRAINAGE PIPES

a. Job
Contractor shall install drainage pipes (drain) of air conditioning machines
down to the nearest disposal site in the channel hidden or unobtrusive.
b. Material
To discharge water (drain), PVC pipe shall be used.
c. Equipment
Condensation drain pipes must be equipped with a control basin, swan neck
and other equipment necessary. Insulation layer shall be given up to about 2
meters or to areas where there is no condensation at the exterior part of the
pipe, insulation material must be of fiber glass, or styrofoam polyurethene of
D.I. type or similar type of fire-resistant materials as thick as 1 ". The outiside
section shall be painted in accordance with a color that is approved by the
Board of Directors /Construction Management / Planners.
d. Wall Penetration
If the pipes should go through walls, floors, etc., these pipes must be
protected with a layer of vibration and a larger size pipe.

4. REFRIGERANT PIPE
a. Refrigerant pipes should all be carefully done and as good as possible. All
parts of these pipes must be clean, dry and free from dust and dirt.
Copper pipe of type L or K that is "dehydrated" & "sealed" should be used.
b. Connection
Pipe of "hard drawn tubing" type should be connected with the mediation
of "wrought copper fittings" or "non purous brass fittings." It is
recommended that silver solder with the blowing of mupia gas such as dry
Nitrogen gas into a pipe that is being connected to avoid the formation of
oxide scale in the pipes.
Soft solder such as "50-50" shall not be used. Solder of "95-95" can be
used except in the pipe hot gas "discharge" pipes.
Pipes of "soft drawn tubing" type can be connected with solder, or other
flame that is suitable for refrigerant pipe. When "precharged refrigerant lines"
are provided by the manufacturer, manufacturer's instructions should be
seriously and truly observed.
If there is excess of "precharged" pipes, a coil should be established
and supported on a flat field
c. Installation
Refrigerant piping should be well supported to prevent from flexing.
Vibration dampers should be installed to prevent the forwarding of vibration to
the building. Where applicable, vibration dampers should be mounted on the
pipe.
Refrigerant pipe planned and installed in the field shall be implemented
in accordance with the "ASHRAE GUIDE BOOK" or the
manufacturer's recommendation. The height difference and distance
between the condensing unit and the evaporator blower unit should still
meet the requirements of the manufacturer. After the pipe installation work
is complete then the entire circuit must be tested against leakage.
Pipe Insulation
- Suction pipes / discharge line refrigerant must be insulated with
thermal insulation such as armaflex, superlon or similar.
PIPE DIAMETER 16-25 mm 25-50 mm
Isolator Thickness 20 mm 25 mm
- On the roof insulation should be covered with a layer of moisture-
resistant metal jacket type. Pipes must be supported at every 2 meters
and at every turn and branching.

5. DRAIN PIPING
The Contractor shall install drainage pipes (drain) of the AIR
CONDITIONING machines up the closest place of disposal in the
hidden and unobtrusive channels.
a. Material
For waste water (drain) the PVC pipe shall be used, of AW type complete
with the thermal insulation.
b. Equipment
Drain condensation pipes must be equipped with a control basin, swan neck
and other equipment that are needed. An insulation layer up to the
length of 3 meters or up to areas where condensation does not occur the
outer part of the pipe section.
c. Wall penetration
Whenever penetrating walls, floor plate etc., these pipes shall be given
the vibration damping layer and protected with a larger size pipe.
d. With the piercing work taking place for air conditioning installation purposes,
it is the responsibility of contractor to carry out closure and the putting back of
the work to normal and guaranteed no leaks occur.
6. HANGER AND THE BUFFER / PIPE LEVERAGE

All insulated pipes should be supported / suspended and given a cushion
to fit the size of the pipes in building construction. The construction of
hanger or leverage should be such to allow expansion / fixed thermal
pipeline construction and reduce the thermal vibration transmission as little as
possible.
Pipe hanger and support should be given the vibration dampers of
Neopreme Spring type, as shown in the picture / details. Hanger and the
buffer shall be supplied and installed by the contractor according to the
requirements set forth in these technical specifications.
Horizontal pipes should be hanged (supported) well, those hangers must
be installed in building construction. In general, for pipes of 100 mm or more
should be supported every 2.5 meters (maximum) and for pipes of 80
mm or less should be supported every 2.40 meters (maximum). The
details of the distance of hangers / leverages can be seen in the schedule
pipe size and the allowable distance of support.
Contractor shall provide all the necessary fittings for hanging, and this must
be coordinated with the Engineer.
Vertical pipes must be supported with clamps (pipe clamps) that rely on
building construction. Parallel to the wall and column lines, straight and neat.
There shall not be any pipes supported or hung on the other pipes.
All hanger / leverage for isolated pipes must not penetrate the insulation
material.
All the pipes in the room shall remain to be supported with the leverage
that prevent forwarding of vibration (vibration eliminating, hangers, rubber in
shear).
All hangers, pipe supports shall have their materials made of steel, can
be adjusted for height (adjustable), originally painted with anti-rust paint and
finished with black color.
The distance between the support may not exceed the size below without
the approval of the project owner / Supervisor / Planner.
Size of Pipe Maximum Support Distance (M)
20 25 – 2,00
32 150
– 2,40
150 above 2,50
● Vertical riser that goes through the floor, on the floor that is
penetrated shall be supported by the type of "collar" or "clamp" in
which the pipes are clipped at an "angle" firmly. Around the riser pipe
that there is still a gap / hole shall be closed tightly with a rubber seal.
It is not justifiable to close such cracks with cast concrete.
● When the pipe and clamp are different in terms of their material, a
gasket shall be installed between the pipe and the clamp.
All the pipes that are supported (hung) / they shall be supported in
such a way so that they will not cause any pressure on pump isolation.
Protective metal plate at least a minimum of BjLS 100 with the length of
150 mm (6 ") on both sides of the clamp saddle or roller.
7. WORK BY OTHERS
a. Work by Main Contactor

All concrete equipment plinths and concrete piers in plant room, keyed to
the floor slab and graded where required.
Plinths and concrete support shall have shapes and dimensions as
indicated on the detailed drawings to be provided by the main contractor.
Concrete inertia bases for pumps including steel frame works and
reinforcement for all pumps shall be provided by main contractor.

Detailed construction drawings shall be provided by related sub contractor.
Supply and the building in of all pipe sleeves, puddle flanges and
equipment holding down bolts, where required to be built in during
construction.
The contractor shall work in coordination with the main contractor.
Access hatches, doors and panels as required in false ceiling, masonry

riser, masonry shaft, walls, roof spaces plant rooms, and at other places by
main contractor and in accordance with his details to allow access for
adjustment, maintenance, and cleaning, to be reclarified based on noise
criteria.
Insulation of roof desk, using 50 mm think rock wool of the density 64

kg/m3, complete with aluminum foil, wire mesh and supports/hanger to the
underside of roof deck.
All cutting, patching, framing, furring in chasing and making good,

associated with the building construction for the passage of ductwork,
pipes, conduit and grilles etc
on drawings all roof penetration for cables and pipes, over flashing by the
contractor.
b. Work by electrical contractor
Provision of electricity to all equipment.

The MVAC contractor shall give the information and confirm the demand or
power consumption of all equipment in accordance with provision the works
the electricity supply and wiring by electrical contractor.
8. REGULATIONS
Not with standing anything to the contrary contained herein pertaining to this
installation , it shall be the contractors responsibility to ensure all the works is in
strict accordance with following statutory obligations , regulations and
specifications together with any amendments made thereto.
a. Air conditioning standard as ASHRAE , ARI , SMACNA
b. The regulations for electrical installation published by the institution of
electrical engineers, London

c. Indonesia Electrical standard ( PUlL).
B. AIR COOLED PACKAGED I SPLIT WALL SYSTEM
1. SCOPE.
The scope of this section set out the requirement of the ac units sets for Office
building , Warehouse, Utility and etc.
2. GENERAL
a. This section specifies to furnish on site assembled AC units of the type size
and capacity as described attached. Unit fan and coil performance shall be
certified in accordance with ARI standard 430 -66 for fans and 410 —72 for
coils.
b. All units and accessories shall be supplied by manufacturers experienced
in the design and construction of similar equipment and who have made Air
Cooled Packaged units.
c. Condensing unit shall be suitable for operate at outdoor condition.
d. Before ordering the equipment ,The contractor shall furnish the following
information for each unit to the consultant for approval.
+ Complete manufacturers printed catalog.
+ Main dimension and weight.
+ Technical details ( cooling capacity ,Fans performance. curve sound
power level ,vibration mounting ,etc)
+ Spare parts.
e. All units and accessories shall be of minimum vibration and noise level
during operation ,should these be excessive and not within normal
acceptable standard ,the contractor shall be responsible for provision of
adequate vibration isolation and sound attenuation as recommended and
required by the consultant.
f. All unit and accessories shall be of the highest commercial standard and
shall be designed , constructed, rated , and tested in accordance with an
approved authority.
3. MATERIALS.
a. Unless specially state otherwise ,alI units shall be assembled on site, Type

of units as described in the schedule equipment attached.

b. Motor compressors filter and other component and accessories shall be
arranged so that they are accessible for repair, maintenance and
replacement.
c. Grease fittings shall be mounted directly on bearing unless the latter are
not readily accessible .where equipment bearings are not visible or are
inaccessible provided easily accessible extensions to bearings lubrication
fittings.
d. All casings shall be factory assembled for heavy gauge galvanized sheet
members and provided with sufficient access panels for proper lubrication
and maintenance.
e. All support and reinforcing members shall be treated to prevent corrosion.
f. The channel and / or angle framework for the casings shall be bolted
together to allow for possible replacement, of individual units components.
All bolts, nuts, screw, etc shall be stainless steel metal or bright cadmium
coated steel.
g. All joint in the casing shall be sealed airtight.
h. All units shall be internally insulated in the factory with minimum thickness
of 25 mm high density rigid section rock wool ( or approved equal insert
mineral fiber) faced to prevent erosion in the air stream.
i. Air filters shall be provided for all indoor unit I lU as specified in equipment
schedule.
j. All units shall bear the manufacturer name plate giving manufacturer name
serial and model number and date of manufacture.
C. AIR DUCT
1. SCOPE
The scope this section sets out the type, material construction, dampers
insulation ,accessories diffuser, grilles and installation of the ducting to be used
on this project and as indicated on the accompanying drawings.
2. APPLICABLE PUBLICATION & CODES.

a. ASHRAE the guide and date book.

b. SMACNA (Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractor National
Association)
3. GENERAL.
a. Unless specifically stated otherwise , the tern “ air duct when used in a
general context shall mean all duct work , fitting , dampers, supports,
gauges and all other component and accessories required for the complete
installation of the system as shown on the accompanying drawings.
b. All ductwork shall be manufactured as far as practicable to site dimensions
taken by the sub contractor, where site dimensions cannot be taken in
advance, dimensions shall taken from architectural / structural detail
dimensioned drawings and the sub contractor shall make suitable
provisions to accommodate any discrepancies that may occur between the
drawings and the site dimensions.
c. Within six months of being awarded the syb contractor ,or at least two
month prior to commencing work on site , whichever is the sooner, the
contractor shall submit to the consultant for approval complete shops
drawings for all ductwork system included in the contract.
d. Shop drawing shall included plant, sections, elevations, schematic and
detail of all systems and shall show locations and details of all dampers ,
splitters, hangers, supports, supply, return ,intake and exhaust air fittings,
joints flexible connections, test points, insulation, linings, kitchen hoods,
etc.
e. All ductwork and materials including linings, adhesives, flexible connection
gaskets, sealants fiberglass boards, etc shall satisfy in respect of
resistance to penetration of fire and spread of flame and smoke.
4. MATERIALS
a. Generally, all ductwork shall be of hot dipped galvanized steel sheet to SII
or BJLS (Baja Lapis Seng).
b. All detail of cross joints, longitudinal joints , take - offs bends, transitions
and shall be as shown on the drawings.
c. The dimension shown on the accompanying drawing in this specification
are clear internal size.
Where internal insulation is used , the thickness of the insulation must
be added to the dimensions shown on the drawing to determine the actual
duct size.
d. The thickness of galvanized metal sheet shall be accordance with the
following schedule:
Longest – side Gauge
Up to 300 mm BJLS 5O
325 to 750 mm BJLS 6O
775 to 1350mm BJLS 80
1375 to 2100mm BJLS 100
2125 to above BJLS 120
e. Jointing for flanged joints shall be formed from a rubber gasket or other
approved materials to thickness not less than 4 mm.
f. Test point for measuring air flow shall be provided:
- For all fans (in the straightest section of duct near to the outlet).
- For cooling coils (both before and after the coil).
- At other position indicated on the contract drawing.
Test hole shall be 50 mm diameter and fitted with an effective removable
cover.
D. DUCTING SYSTEM FOR EXHAUST FAN
This work includes all material procurement, installation and adjustment of

ducting that can be used in this project as stated in the planning
drawings and specifications.
1. STANDARD
As the guidelines for this work the following standards shall be used : THE
GUIDE from ASHRAE, SMACNA and NFPA No. 90 A.
2. GENERAL
a. Drawings and specifications only show the length of each chimney
size, equipment within the ducting and arrangement of air flue system
path. If there are deviations from the contract drawings that were deemed
appropriate by the contractor, then details of such deviation and the
reasons shall be submitted in writing to the Engineer /Construction
Management/ Planner for approval.
b. Deviations that have been approved shall be undertaken by the Contractor
at no additional cost except when it causes changes in design or
requirement.

c. The contractor is required to make working drawings (shop drawings) that

are approved.
3. MATERIAL
a. Materials used for this work are: Gauge Galvanized Steel or Zinc Coated
Steel.
All implementation shall be in accordance with detailed requirements
and
specifications given. Apart from it must also comply with the requirements
of
SMACNA Standard and the manufacturer.
b. The thickness of zinc coating (coating) on a minimum of Galvanized Steel
Sheet is as follows:
BJLS QZ/SWT
100 2,50
80 2,00
60 1,50
4. CONSTRUCTION
a. Construction requirements for the implementation of air chimney
installation:
● This installation system uses a low speed Ductwork. All duct
installation should be able to withstand speeds up to 2,000 ft per
minute and static pressure up to 2.5 to 3.5 inches of water.
● The contractor shall test the installation of ducting for leaks that
may occur.
● All of the connections that occur must be as tightly as possible
(airtight) if necessary a seal shall be given.
● Changes in the size of the duct must be approved in writing by the
Engineer/ Construction Management/ Planners.
b. Ducting system that is not enclosed by walls or the ceiling (outside the
building, inside coridor in a room without a ceiling), must be made of
alluminium sheet given good reinforcement (bracing) and supported /
hung on a solid building construction The thickness of duct is as follows
(for zinc Bjls):
THE BIGGEST SIZE PLATE TABLE
Up to 24 inches 20 US Gauge
24 inches to 48 inches 18 US Gauge
28 inches and above 18 US Gauge
c. Ducting system shall be made of "Zinc Coated Steel" and shall provided
with good reinforcement (bracing) and supported / hung on a sturdy
construction. The thickness of the duct is as follows (for Zinc Bjls):
SIZE OF DUCT BJLS
12" Bjls 60
13" up to 30" Bjls 70
31" up to 54" Bjls 80
54" up to 84" Bjls 100
84" and above Bjls 100
d. Air chimney dimensions indicated on drawings and specifications is internal

clear sizes. When an inner insulation should be, then the thickness of the
insulation should be added to the dimensions shown in the planning
drawings as the actual size of the the air chimney.
e. Where the chimney penetrates the wall or floor, an empty hole (free
space) shall be sealed with "a felt gasket" or "asbestos rope" and shall
be made neat with "sheet metal flange angle" in such a way to cover the
hole.
5. TURNS
All of the turns (elbow) should be made in accordance with their drawings
and specifications. All the turns/elbows in the supply duct should be
equipped with steering angles (vanes) in accordance with drawing
specifications.
All the turns / elbows shall be of "long radius elbow" type except
where circumstances do not allow. Sharp turns / elbows (90) should be
given the steering angles (vanes) in the form of appropriate aerodynamic
profile. Rounded corner with the inner radius less than the side of the duct,
the turns / elbows should be given the thin steering angles (single thickness
vanes).
6. TAPERS, OFFEST AND STREAM LINER

Whenever an obstacle that cannot be avoided occurs the contractor shall
make Tapers, Offset or Stream Liner depending the local conditions that shall
be made according to specifications.

E. FLEXIBLE JOINT AND DUCTS
Materials and installation methods for all flexible connections between ductwork
systems and equipment shall be of lead impregnated vinyl.
a. Flexible connections shall be provided at the suction and delivery

connections of all fans, fan coil and air handling units and elsewhere as
shown on the contract drawing or as may be required to eliminate vibration.
b. Aluminum flexible round ducts or a coated fiberglass fabric mechanically
interlock by aluminum spiral helix with pressure rating 300 mm WG and fire
resistance.
c. The contractor shall provided and install manual volume dampers where
required for the proper regulation of the ventilation and air conditioning
system whether shown on the contract drawings or not complete with the
fixing devices — locking quadrant.
d. All volume dampers shall be provided in separate purpose — made flanged
casings of rigid contraction.
e. Fire dampers shall be fitted in all firebreaks walls and other fire barriers , all
fire dampers shall have a fire resistance rating of not less than that of the
wall through which the ductwork passes.
f. Unless otherwise stated , fire dampers shall be held open by an approval
fusible link set at 68 degrees Celsius .the link will be arranged in an
exposed position upstream of the dampers.
g. the fire dampers shall be constructed generally to the same standards of air
tightness as the rest the system.
1. GRILLE AND DIFFUSERS
a. All air supply, grille, diffuser, return and exhaust fittings shall be provided of
the types shown on the contract drawings.
b. Unless otherwise stated or indicated on the document drawings, all supply
fittings shall have an opposable volume control device, the vanes or which
shall be spring — loaded or otherwise arranged so that they remain
permanently in their set position without vibration or noise ,where shown on
the contract drawings, return and exhaust air fittings shall also have
opposed blade dampers.
c. All grille, register and diffuser shall be capable of being removed easily

from the ductwork for access to dumpers ,etc and constructed in

accordance with best practice.
d. All supply and return air fittings shall have the facility for adjustment of the
air flow direction either by double deflection vanes or by specially designed
deflectors as in the case of slot diffuser.
e. Before any diffuser ,etc ,are ordered or manufactured of fitting commences
confirmation must be obtained from the consultant as to exact position and
finish of fittings required. Samples of every type grille, diffusers, etc, shall
be submitted to the consultant for approval before orders are placed.
f. The intake and discharge plenum of FCU I IU shall generally be designed
as indicated on the contract drawings an shall have an outside casing of 1 .
25 mm galvanized iron sheet.
2. INSTALLATION
a. All ductwork systems shall be installed generally in accordance with the

contract drawings but full allowance shall be made by the contractor for the
detailed development and on site coordination of the scheme and the future
removal and dismantling of sections of the works.
b. All ductwork shall be constructed and erected rigid and free from drumming
and movement. Ductwork shall be true to size and accurately lined up.
c. Rectangular duck work with max ,size over 18” shall be cross broken on all
four sizes of the duct.
d. Ductwork shall be constructed of prime quality galvanized metal sheet ,joint
shall be airtight, duct shall be so constructed and installed as to be from
vibration items not shown in detail shall be set forth in the SMACNA low
velocity and construction standard.
e. Access doors and panels in ductwork shall be adequately braced and of the
quick release pattern.
Multiple screw fixings shall not be accepted.
f. All grille and registers shall be mounted on a substantial frame connected
to be duct work and shall be provided with an approved gaskets.
g. All supports, hangers, brackets, stiffeners, etc shall be painted after
installation of the consultant.
h. Any damage to factory applied finishes shall be made good on site in the
manner recommended by the manufacturer and to the specification of the
consultant.

3. THERMAL DUCT INSULATION
a. All duct shall be insulated , thickness 25 mm ( specific, weight / density 32

kg! m3 ) or as otherwise indicated and with a thermal conductivity less than
0,04 w I mdeg.C
insulation shall be of the flexible type for concealed duct and of then rigid or
semi rigid type for exposed ducts. A vapor barrier facing material consisting
of. 0.50 mm thick aluminum foil double sided reinforced with impregnated
paper and glass fibers or other approved vapor barrier material shall be
applied to the exterior of all duct insulation.
All duct under exposed roof to exterior shall have 50 mm thick specific
weight and thermal conductivity.
b. Vapor barrier shall be non combustible insulation shall be secured to
rectangular ducts by welding pins or stick — clips and washer spaced not
over 300 mm at centers each way, of by a combination of the two methods
if necessary to accomplish a neat finishes installation In all cases where
insulations joint occur, facing tabs shall be overlapped not less 50 mm and
sealed by manufacturer of the facing material.
All punctures in the facing material shall be sealed, fresh air intake duct
shall have insulation thickness of 25 mm. Duct exposed in equipment
rooms , on the roof or in other locations where subjected to damage ,shall
be insulated, vapor sealed and finished with galvanized sheet metal.
4. DUCK LEAK TESTING
a. Testing procedures are to be conducted under the direct supervision of the

contractor in the presence of the owners Reprehensive
b. All duct runs shall be leak tested.
c. Prior to testing all traverse joints will be meticulously inspected for sealing
with the specified sealant.
d. The following guidelines will be implemented and necessary arrangements
for safe and proper performance of testing will be under the discretion of
the contractor:
1) Identify section of duct that will undergo leakage test
2) Seal and enclose all openings at branches and main end with G, 1
sheet and tape except the entrance to the duct where air is to be
injected.

3) Static pressure in the ducts should be limited to within 2 “to 3” SPWG.

Static pressure sensor shall be placed at the start and end of the duct
section undergoing test.
4) Survey all joints for available leaks, mark each leak repair. Do no apply
a retest until sealants have set.
5) Leak testing will be repeated until minimum leaks acceptable to the
owners project representative are attained.
F. VENTILATING FAN
1. SCOPE.
This section describes the need for tools, equipment and installation of mechanical
ventilation system for this project:
- Procurement and installation and testing of exhaust / intake fan, and
ducting installation.
- Exhaust / Intake Fan for engine room, Toilets and Warehouse. -
Exhaust / Intake Fan for Pump room, STP room and others.
- Exhaust / Intake Fan for Transformer room, etc.
- To provide fresh air intake fan for office space as noted on the drawing.
- To provide exhaust air fan from toilet, storage, etc as noted on the
drawing.
2 GENERAL
The following is in general terms concerning ventilation and ventilator,
for technical specifications to be followed which is special is in accordance
with the schedule indicated on the machine schedule drawings.
Ventilation equipment shall be installed in accordance with the ones shown in
the drawings and / or the requirements below. The entire installation of
mechanical ventilation should comply with local requirements, ordinances and
/ or regulations that apply.
Contractor shall provide and install electric fan in accordance with drawings
and specifications. All fans are of the axial type fan, propeller,
centrifugal or determined in accordance with dynamic specifications
and tested by the manufacturer. Once installed fan should not create
excessive noise. All fans shall be mounted with rubber around them
(vibration dampening) before installation.
Contractor is required to file for approval prior to the consultant about the
product, type and specifications of equipment to be used in this project.
All fans must be approved for use by the Engineer /Construction Management
/ Planners before the installation work can be done.
a. The contractor shall select all fan as mentioned and scheduled on the
drawing.
b. Maximum fan/motor rotation is 1500 rpm for propeller fan and 1000 rpm
for axial fan.
c. Fresh air supply for office space shall be provided with silencer at
discharge side.
d. Exhaust from toilet which used main / central exhaust fan at roof level is
axial fan and shall be provided with silencer at suction side.
e. The silencer shall reduce fans noise at 20 DB.
f. Fan shall be installed with used of anti vibration mounting of spring or
rubber in shear.
g. Connection to air duct shall used flexible like canvas or similar material to
protect transferring of fan vibration through the duct.
3. AXIAL FAN
a. Fan housing are to be round type casing made of hot dipped galvanized
steel. b. bearings
- fans and motors shall be provided with grease packed close tolerance
ball bearing, designed for quiet operation and calculated life time of
100.000 hours under the particular duty of the fan
- Bearing shall be installed in grease relief housings with dust seals
,grease nipples shall be provided in accessible positions and piped to
bearing housing to allow greasing of bearings without removing any
components.
b. Motors
Motors shall have a kW rating not less than that specified on the
schedule. Motor rating are nominated as a basis for tendering only the
shall be checked before ordering to ensure that they have a minimum of
120 % of the power required by the fan for the installed duty.
Electrical connections to motor shall be extended via a conduit to a

terminal box on outside of the fan casing.
Where exposed to weather the motors and electrical work shall be
weather proof.

Ensure that motors mounted in the fan airway have frame sizes an
shapes consistent with the manufacturer’s air quantity and noise level
data.
Motors shall comply with the following specifications:
- Totally enclosed type for direct driven type
- Winding insulation class E.
- Horizontally mounted.
c. Impellers.
Impellers have aerofoil blades and shall be statically and dynamically
balanced .certification of balance shall be submitted.
Impeller blade pitch shall be readily and accurately adjustable of blade
pitch on site will not affect the static or dynamic balance.
d. Casing and Assembly

Fans shall have a flanged casing extending for the length of the fan and
motor ( unless specified or shown otherwise) , complete with one or more
airtight access doors suitably for easy fan inspection.
Fans of 300 mm diameter or less may have casings without access

Doors. Provided heavy gauge galvanized wire guards as supplied by the
fan manufacturer on accessible fan intakes and discharges.
Guards shall be easily removable for access and shall be designed to
prevent accidental contact with moving parts under the full weight of the a
man. Support fans on vibration isolators. where spring vibration are
specified provide bracing to resist the axial and for ional thrust of the fan
Ensure that vibrations from the fan are not transmitted to the structure via
bracing.
4. PROPELLER FAN
a. Fan shall be wall mounted type.

b. Fan shall be constructed with board surface impeller using to move air
smoothly with relative quietness.
c. For small diameter propeller fan blade assembly shall be constructed of

special unbreakable hard plastic material to resist heat deformation.

d. For large diameter propeller fan ,as high pressure type shall be constructed
of steel aluminum die cast or other shall be constructed of steel with rust
proof painting.
e. Motor shall be operated fan directly and winding insulation class E.
5. EXHAUST FAN
a. All the fans should have a pilot light and on/off switch in the location /
panel shown in the drawings and can be monitored and / or can be
remotely controlled from the central control room in the available control
panel.
b. Fan with power 1 Hp or smaller can be “phased” as a "single phase".
c. In principle, the exhaust fan to be installed is an exhaust fan of the
type commonly used, where: Capacity : According to the plan drawings.
Type : According to the plan drawings Static Pressure : According to the
plan drawings. The exhaust fans to be installed are of the types commonly
used, where : Exhaust fans shall have a damper that automatically operate
driven by motor or in other words if the exhaust fans are turned off the
damper must be be to close and the around.
G. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATION
1. GENERAL
This section covers the general requirement for electrical work to be installed
under this specification.
The contractor shall supply and install all electric wiring , control panel and level
control etc, for the complete, safe and satisfactory operation of the plant
covered by the specification.
2. REGULATION AND STATUTORY REQUIREMENT
The entire electrical installation shall be in accordance with the regulation and
requirement of all relevant authorities having jurisdiction over the installation.
The requirement of I. E. E wiring regulation (l 5th Edition ) shall be taken as the
minimum standard for this installation.

3. ELECTRICITY SUPPLY
The electricity supply will be 220 V/I phase/50 Hz and 380 V/3 phase/50 Hz,4
wire. All equipment shall be designed to operate with —+ 19 % voltage
tolerance without a loss of rated output.
The contractor shall be responsible for extending the supply from the above
mentioned isolator/distribution board and shall include all electrical works
including control panels, starter, conduits and wiring etc. necessary for the
satisfactory operation of their equipment offered.
4.AC ELECTRICAL, includes but not limited to:

Electrical work that is meant here is all implementation of installations related
to Air Conditioning work packages system and mechanical ventilation in order
that they will be capable of functioning well, the technical specifications should
be the same as electrical work, among others:
a. Installation of indoor cable uses high impact PVC conduit type while
for outdoor installations uses this type of complete metal conduit elbow,
and its accessories.
b. Scope of the work Executor for the AC system in this project includes
the procurement and installation of all control panels and AC power
panels equipped with components of the panel, grounding,
termination in accordance with the design drawings.
c. Control for the existing automatic setting of temperature, humidity,
water flow, air flow, damper, damper indicator and all the necessary
equipment on the air conditioning system for the system to work properly
in accordance with the drawings and specifications shall be provided and
installed by the job Executor. All existing equipment and which may be
required to carry out the work shall be done by the Executor of this work
to show the maximum results.
5. REQUIREMENTS FOR THE WORK

All electrical work must be carried out in accordance with the
regulations, standards, requirements PUIL-year 2000 and the Work Safety
Bureau.
In addition to that they must also meet the requirements or standards of the
State and the manufacturer.

If there are differences, it should be selected which is more appropriate.

All test and inspection and testing of official information that may be
required executed for implementation by the Executor / Contractor of this
work and all the costs incurred shall be included in the bid.
6. MATERIALS
All materials used must be of top quality, made in Germany, USA, or
equivalent unless otherwise stated separately.
The executor of the work should coordinate with other parties as far as
possible to obtain uniform equipment equipment from the same brand for all the
work in this project.
7. EQUIPMENT, ETC
a. Each unit of equipment shall be equipped with a safety system
separately.
b. For each phase the panel should be given an indicator light or measuring
tools.
c. All AC power panels use a thick plate of minimum of 2 mm and
should be given an anti-rust paint layer.
d. All the existing panels, switches, indicators, measuring tools and others
should be provided with a clear name and is should not easily be
damaged.
e. All measuring tools that are installed should be from the most appropriate
and accurate working area 2%.
8. RESERVES FUSES
For each panel should be provided as many as spare fuses which are
available and stored in a special place and given a badge.
9. CABLE SPLICING
All cable connections should be made in accordance with the existing
requirements of which among others are:
a. Connection of copper wire connector should use the appropriate
copper and coated with white lead.
b. Connection of rubber insulated cables must be insulated with rubber.

c. Connection of PVC insulated cables shall be PVC isolated. The cables to
be joined must be color coded or given name.
10. CABLES
All wiring shall be carried using PVC insulated stranded single core cupper
conductor cable to B.S. 6004, 6231, 5345 or 6500 as appropriate.
The conductor shall confirm loads and sizes of cables prior to placing orders.
All main conductors (including neutral if needed, in this project using
autotransformer and no need neutral for the Main building and office building)
shall be colored in accordance to PUlL for their length , and the phase to which
they are connected All control wiring shall be colored coded using spiral stripe
tracer on base color.
All PVC insulated wiring including earth wires shall be enclosed in conduit or
approved trucking.
To eliminate the possibility of damage to cable due to thermal expansions
allowance for movement shall be made by the introduction of bend or set in
each cable / core adjacent to the terminal.
Cable shall , at all times , be handled with care and every effort made to avoid
damage .they shall always be pulled from top of the drums. Care shall be
exercised when breaking the rotation of the drums and under no circumstances
shall babble be dragged over loose earth of concrete .Approved type of cable
rollers shall be used,
After installation, all cables shall be tested for continuity and insulation
resistance and record of test submitted to the engineer for approval single core
c able shaft be pullet into conduit only after the whole network ,or a complete
section of conduit has been installed , tested for continuity and swabbed
through.
The contractor will be deemed to have allowed in his tender sum for applying
sufficient lengths of cables of each type and size to complete the installation ,
including the due allowances for additional lengths for cutting and waste.
Unless specifically instructed by the engineer to the contrary, the size of cable
employed for various type of wiring, shall not less than the following list:
- power circuits 2,5 mm 2
- Earth circuits 2,5 mm 2
- control circuits 1,5 mm 2
11. STARTER
Except as otherwise provided by the manufacturer or where otherwise stated,

the type of starter used are:
Power Input Motor Type of Starter

Up to 5 kW On/Off Switch (DOL)
6 kW 50 kW
–
Star Delta
55 kW and above Soft Starter function for Fluctuative loads
equipped with Variable Speed Controller
Variable Speed Controller: Inverter

This equipment must be equipped with harmonic filters, RF filters and motor output
as a unitary coil unit / build-ins for optimal tool and for their functionality to be
optimum and save their placement.
In addition, they shall still meet the standards of VDE, EN, IBC,
SEN. Input:
• Voltage : 380-415 VAC, 3 Phase

• Factor cos : 0.9 ~ 1.0
• Control :
• Speed : 0 -120 Hz
• Current Limit : 0 - 105% FLC
• Hight Torque Start : Selector Vector / Freq. Ratio
• Ramp Shape : Linear / Sinne / Sine
• Ramp Setting : 0 -3200 secs.
• Analog Output 0-20 mA, 0-40 mA
• RelayFacility : 0-120 Hz
• Analog Input : 0 -10 V, 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA,20-
4 mA, 20-0 mA
• Digital Input : 0 24 V
12. TESTING WORK

Testing work includes but not limited to the following decomposition, so the
system can function properly, among others:
Executor / Contractor shall perform all the testing, test and balancing
equipment of air conditioning system installation, witnessed by the
Supervisory Consultant / Planners / Project Owners and other parties whose
presence should be needed.
Before carrying out measurements and TAB (Testing, Adjusting & Balancing),
the Contractor shall propose methods of work Pressure Test &
Commissioning, quantities to be measured and measuring tools that are
used, to Supervisory Consultant and the Planners Consultant and ask for
approval, no later than 2(two) weeks before the job is executed.
The entire cost of this work shall be borne by the Contractor and shall be
included in the bid.
13. EQUIPMENT TO BE PREPARED

The materials required to perform tests should be prepared minimally by
the Executors / Contractors, among others:
a.Measuring Tools
In making measurements, the Job Executor / Contractor must use
the measuring equipment / instrument with high accuracy level
(Laboratory Standard).
b.Testing Standards
The method of measurement shall be in accordance with the method
of ASHRAE Standard ANSI / ASHRAE - III - 1988.
c.W a t e r
Shall become the responsibility of the Job Executor/ Contractor.
d.E l e c t r i c a l
Shall become the responsibility of the Job Executor / Contractor.
14. TYPES OF TESTING FOR AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM

Type of the testing work on balancing and adjusting of this installation, by
and large includes the decomposition of the following, among others:
a. Water Distribution System
Testing for leaks at all connections when the chiller pipes are given the
pressure of 15 kg / cm 2 and cleaning / flushing of the installed pipes.
Tests on the installation system condensation on the outer surface of
chiller water pipe. Quantities to be measured and recorded, including
temperature and pressure of water in and out and the water flow rate from
all AHU units and pumps.
b. Air Distribution System
Testing methods should be made to the leakage of overall
connections and ducting branches, ducting supply, return ducting,
ducting freshair and exhaust ducting.
For the smoke method the contractor must provide a generator / unit
for the method of smoke, according to the method of test and
measurement of ANSI / ASHRAE III-1988, SMACNA standards.
Testing should be done to leaks at the connection, temperature,
speed and amount of air flow in the branches of ducting, diffuser, grille,
test holes in the supply duct and fresh air ducts.
Balancing and adjusting all the existing damper to obtain the appropriate
price. Quantities to be measured and recorded include:
Temperature and RH of air in and out of cooling coil of all the AHU.
Temperature, RH and air flow on the main chimney (main duct) of air
supply and return as well as the branching and the fresh air intake.
Temperature, RH and air flow discharge at all outlets diffuser and grille.
c. Electrical
Measurement and test of the strength of currents and voltages, rpm
every phase of motor compressor units and the existing power-
management system. Comparison with the planned price or
manufacturer's data.
d. Temperature, RH and Room Noise Level
Measuring and testing of the temperature and humidity in the room
which are conditioned at several measuring points and the noise that
occurs in the room.
15. ELECTRICAL TESTS.
The precise method of carrying out the following test shall be agreed with the
engineer prior to commencement.
The following items shall be tested in the sequence indicated and a completed
report shall be by the contractor and submitted to the engineer for approval.
16. REQUIREMENTS FOR MATERIALS

a. General

All materials that are to be supplied and installed by the Contractor shall be
brand new and such materials shall be suitable for installation in the tropics.
Materials must be of good quality products from the latest production. For
the materials mentioned below then the Owner must ensure that the goods
are good and new by mean so for showing the delivery of mail order from
the dealers / agents / factory.
Contractor must be willing to replace the material that is not approved due
to deviating from the specifications or other matters, where such
replacement is at no extra cost.
b. List of Materials
For all the materials offered, the Contractor must complete a list of materials
that mentions the brand, type, class complete with a brochure / catalog that
shall also be attached at the time of tender. The lists table of these materials
are preferred for the components in the form of goods produced in factories.
c. Reference to Brand / Product Factory
If in the technical specifications or on the drawing a number of particular brands
or quality class of the certain materials or components, especially for
materials that the level of quality / factory mentioned, if at a later date during
the course of the project it happens that the materials listed on the label
material cannot be acquired by the Contractor for a very strong reason
acceptable to Owners, Engineer, Construction Management, and
Planners then those brands that cannot be
available can be replaced by other types with a certain sanction to the
Contractor.
II. PLUMBING WORKS
A. SCOPE OF WORK
1. EXTENT OF WORK
The work embraced by this specification covers the supply ,installation, testing ,
commissioning and maintenance of plumbing installation of the building in

accordance with this specification and associated drawings , and without
abrogating the more extensive details described elsewhere in the specification
and drawings, includes the following :
a. Supply and installation of complete soil, waste and anti symphonize / vent
piping systems and floor drains as shown on the drawing.
b. Supply and installation of rain water piping, outlet, etc as shown on the
drawings.
c. Installation and connection of all the sanitary fixtures I fittings/ accessories
including various taps, traps and cleaning of the fixture and protection after
installation.
d. supply and installation of the complete domestic water distribution system
including pumps, motors, controls, fittings, pipe works, pressure switches,
water meters, water hammer arrestors, pressure reducing valve set etc,
and any accessories as indicated on the drawings.
e. Supply and installation of all electrical works , including cables, isolators,
starters for pump motors, contactors, indicating lamps, conduits, control
wiring and switch cubicles for the proper automatic operation of the pumps.
f. supply and installation of all manhole covers, gully pit covers and surface
channels, gratings etc, as shown on the drawings.
g. Painting of pipe work and equipment.
h. Testing and commissioning
i. Training of the employers staff for proper operation of the entire system.
Supply and the building in of all pipe sleeves , puddle flanges and equipment
holding down bolts, where required to be built in during construction The
contractor shall work in coordination with the main contractor.
Access hatches doors and panels as required in false ceiling, masonry riser,
masonry shaft, walls, roof spaces , plant rooms and at other places by the main
contractor and in accordance with his details to allow access for adjustment,
maintenance and cleaning.
All cutting ,patching ,framing up ,furring in, chasing and making good
associated with the building construction for the passage of duct work pipes,
conduits, and grilles, etc.
Details on drawings shall be provided by the plumbing contractor. Under

flashing of all roof penetrations for cables and pipes, over flashing by the
plumbing contractor.
Construction of all manholes, gully pits, surface channels, connect support etc.
Work by electrical contractor.
Provision of electricity supply (feeder cable) to pump rooms, starter panel.

cables, etc, shall be supplied , connected and installed by the contractor
plumbing
Provision of electricity supply (feeder cable) to sump pumps electrical panel as

indicated on drawings, cables, etc, shall be supplied , connected and installed
by the con~~,actor plumbing contractor.
2. REGULATIONS
Not with standing anything to the contrary contained herein pertaining to this
installation , it shall be the contractor responsibility to ensure all the works is in
strict accordance with the following statutory obligations, regulations and
specification together with any amendments made there made thereto.
a. The relevant British and Indonesia Standard and Codes of Practice for
Plumbing works.
b. The supply rules of the Local Power Companies (PUIL)
c. Requirement of the local authorities having jurisdiction over the installation.
d. Domestic water quality shall comply with the local regulation (issued by
Minister of Health No.01 I BIRHUKMAS /1/1975).
B. PIPE WORK, FITTINGS AND VALVE
1. GENERAL
a. The contractor shall be responsible for the coordination and location of all

piping and equipment with other contractor before installation.

b. The contractor shall be responsible before commencing work for checking
all levels and gradients shown on drawing and for relating them to site
conditions to ascertain that conditions on site permit execution of work as
shown on drawings.
c. The contractor shall run all drainage pipes with a fan as indicated on the
drawing and shall give horizontal anti syphonage and vent pipes with a
corresponding upward gradient towards the main stacks.
d. All pipes, fittings, joints and jointing materials used shall be suitable for the
substances conveyed in the pipes and shall not deteriorate due to chemical
or atmospheric action. All pipes and fittings shall have ample strength for
the pressure involved.
e. The contractors shall provide for dissimilar metal joints to prevent
electrolytic action in the piping system, special flanged connection with
insulating gaskets plus insulating sleeves for the flange bolts shall be
provided.
f. Where pipes and rainwater outlets pass through roof slabs suitable
openings shall be left during casting by others. The contractor shall install
the pipes. rainwater outlets, etc. taking into account the water proofing
installation method as detailed by the engineer
g. Floor drains shall be installed in the same manners as rain water outlets
opening will be formed in the slabs by others, detailed dimensions and
location shall be supplied by the contractor
h. All valves , cocks, etc. which shall require any approval by local authority
must be submitted to the authority by the contractor who shall be
responsible for all charges incurred . no valves and fittings shall be installed
prior to approval by supervisor or construction management representative.
i. Exposed pipe work will not be permitted in occupied area.
j. The contractor shall locate all valve, traps, cleanings eyes and similar items
where they are easily accessible for operation, inspection and repair.
2. SCOPE OF W ORK
a. Clean Water Works

1)Installation pipes inside and outside the building .
2)Procurement and installation completely units of major equipment

required in water supply system in the form of pumps and equipment.
3)Procurement and installation of piping systems and equipment, including
piping, piping in the installation of pumps and distribution piping at
any point in out-take / outlet.
4)Installation of distribution pipes to individual sanitary appliances such as
closets, sinks, urinals and others.
b. Sewage and Waste Water Works

1)Procurement and installation of equipment needed for its sewerage system
and waste.
2)Installation of piping in sanitary equipment such as closets, sinks, urinals,
floor drain and others.
3)Drainage Works in construction, procurement and installation of rain
water. pipe from the roof of the building to the outside line of
building complete with its accessories.
c. Develop and prepare the Operational Standard and Procedure (SOP) for use
by the Engineering Team of the Owner in performing tasks and operations of
the building.
d. Executor / Contractor shall provide education to Engineering Team of the
Owner until they are well versed to operate the equipment as well to
maintain and all costs become the responsibility of the Executor / Plumbing
Contractor.
e. Testing and Commissioning
Conducting testing and commissioning of all systems installed in order to

obtain a good system in accordance with the requirements of laws and
regulations currently in force in Indonesia. And does not conflict with the
provisions of the Safety Bureau.
3. GENERAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
a. Time Frame

The length of time the implementation of the procurement, installation

and maintenance tailored to the stages of development in accordance
with the schedule.
b. Material
The Contractor shall ensure all units of equipment imported are free of
defective materials, improver material and guarantee the quality or quality
of goods in accordance with objective of the specifications, and must refer to
the standards of ISO 14000 / 14001, Environmental Management System.
Any material or equipment that do not meet the specifications should be

replaced with the corresponding ones for a period of not more than 1
(one) week after the minutes of receipt of goods have been signed.
All costs incurred due to replacement of material / equipment become
the responsibility / burden of the Contractor.
c. The drawings and specifications

The drawings and specifications of these plans are united and not split. If
there is any parts of the the job or the equipment are required for this
installation to work properly, and only one drawing is expressed in the
planning or design specifications alone. Contractor shall remain implement at
no extra cost.
d. Design Drawings
The design drawings that are included in the scope of plumbing work in
the Tender Documents are the drawings with the drawing code number
PL. Contractor shall check the design against the possibility of errors /
discrepancies in terms of quantities and the diameter of the pipe installation
and others. The things above should be submitted in writing or in the form of
drawings during the pre-bid clarifications meeting . These design drawings
are not meant to refer to all the pipes, fittings, valves and fixtures in detail. All
the parts mentioned above, although not described or mentioned in the
specification should be adjusted and installed by the Contractor, if necessary,

in order to complete this installation and can work well in accordance with the
implementation of the fair.
e. Working drawings
Working drawings for all work must always be at the field (site). Including
changes or other proposals and so forth. As long as the implementation of
this installation is running, the Contractor shall provide the signs with the
pencil / red ink on the set of drawings for any amendments, deletions or
additions to the installation, Such working drawings must be made in a
number of 1 (one) set tracing paper and 3 (three) sets of blue print.
f. Images Implementation
The Contractor shall make a detailed installation drawing (shop drawings) to
be approved by the Engineer, also must submit the Implementation
Drawings (As Built Drawings), which includes floor plans, as-built installation,
installation detail. Details of equipment from all over the installations
drawn on tracing paper. Implementation of the installation must meet the
general requirements that apply and follow the Guidelines for Plumbing
Indonesia in 2000. As-built drawings shall be made in a number of 1 (one)
set of tracing paper and 3 (three) sets of blue print.
g. Examples of Goods
The Contractor shall submit samples of materials to be used in
the implementation, to the Construction Management or the brochures
of the equipment and wait for approval from the Construction Management
before the tools are installed.
When these materials are questionable in terms of their quality they will be
sent to the investigation office at the expense of the Contractor.
If it turns out that there are materials that have been declared not good / not
be used by the Construction Management, then the Contractor shall

haul the materials out of the field within 3 (three) days, and they shall have
been removed out of the site.
h. Implemention Personnel
All work must be performed well by the experienced / capable people in their
own field (Skilled Labour), in order to provide the best and neat work.
For the specific implementation, Contractor shall provide a statement which
proves that the craftsman-builders who carry out such work do have the
experience and skill.
i. Security
The contractor is responsible for preventing materials / equipment for
this installation from theft or damage. Materials / equipment that are lost or
damaged must be replaced by the Contractor at no additional cost.
j. Coordination
In implementing this work, the Contractor must coordinate with the

other contractors who carry out structural, electrical, interior works and so
on, so the possibility of errors in installation can be minimized / eliminated.
k. Permits
1)All permits and requirements needed to perform this installation should be

done by the Contractor and the costs associated therewith shall be
borne by contractor.
2)All inspection, testing for feasibility of use from the relevant Office and
others along with its official statement that may be needed for
the implementation of this installation should be done by the contractor
and the costs related thereto shall be borne by Contractor.
3)Contractor shall be responsible for the use of patented tools, the possibility
of claims for compensation and the costs needed for this. Contractor
shall submit a written statement regarding this.

4)Contractor must submit a permit or an official statement from the authorities

for installation of this project to Construction Management, consultants
or other parties appointed to this.
l. Correlation Jobs
1)For all the existing excavation and piling work which shall be done by
other parties the Contractor shall provide the data, measurements
and drawings if any to the other parties who carry them out
2)All work on installing the machine holders shall be done by the Contractor.
Contractor shall provide the data, measurements, drawings and
equipment necessary to others who need them.
3)All pulling of electrical cables to the equipment panels shall be carried out
by other parties. The Contractor shall provide the data and
drawings needed to the other parties who carry out such work.
4)All pulling of water pipes including clean water pipes, sewage pipes that
are not listed in the drawings and specifications that shall be
conducted by the other parties, the Contractor shall coordinate and
provide the data, the size and the drawings to the other party who are
doing those work.
5)All electrical facilities, water, sanitary emergencies should be arranged by

the Contractor. The Contractor must coordinate with the other
parties to tackle this problem
m. Sub Contractors
1)Where appropriate experts or specialized personnel who are supposed to
do the works are not able to carry out installation, adjustment,
testing and other then the Contractor may give up some other
installations to the Sub Contractor upon approval of the Construction
Management.
2)Contractor shall be fully responsible for all scope of work, either alone or
that have been implemented in the sub-contracted.

3)Employer and the Construction Management can not be prosecuted if

there is a lawsuit because contractor’s payments to their sub-
contractors do run smoothly.
n. Field Supervisor
1)All work covered in this installation must be supervised by an experienced
staff. He is fully responsible for all installation work on this project.
2)Names, details of work experience, organizational structure should be
provided by the Field Supervisor Contractor to the
Construction Management to request approval.
3)If it turns out that in the opinion of the Construction Management,
consultants or authorities the designated Field Supervisor is ill-
equipped to lead the work the contractor must replace them with
others.
Contractor must maintain:

1.Daily Report Book
2.Weekly Report Book
3.Monthly Report Book
4 . Permit overtime work permit / holiday work permit .
4) Contractor shall report the results of their work progress every week
and its comparison with the schedule that has been arranged.
5) Where there is any difference, shall be included also the reasons and
ways to overcome it.
6) For each of the stages of installation that has been finished , the
Contractor shall obtain a written statement from the Construction
Management, consultants and party-appointed that the installation
phase has been completed in accordance with existing requirements.
7) These installation stages shall be determined later based on the
details of time schedule submitted by the contractor.
8) Within each of the testing and "trial run" of this installation system
must also
be attended by the Construction Management, consultants, experts
and representatives of the assign or, as well as other parties concerned.

For this purpose a certificate shall be given stating the test results by
the party authorized to give the same.
o. Field Cleanup
1) Field that is used every day after work shall be cleaned by
Contractor. Contractor should contact the other parties to coordinate
the cleaning field
2) Immediately after the contract is completed, the Contractor shall
remove all remaining materials except the work and equipment that
are still needed for maintenance.
p. Operating Instructions
1)At the time of the handover for the first time the Contractor shall submit
drawings, data equipment operating instructions and methods
of maintenance of the machines installed under this Contract
in the Indonesian language.
2)These data must be submitted to the Owner of 3 (three) sets and the
Consultant 1 (one) set.
3)At the time of the first handover the following must be submitted :
Instruction Manual, Instalation Manual, Maintenance Guide,
Operating Instructions, Trouble Shooting Instruction and original
brochures.
4)Contractor shall provide 2 (two) sets of operating instructions and

maintenance to the Owner, and should be placed in a glass, framed
and stuck on the wall in the main engine room or other place designated
by the Construction Management.
5)Contractor should provide education about the operation and maintenance

practices to technical officers who are appointed by the
Owner / Construction Management at no charge until they
capable of carrying their duties.
6)Contractor must provide a written warranty on major appliances to the
employer.

q. Data on Spare Parts
Contractors must ensure by a Letter of Guarantee of spare parts that are

easily available on the equipment that may likely experience failure or
damage in a short
4. SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS OF WATER SUPPLY, SEWAGE

AND WASTE WATER WORKS
a. Regulations / Requirements
Code of practice and other guidance relating to development regulations
which are in force in the Republic of Indonesia. During the execution of this
Contract to rigorously be adhered to. In general the following rules are
related to the article as follows:
1)Regulation of the State Water Company, regarding the installation of the

water.
2)Plumbing Indonesia Regulation Guidelines issued by the Directorate of

Sanitation Engineering Directorate of Cipta Karya, Department of
Public Works.
3)General inspection for the inspection of construction materials NI-3 (PUBB)

1956 NI-3 1963. PUBB 1969.
4)Indonesia Concrete Regulations regarding employment of daily, weekly,

monthly, contract workers deemed to have understood and are
aware of the content and intent of the regulations and conditions
mentioned above.
5)Design and Maintenance of Plumbing Systems 2000 (SNI).

6) SNI
5. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF MAIN EQUIPMENT

a. Clean Water Works
1) Top Reservoir
Capacity : In accordance with the design drawings
2) Pump Distribution / Booster Pump

- Booster Pump should be capable of supplying water to the user's needs
every variation of the flow rate at any time automatically.
- Each booster pump should have at least 2 pumps, while the flow rate of
each pump in the booster pump assembly shall be based on the
standard of booster pump factory
- Each booster pump, includes the following equipment:

a.Centrifugal pump complete with motor
b.Inlet and outlet valves, Pressure Tank pre-charge type membrans
c.Check valve against water hammer
d.Inlet strainers, Power and control panel
e.Flexible Conections, Base frame made of Cast Iron / Steel
f.Pressure Switch, Pressure Gauge
3) Booster Pump for Clean Water

ITEM TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Pump Type Booster Pump, Parallel Alternative, Packaged

Capacity : As per picture planner
Pump Head : As per picture planner
Pump rotation : As per picture planner
Pump power : As per picture planner
Electrical Characteristics : 3 ph, 220/380 V, 50 Hz
Number : In accordance with design drawings
Location : In the pump room

4) Pump settings In Pressure Control System

- The firs Pump Start, if the water pressure on the network users
drops to a threshold L on the pressure switch (PS1).
- The second Pump starts, when the water pressure on the
network users
drops to a threshold L on the pressure switch (PS2) and so on.
- The first Pump and the second Pump etc. Stop, if the water
pressure on
the network users rises to the threshold H in PS1, PS2 and so on.
- Pump at the On position suddenly biased Off, if the water level
in the tank was down to the limit LL and will return to normal when
the water level rose up to the limit L.
5) Pump Settings In the Flow Monitor Control:

- The first Pump starts if the water pressure on the network users
drops to a threshold L on the pressure switch (PS1).
- The second Pump Starts and the second Pump Stops, when
the rate of flow on the network users rises to the threshold flow H1
on the monitor.
- The first Pump Stops, when the rate of water flow on the
network is down to a threshold H1 on the monitor flow and
water pressure rises to the threshold of H on PS1.
- All pumps that are ON can with a sudden become OFF and the
alarm is ON, when the water level in the tank drops to a
threshold hidap LL until water is replenished again reaching the
threshold L.
6. MATERIAL
1) Soil waste rain water and ventilation piping systems

- Above ground UPVC pipes class 10 kg/cm2 and fittings to BS 4514
with solvent cement joint
- Underground UPVC pipes class 10 kg/cm2 and fittings to BS 4514
with solvent cement joint

- Underground UPVC pipes class 10 kg/cm2 vent pipe and fittings to
BS 4514 with solvent cement joint
2) Domestic water services

- Galvanized iron pipes conforming to Bs 1387 medium grade and
malleable iron fitting to BS 143 and BS 1256.
3) Notes on pipe work

- All fittings including purpose made fitting for pipe work shall conform
to relevant BS specification.
a. Sump Pit
ITEM TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Pump Type Submersible

Capacity : As per picture planner
Pump Head : As per picture planner
Pump rotation : As per picture planner
Pump power : As per picture planner
Electrical Characteristics : 3 ph, 220/380 V, 50 Hz
Number : In accordance with design drawings
Location : outside building (underground)
b. Waste Water Works

1). Waste Water Piping
Segregation between waste water piping from the closets and urinals
with waste water from the lavatory and floor drain must be made. The
collection will use horizontal branch pipes on every floor PVC pipes
will be used which is then forwarded to the vertical main pipe in the
shaft. Drainage of waste water from the closet and urinals shall be
distributed to upright pipes the upright pipes of waste water and
disposal waste in the shaft and then channeled into sum pit (Sewage
Tank).
2) Ventilation Piping
For ventilation pipe is fitted together with the wall 1 1 / 4 "for each of the
fixtures in need. Then forwarded by the main ventilation pipe which are
on the shafts in which final release on the roof floor is equipped with a
vent-cup.
3) Manhole
- Manhole consists of frame and lid made of cast iron and covered
with
bitumen paint.
- Frame and the lid take the form of a trap, so that once filled
with the
gease will be formed odors retainers.
- The diameter of the hole to pass the minimum of 500 mm, while
for the
passing of equipment shall be in accordance with the number
of equipment.
- The finishing of the surface of the manhole shall be adjusted
to the
designation of the location.
4) Sewage Tank
- If specified in the planning drawings, a sewage tank shall be
made as described here.
- Sewage tank shall be made of a reinforced fibre panel,
watertight bodies while the lid should be air-tighted.
- Each section should be able to be pumped, then the bed of the
Sewage Tank should be slanted 1: 10 in the direction of the pump,
while all the end angles should be made 135 degrees.
- Sewage tank should be completed with :
a.Sewage pipe sleeve for entry and exit .
b.Sleeve for vent pipe, Sleeve for cables
c.Level switch for a flood alarm, Level switch for pump
control
d.Manhole for the pump to go through (for maintenance
purposes)
5) Sump Pumps
- Every sump pump shall be installed a minimum of two Sump
pumps.
- Type of pumps shall be submersible centrifugal pumps complete
with :
a. Cast iron casing, cast iron vortex impeller type
with a Knife
b. Stainless steel shaft, Mechanical seal
c. Heavy duty bearing grease lubricate
d. Stainlees steelcasing guide rail support
e. Quick discharge coupling
- Specification of the motor is as follows:
a. squirrel cage induction type, a class E Winding
insulation
b. W ater tight, Vertically mounted
- Pump motor control system
a. Start and Stop is set automatically by the level switch which
is under the sewage tank.
7) Pressure Reducing Valve Assembly

Must consist of equipment that follows the provisions below : Valve fitting,
Strainers, reducer and column control valve, Maximum pressure
reducing ratio of 10: 1, Body and case of cast-iron, Disc and
diagrams of Synthetic Rubber, end connection of flange.
The pressure side of the entrance and exit as required must conform to
those contained in drawings. Must be equipped with equipment for By-
pass.
8) Auxiliary Equipment Pump (Accessories)

a. If not stipulated otherwise, the use of piping accessories
should use: * Dia. 15 to 50 mm screw-type.

* Dia. 65 and older type of flange

* Standard / class: ANSI / 150 PS
b. Gate Valve
* The size of him. 15 to 50 mm
* Valve body, steam disc material bronze, female thread.
* The size of him. 65 and older
Non Rising Stem, cast iron body, Henged end
c. Check Valve
* Valve body, bronze disc material steam, female thread.
* The size of him. 65 and older
* Cast iron body, flanged end, cast steel disc.
d. Strainer
* Valve body, bronze disc material steam, female thread, type Y The
size of him. 65 and older
Cast iron body, stainless steel screen, flanged end, the Y type.
e. Flexible Connection
* The size of him. 50 s / d 200 mm
* Synthetic rubber flanged end material
f. Pressure Gauge
* Dial type 4 "
Pressure Range 0 to 10 kg/cm2
g. Valve floater
Bronze body, plastic ball, male thread
h. W ater Level Control 3 electrode
i. Foot Valve Bronze body
9) Roof Drain

a. Roof drain used herein shall be made of cast iron with the
construction of water proof
b. Area through which water from a roof drain cover is 2 (two) times
the size of the pipe discharge
c. Roof drain shall consist of 3 parts:

• Bitumen coated cast iron body with flange of water proof
• Bitumen coated dome cover type
7. INSTALATION OF PIPE WORK
a. All pipe work shall be free from burrs, rust and shall be thought cleaned
before erection. open ends during the progress of work shall be blanked
—off with purpose made metal or plastic caps and the use of wooden
plugs is occur after the various systems have been put into operation
owing to noncompliance with this requirement the contractor shall rectify
the matter at no extra cost to the contract.
b. Pipes shall be installed with correct falls for venting and draining and
attention shall be paid to neatness of installation Pipe. group of pipes
shall be accurately spaced and changed direction together end shall be
struck from a common radius point.
c. The contractor shall note the restricted space available in certain
service ducts and the absolute necessity to ensure that all pipe work is
installed in the correct sequence, manner and position to ensure that
operation of all valves and maintenance possible.
d. All reduction pipes sizes shall be made using approved standard
reducing fittings. Reducing bushed shall not be used without approval.
Connections between lengths of pipes shall be made using standard
fittings.
e. Vent pipes shall be contracted in such a way that no water trap will be
formed in the entire pipe run.
f. All galvanized iron pipes and fittings where buried in walls columns or
slabs, or installed with flanges or in direct contact with concrete, the
pipe work shall be coated with an approved protective tape before
installation.
g. All pipe work in the pump room , plant rooms and on roof level shall be
installed with flanges or unions at intervals not exceeding 6 m for easy

dismantling.
h. Change in direction of pipes shall be made with long radius bent without
the use of fittings.
i. All pipe runs when not installed underground or in duct shall be
concealed as far as possible by careful positioning or shall be chased
into walls , laid in screeds etc or as directed by the engineer.
j. All pipes passing through wall tiling and exposed to sight shall be
provided with wall flanges plugged and screwed to wall.
k. The contractor shall pay particular attention to the installation of
rainwater pipes/waste witch will be cast inside structural members to
ensure that the concealed pipes will not be damaged when pouring
concrete.
8. PIPE SUPPORTS
a. All pipes work fittings, valves , connecting, shall be efficiently supported

and bracketed . all pipe work shall be supported at intervals not greater
than the following list on straight runs, and additional supports shall be
provided at bends, valves, where necessary
type of size of interval (m)
piping pipe (mm) Horizontal vertical
-UPVC tube 15 - 25 1,1 2,1

32 - 40 1,2 2,4
50 1,35 2,7
80 1,65 3,3
100 1,8 3,6
- G l pipes 25 2,4 3.0
32 2,7 3.0
b. The support for underground site drainage piping shall be of concrete

block.
c. All pipes supports shall be of such design and type to allow for the
removal of any pipe section without the necessity of disconnecting other
adjustment pipes.
d. In all plant (pump) rooms pipe work from pumps, and all pipe work
where vibration could be transmitted to the building structure, shall be
supported with brackets between the bracket and the pipe shall have

specially designed anti vibration hanger / supports.
9. PIPE SLEEVES
a. Where pipes pass outside walls (Outbow), walls , floors, etc the
contractor shall provide pipe sleeves, sleeves for ductile iron, cast
iron ,galvanized iron and copper pipes shall be steel Where sleeves are
fitted through floors, they shall extend to at least 20 mm clear above the
level of the finished floor.
b. Sleeves shall be of sufficient size to allow free movement of pipes and
furthermore where pipes are insulated the sleeves shall be oversized to
allow the insulation to be carried through the sleeves. The contractor,
attention is drawn to the vertical pipe duct at floor levels, where pipes
pass through floors, sleeves shall be provided.
c. Detail of pipes through walls and floors and floors shall be submitted to
the engineer for approval before commencement of the installation.
d. The contractor shall supply sleeves for setting in the walls, floors, etc
and in the shuttering before concrete is poured.
e. Hole which are to be formed in beams shall be provided by the
contractor sufficiently early to meet the programmer of work.
10. UNION, FITTINGS AND FLANGEDS
a. General
- All fittings shall be suitable for the required working pressure and
tested as specified elsewhere in this specification.
- Reduction in bore of pipe shall be generally made eccentric for
horizontal pipes (to prevent air locking ) and concentric taper fittings
shall be fitted for vertical pipes unless specifically required to achieve
the required space and invert levels.
b. Galvanized Steel pipes
Drainage
- Screw joint shall be used throughout, with beaded fitting for
connecting to cast iron sockets with molten lead joints.

- No yarn shall be permitted in any joint, PTFE plumber’s tape shall be

used throughout the installation.
Domestic water
- Pipes and fittings shall be screw jointed with unions for diameters 50
mm to below and flanged for diameters 65 and lager size.
For screwed joint, pipe lengths shall be cut with standard jig fitted pipe
cutters, threads cut with clean, shaped standard thread dies and ends
reamed. Pipe treads shall be cut to BS 21-” pipe thread for tubes and
fittings where pressure tight joints are made on thread” Plumbing’s rope
or paint shall not be used to fill improperly cut thread. Litharge and
glycerin or flax and jointing compound used for joint sealing be
thoroughly cleaned prior to application of the joint sealant.
Flanged joints shall be used on pipe work to enable easy in removal

equipment or valves for inspection of repair. Flanges shall be of forged
steel flat faced slip on type in for pipes, valves and fittings” with
pressure class suitable for the working pressure jointing face of the
flanges shall be truly parallel to each other and in alignment. A suitable
approved gasket of at least 1,5 mm trick shall be used between each
jointing flange. Bolts shall be of hexagon head and shalt be of adequate
length such that at least three complete threads thread protrude the
hexagonal nut when the flanged joint is fully tightened.
c. UPVC
- All UPVC pipes shall be jointed with sockets and fittings and
recommended by the PVC manufacturer.
- Solvent cement shall be used for all pipe work , particular attention
must be paid
11. VALVES
a. General
The contractor supply and install all isolating valves and as required for
the proper and efficient operation and maintenance of the entire system
and as may be required by local authority.
b. Valve shall be provided as described in the respective sections.
c. All valves shall be full line size.

d. each valves shall have a purpose made reference number plate or label
engraved or stamped indicating the manufacturers catalogue number,
pressure and temperature ratings, valves shall be arranged so that
clockwise rotation of the spindle will close the valve, Demo labels are
not acceptable.
e. All valves shall be packed with an approved packing and threads shall
be coated with oil and graphite in particular packing shall be asbestos
free. Packing should be replaced when found deteriorated on site.
f. Where possible locate all valves at convenient positions of operation
from the floor with valve stems upright.
g. Valves that are flanged shall have the specified table for the pipe work.
h. Plastic or metal plates shall be provide to indicate the open I close
status as well as the use of each valve in the pump.
12. GATE VALVES
a. Gate valves in nominal size up to and including 50 mm shall be:

- to B.S 5154
- Of heavy pattern rising stem type with cast iron steel head
- In Bronze with screwed joints or compression joints appropnate to the
duty required
b. Gate valves in minimal sizes from 65 mm and upward shall be:

- to B.S 5163
- of heavy pattern rising stem type with cast iron wheel head.
- In cast iron with bronze trim
- Flanged ends, flanges to B.S 4504; part 1 ,rated at required working
pressure.
13. GLOBE VALVES
Globe valves shall be

a. Conformed to B.S 5152
b. Heavy pattern outside screw rising stem type with cast iron hand
Wheel.
c. In cast iron with bronze trim
d. Screwed joint or compression joint for sizes up to 50 mm appropriate to

the duty required.

e. Flanged joint for sizes from 65 mm and upwards.
f. Flanged joint for use in pump discharge pipe.
g. Flanges to B.S. 4504; part I rated at required working pressure.
14. CHECK VALVE
a. Check valve in nominal sizes up to and including 65 mm shall be

- To. 5154
- Of swing type with square nut head
- In bronze
b. check valves nominal sizes form 80 mm upwards shall be:

- of double guided disc sliding type
- constructed cast iron body bronze disc and seat stainless steel spring
with Vito or P,T.F,E sealing material for use in portable water supply
system and rain water disposal sump and pump system only.
c. For all check valves on the discharge side of pump , silent check valves
full open type shall be used ( non water hammer type).
15. BALL FLOAT VALVES
a. Ball float valves in nominal size up to and including 50 mm shall be:

- To.B.S. 1212 part I
- In brass with copper float to B.S.1968
b. Ball float valves in nominal sizes from 65 mm and up ward shall be:
- To. B.S. 1212 : part I
- In cast iron with bronze trim and copper ball float to B.S. 1968
- Flanged ends, flanges to B.S. 4504 part I rated at required working
pressure involved.
16. DRAIN VALVES AND TESTING VALVES
a. Drain valves shall be provided at law point of all water risers and mains
to ensure that all sections of pipe work and plant can be drained. Drain

valves shall be gunmetal size to be as follows

Concealed piping and exposed 15 mm hose union bulb piping in
finished spaces:
Bib cock
Piping 50 mm smaller: 15 mm globe
Piping 65 mm : 50 mm globe
Vent valves : 7 mm globe
b. all valves shall be gland pattern valves of 15 mm of size and over shall
have hose union, other valves shall have ribbed outlet for hose
connection.
c. 15 mm test valves shall be provided on the dead side of non-return
valves and isolating valves on the mains.
17. FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
a. Flexible connectors shall be of stainless steel details shall be submitted

to the engineer prior to ordering.
b. Pressure rating of the flexible connectors shall be the same as the
system pipe work unless otherwise noted on drawings.
c. Flexible connectors shall be installed at where shown on drawing and at
all pump suction and discharges.
d. All Connectors shall have flanged connection to BS 4505 and suitable
for connecting to the appropriate pipe work and equipment.
18. STRAINERS
a. Strainers shall be installed in all pump suction the strainer shall be of

pipe tine “Y” type or bucket type and suitable for use in the appropriate
system.
b. The strainers mesh shall be stainless steel with total available filtering
area of at least three times the sectional area of the pipe inlet to the
strainers.
c. Strainer in nominal sizes of 50 mm die and above shall be of” Y type.
gunmetal or bronze body.
d. Strainer in nominal sizes of 65 mm die and above shall be of vertical
( bucket ) type cast iron body flanged to B.S 4504 of pressure class
suitable for the working pressure.

19. SANITARY FITTINGS
a. All sanitary fittings and accessories will be installed by the contractor.

b. The Contractor shall handle fittings in and out of store to job site and
they shall be well protected from damage of any kind. After installation
fixture shall be well protected from damage and spoilage by effects of
weather and subsequent contraction and the finishing activities of other
trades.
c. All damaged fixtures or fittings due to improper installation, storage or
handling after handover of the fixtures and fittings by other contractor
shall be rejected by the engineer and shall be replaced with new,
undamaged items as specified. Any cost shall be borne by the
contractor.
d. The drawings only indicate the approximate position of sanitary fixtures,
exact positions will be approved by the engineer before the fixtures are
finally set in position.
e. The contractor shall fix in position of sanitary fixtures and accessories
as indicated on the drawings.
f. The contractor shall supply all jointing and fixing materials and seal to
structure with polysuiphide sealant and other accessory materials, make
all connections to water supply service, overflows and wastes.
g. Connection of fixtures outlets to cast iron pipes shall be as specified in
the pipe work section of this specification.
h. Waste outlets to lavatory basins, urinal bowls and sinks shall be made
by using proper jointing medium of the approved type the engineer.
i. The fixing method of all sanitary fittings shall be submitted for approval
the contractor shall ensure that installation of fixture and fittings shall be
in strict accordance with the manufacturers recommendation.
20. TRAPS FOR FLOOR DRAINS
a. The contractor shall provide and fix 50 mm die Traps for floor drain
inside toilets which shall be cast iron traps with 75 mm deep seal.
b. The contractor shall provide and fix 50 mm die cast iron traps for floor
drain in mechanical room as indicated on the drawings.

21. RAINWATER OUTLETS
a. All rainwater outlets as shown on the drawings shall be supplied and

installed by the contractor.
b. Rainwater outlet on roofs shall be domed type with removable grating.
Details shall be submitted by the contractor prior to ordering.
c Cast iron component t shall be coated as specified for cast iron pipe
work.
d. Rainwater outlets shall be set in position in perfectly manner by others.
The contractor shall provide the necessary detailed drawings and check
that the locations are correct. The contractor must ensure that the works
are coordinated.
22. FLOOR DRAINS.
a. All floor drains inside toilets shall have chromium plate brass grating to
match the floor finishes. Fixing screws shall be chromium plated brass
flat head counter sunk screw.
b. Floor drains for mechanical rooms shall have cast iron prating fitted with
brass flat head counter sunk screw.
c. Floor drains shall be set in position by the contractor. The contractor
shall seal the clearance between the floor drains and the floor slabs
after installation.
23. TERMINATION OF SOIL/ WASTE VENTS
All soul waste vent pipes shall be terminated above roof level as shown on
the drawings. A copper wire ( Plastic coated ) vent balloon shall securely
fixed to the open ends of all vent pipes. An approved weathering slate /
apron shall be fitted with up stand of 150 mm mm.
24. CLEAN OUT

a. The contractor shall provide where shown and required, floor and wall
clean outs with cover plates in finished areas.
b. All clean outs shall be easily accessible and shall be leak proof.
C. PUMPS AND TANK LEVEL CONTROLS
1. GENERAL
The pump heads in the schedule drawing are given for tendering guidance
only and the Contractor shall be responsible for checking the total final
resistance of each system, based on the actual pipe runs and equipment
offered, prior to ordering. Any modifications to the system or any of this
component, i.e. pumps, pipe work, motors etc. Which may be required to
meet the scheduled deities and space limitations shall be carried out at the
Contractor’s expenses.
All pumps shall be constructed to meet the required working conditions and
test pressure of the system concerned.
2. PUMP ARRANGEMENT
Pump for plumbing services in centrifugal end suction type as shown in

Equipment schedule/Drawing.
Each pump shall be directly complied with the electric motor and aligned in
the manufacturer’s factory.
3. PUMP SPEED AND NOISE
Pump shall be selected for an impeller speed as indicated in the Equipment

schedule/drawing. All pumps shall be commercially silent in operation.
4. PUMP CHARACTERISTIC CURVES
The characteristic curves of the pumps offered by the contractor shall be

submitted to the Engineer for approval.

5. PUMP FITTINGS
a. All pumps shall be fitted with an air-cock and drain plug. Each pump
discharge and suction line shall have a pressure gauge with a dial
diameter of 150mm completed with copper/brass siphon loop tube and
pet cock. Drains shall be piped to floor drain or channel.
b. The contractor shall supply and install flexible pipe connectors at the
pump suction and discharge for each as in the” pipe work” section as
detailed.
c. All flexible connectors shall have flanged joints for the connecting pipe
work and must be suitable for the working conditions and test pressure
of the working conditions and test pressure system concerned.
d. Automatic air release valve shall be fitted in the pump to purge any air
likely to be trapped inside the pump casing. Suitable fittings shall be
used for such connection and the A.A.V. shall not discharge at a
location directly over or not near to the pump motor or any other
electrical equipment.
6. PUMP VALVES
Each pump shall be fitted with valves to enable to be isolated, and in

addition, where shown on the drawings, a check/non-return valve shall be
fitted in each pump discharge.
7. PUMP BASES
a. Each pump set shall be mounted on an anti-vibration pump base.

Details shall be submitted by the Contractor well before the
manufacturer of the structural base. All holding down bolts shall be
provided by this Contractors.
b. The structural base shall be formed by others.
8. SAFETY GUARDS

All exposed shafts, couplings and moving parts of pumps shall be provided
with suitable galvanized angle iron wire mesh guards which shall be Stoutly
constructed and easily removable; and shall be provided with living handles.
Care shall be taken that these guards do not cause “Ringing” sound and/or
vibrate which will create.
9. INDENTIFICATION
a. An identification plate of metal shall be fixed to each pump unit. This

plate shall include full detailed diameter of the impeller installed, pump
size, model and serial number, rpm, etc head and delivery for the duty
specified, and lubricant required.
b. All pumps shall be the manufacturer’s designation plate which shall
indicate the type of services and serial number of the unit.
10. ELECTRICAL WORK PUMPS
All electrical works associated with the pumps shall comply with the lEE
regulations (latest edition) code of practice, supply rules and regulations and
described in the relevant sections of this specifications.
11. DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
a. The pumps shall be with flanged suction and delivery connections.

b. Matenals shall be as follows:
Casing - Grey cast iron to B.S. 1453 grade 220 or better

Impeller - Leaded bronze to B.S.1400:1973 LG2, key to shaft.
Shaft - Stainless steel to B.S. 970:1970
minimum 13% CR. with content:
Seal - Mechanical seal.
Couplings - Flexible type, completed with coupling guards.
Guide rings - Phosphor bronze
Bearings - Ball thrust type, grease lubricated.

12. LEVEL PROBES IN TANKS
a. The Contractor shall supply and install level probes in water tanks as
indicated below and shown in the drawings.
b. Each probe shall be of the correct length for its particular application
and tank location. Electrodes shall be of polished stainless steel 20mm
O.D. electrode holders shall be weather proof in all respect.
c. The earthling probes shall be connected and wired to the building earth
systems of the building.
d. Each set of electrodes shall be installed inside a 250mm diameter PVC
pipe acting as a wave barrier.
e. The level switch set shall operate with a stepped down voltage at 24 V
maximum. Stepped down transformers shall be provided for each set of
control probes and shall be installed inside control cubicles.
13. ANTI VIBRATION MOUNTING.
Anti vibration mounting shall be

a. Springs, neoprene pads or rubber in shear isolators as specified in
schedule equipment/drawing.
b. Of specified static deflection and selected to provide isolating efficiency
of not less than 95%.
14. PLUGS
Plugs for fixing to hard materials to be proprietary plugs or plastic, soft

metal, fiber or similar.
Fixing to variable materials, plaster board and the like are to be proprietary
fixings specially designed for that situation, The use of wood plugs shall not
be permitted.
D. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATION
1. GENERAL

This section covers the general requirements for electrical work to be

installed under this specification.
The contractor shall supply and install all electric wiring electrical and
control panel and level control etc. for the complete, safe and satisfactory
operation of the plant covered by the specification.
The entire electrical installation shall be in accordance with the regulation

and requirement of all relevant authorities having jurisdiction over the
installation.
The electricity supply will be 220 V/phase/50 Hz and 380 V/3 phase/5OHz,
4 wire. All equipment shall be designed to operate with ± 10% voltage
The power supply to the systems shall be provide by the Electrical

Contractor up to electrical power panel in pumps room, and where else
required.
The Contractor shall be responsible for extending the supply from the above
including control panels, starter, conduits and wirings etc. Necessary
operation of their equipment offered.
4. PUMP CONTROL PANEL
Before commencing any work whatsoever on the pump control cubicle, the
contractor shall submit drawings of the proposed layout showing all
dimensions, the total weight, fixing details, cable sizes and cable termination
details of both incoming and outgoing cable to the Engineer for approval.
Approval of drawings will be given I principle only, without abrogation of the
Contractor’s responsibilities in respect of associated details.

Cubicle shall be constructed by heavy gauge sheet steel of thickness not

less than 2 mm, finished in enamel of a color which will decided by the
Engineer and Architect.
Cubicle shall be wall mounted and provided with hinged lockable access
doors with mechanically retained gaskets and hinged top panels containing
control switches, supervisory instruments and pilot light. All exterior door
fitting shall be chrome plated.
Pump control cubicle shall contain a main fused switch, bus work, Brach
switch, bus work, branch switch fuses or molded case circuit breakers,
motor starters, auxiliary relays, control fuses, on/off push buttons,
manual/auto power eon’ lights, pump running and overload lights,
ammeters, terminal blocks, wiring and accessories for the full operation and
control of the associated pumps. All electrical equipment shall comply with
the relevant section of this specifications.
The Plumbing and drainage Contractor shall provide voltage free dry
contacts in from of terminal block inside the pump indication panel for each
respective alarm of the pumps and water tank status. The following points
for each pump water tank/sump pit are required to be monitored:
- Pump Running
- Pump Trip
- Water tank low level
- Water tank high level
The Electrical Contractor responsible the work will obtain the respective
signals from those indication panels only.
5. CABLES
All wiring shall be carried out using PVC insulated stranded single core
copper conductor cable to B.S. 6004,6231,5345 or 6500 as appropriate.
The Contractor shall confirm loads and sizes of cable prior to placing orders.
All main conductors (including neutral) shall be colored in accordance to

PUlL for their entire length, and the phase to which they are connected. All
control wiring shall be colored coded using spiral stripe tracer on base color.
approved trucking. To Eliminate the possibility of damage to cable due to
thermal expansion, allowance for movement shall be made by the
introduction of bend or set in each cable/core adjacent to the terminal.
Cables shall, at all times, be handled with care and every effort made to
shall be exercised when breaking the rotation of the drums and under no
circumstances shall babble be dragged over loose earth of concrete.
Approved type of cable rollers shall be used.
resistance and records of test submitted to the Engineer for approval. Single
core cable shall be pulled into conduit only after the whole network, or a
complete section of conduit has been installed, tested for continuity and
swabbed through.
The Contractor will be deemed to have allowed in his tender sum for
applying sufficient lengths of cables of each type and size to complete the
installation, including the due allowances for additional lengths for cuthng
and waste.
Unless specifically instructed by the Engineer to the contrary, the sizes of

cable employed for various type of wiring, shall not less than the following
list :
• Power Circuits 2.5 mm2

• Earth Circuits 2.5 mm2
• Control Circuits 1.5 mm2
6. ELECTRIC MOTORS
Motors shall be manufactured in accordance with B.S. 4999 and 5000.

Motor of water pumps for plumbing uses shall be of drip proof squirrel cage
type, equipped with ant condensation heater and the heater is off when the
starter is on & vice versa. Heaters shall be wired from the motor control
cubicle, Totally enclosed fan cooled motors are also acceptable.

Motors shall be selected to be capable of running without overload at 20%
in excess of the horse power absorbed under normal pump duty conditions.
Motors shall generally be three phase, however, small motors of I KW or
Les may be single phase.
Ratings shall be based on continuous duty in the prescribed environment or
an ambient temperature of 40 c whichever is the more demanding, with an
efficiency under load of not less than 0.85.
Winding insulation shall be to class B in accordance to B.S.2757, allowing
on 90°c temperature rise above ambient, unless otherwise specified.
The power factor of all motors shalt not be less than 0.85 lagging under all
conditIons.
Motors up to including 3.7 Kw shall be fitted ball bearings at both ends.
Larger motors shall be fitted with roller or deep grove ball bearings. Motors
operating with vertical shafts shall be equipped with bearings designed to
counter unbalanced end thrust. Motors shall have a synchronous speed as
shown in Equipment Schedule.
All motors rated at 20 Kw or more shall be fitted with thermistors or other
sealed, temperature sensitive devices embedded in the windings and
suitable for connection to motor protection control circuits.
Motors shall be mounted on a common bed plate with the driven machine
wherever possible.
Terminal boxes shall be provided for all motors and shall be of such
dimensions that will ensure easy access to the terminals and allow rooms
for the supply leads. A length of flexible conduit shall be used for connection
to motor terminal boxes.
Full catalogue details describing the manufacturer and model of motors
selected shall be submitted with the tender documents. As far as
practicable, motors shall be produced by one manufacturer.
On all motors over 25 kg in weight, Lifting eyes or lugs shall be supplied.
The precise method of canying out the following test shall be agreed with

the Engineer prior to Commencement.

The following items shall be tested in the sequence indicated and a
completed report shall be prepared by the contractor and submitted to the
Engineer for approval.
E. PAINTING LABELLING AND FINISHING
1, MATERIALS
All parts of the work installed under this specification shall be painted with
approved first quality enamel paints, except those items specified as being
painted by others or otherwise exempted from painting in this section of the
specification.
Paint shall be selected to withstand the temperature on the surface which it

is applied, and shall be suitable in all respects for the environmental
conditions in which it shall be located.
All paints used shall be of one approved manufacturer, and finishes shall e
full gloss unless otherwise specified.
Before ordering any primer, undercoat and finishing paint, the Contractor
shall submit the color scheme to the engineer for approval.
The sub-contractor shall select all finishing and painting materials from type
suitable for the surfaces to which they are applied and for the environmental
conditions in each area.
2. PLANT, MACHINERY & EQUIPMENT
All items of paint, machinery and equipment supplied painted ex factory

shall be given one finishing coat of full gloss enamel. Except where the
manufacturer’s standard finish is approved.
3. EXPOSED METALWORK

All exposed metalwork shall be wire-brushed and iron cleaned from rust,
scale, dirt and grease, and shall then be given one priming coat, one
undercoat and one approved color finishing coat of full gloss enamel.
The priming coat for exposed galvanized iron shall be an approved

galvanized iron primer.
The priming coat for exposed non-ferrous metalwork shall be approved as

suitable for the metal to switch it will be applied.
4. CONCEALED METALWORK
All galvanized iron surface concealed in roof spaces, false ceilings, building
ducts etc. shall not be painted.
5. PIPEWORK & METAL SHEATING
Pipe work and metal sheeting shall be painted as for exposed or metalwork
as applicable.
Turned parts of valves, controls etc. shall be cleaned and polished to

approval.
6. PIPEWORK IDENTIFICATION
All pipe etc. shall be identified in accordance with British Standards

17101984.
Circumferential bands of standard ground colors shall be not les than
100mm wide on pipes up to 50mm nominal diameter, and not less than
150mm wide on pipes greater than 50mm nominal diameter.
Supplementary colors shall be displayed as bands not less than 25mm wide
in the centre of the ground color bands.
Where lettering is required it shall be painted in contrasting color in

accordance with the standard, in block letters not less than 15mm high for
pipes up to 50mm nominal diameter, and in block letter not less than 40mm
high for larger pipes.
Direction of flow shall be indicated by an arrow painted on the pipe adjacent

to each color band. Arrows shall be 75mm long on pipes up to 50mm
nominal diameters, and 150mm long larger pipes.
7. LABELLING
All plant and equipment provided under this specification is to be labeled in

both English and Indonesian as to duty or services, all such labeling to
correspond to schedules, diagrams, etc. To be provided as part of the
Record Drawings. Labels are white trifoliate with black engraved lettering
not less than 20mm high or as otherwise required and approved.
Manufacturer’s nameplate shall generally be provided for all plant and

equipment and shall show serial and model numbers date of manufacture.
The following refers to specific items (but not by way of limitation) requiring
labeling
a. All valves, motor starters, fans, distribution boards, gauge, contractors,

cable terminals in switchboards, circuit breakers.
b. Labels to be attached to valves (or pipe adjacent thereto) with a light

gauge metal band or alternatively to be screwed to the insulated valve
box where provided. These labels shall state the valve number.
c. Distribution boards, starters etc. Are to be labeled to indicated the circuit

number, phase and item controlled.
Label shall be screwed or riveted to sheet metal. Adhesive fixing is not

acceptable.
Details of exact lettering shall be agreed with the engineer prior to

manufacture.
A Complete valve schedule shall be incorporated in the as-built drawings

and this schedule shall clearly indicate the valve numbers, duty, function,
size, flow rate and any other relevant information necessary to allow the

Employers plant operators to safety operate each valve and to subsequently

maintain of replace the valve as required.
The valve schedule shall clearly relate to the various system schematics to
enable the entire operating sequence and circuitry to be followed.
8. APPLICATION OF PAINTING
All parties shall be prepared and applied in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendations.
All galvanized metal surfaces shall be properly etch primed to ensure

correct adhesion of the paint to the surface. Materials etch-priming shall be
as recommended by the paint manufacturer’s. Subsequent painting of
galvanized surfaces shall comply with this specification.
Prior to painting, all metallic surfaces except galvanized surfaces shall be

thoroughly scraped and wire brushed as necessary to remove scale, rust
and sward. Surfaces shall then be solvent cleaned to remove all oil, grease
and dirt.
When the surfaces to be painted are clean and dry, one coat of an approved
primer shall be evenly applied over the entire area. After surfaces have
been primed, the sub-contractor shall notify the engineers so that an
inspection of the primed surfaces can be made prior to the application of the
undercoat and the finishing coats.
When the priming coat has been approve, one coat of an approved paint flat
undercoat shall be applied. Before applying the finishing coats, the sub-
contractor shall ensure that the under coated surface is rubbed flat and
smooth. Finally, two coast of an approved high gloss finishing paint shall be
when all dust has been removed.
Each successive coating shall be completely dry prior to the application of

the next coat.
The minimum thickness of each layer of paint shall be 50 u.
F. TESTING AND OPERATING OF INSTALLATION

1. GENERAL
The contractor shall ensure to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the
installation complies with all requirements including the following clauses.
2. CLEANING AND FLUSHING
a. The contractor shall the entire installation including all sanitary fitments
and pipe work, etc. After installation and keep them in a new condition.
b. All pipes, etc, shall be flushed through with water, ridded when
necessary to ensure clearance of debris.
c. Cleaning and flushing shall be carried out in sections as the installation

becomes completed.
3, HYDRAULIC TESTING OF PIPEWORK
a. The Contractor shall carry out hydraulic test on the completed fire
fighting systems to show that it is functioning satisfactorily within the
requirements of this specification and local regulations.
b. The Contractor shall provide suitable tests pumps and arrange for a
supply of water required in connection with testing of pipe work, the test
pump shall be fitted with pressure gauges which shall be fitted with
pressure Gauges which shall be of suitable range for the pressure being
applied.
c. Hydraulic tests shall be carried out as the pipe work is installed and
shall be completed before cases in walls. Also tests shall be carried out
prior to false ceilings and other finished are installed.
d. All water services pipe work shall be hydraulically tested for a period of
not less than 24 hours to a pressure of not less than one and half times
the working pressure. The Contractor must record all test figures
together with schedules of pipe lengths and should note that testing

shall be witnessed by the Engineer. No pressure drop shall be allowed

during the tests.
e. Testing apparatus shall be provided by the Contractor.
f. The Contractor must carry out any additional tests if required by the
local authorities, without any additional cost.
g. On completion of the section of drainage pipe work to be tested blank

off all open ends pipes and ensure that all access covers are securely
tightened so that they are airtight.
At the base of each stack, a drain bag drain plug is inserted and small
quantity of water allowed to settle above it so as to form a seal that can
easily be inspected if it leaks.
Blow air through the tube and reconnect at the manometer gauge to
obtain a reading of 38mm w.g. the level should remain for a period of
not less than five minutes without falling and without further air being
following
- That the plant and apparatus is of robust construction and of capacity
for the duty specified.
- That all valves, switches, controls, etc, are properly regulated and
capable of proper operation and in the case of valves that are
capable of tight shut-off.
- That all apparatus is silent.
- That all instruments are correctly calibrated and read accurately.
- That all services are tested in accordance with the details of the
relevant clauses of this specification.
- That the alignments for all pumps are proper.
h. Should the results of these test shown that the pumps, etc or any other
items of equipment fail to perform to the efficiencies or others
performance figures as given in this specification, and as replace the
equipment without additional cost to the contract in order that the
required performance is obtained. Should it be necessary for the
Contractor to attend to item of plant as described he will be responsible
for cast for any damage or deterioration to the building or any other
services consequent on such attendance.

I, The Contractor shall perform all tests and demonstrations as called for
by the local authorities.
j. Testing procedures shall be submitted two months after the approval of

major equipment to the Engineer for approval.
4. SUPPLY OF TESTING EQUIPMENT
a. The Contractor shall provide all tools, pressure pumps, instruments and
recorders required to carry out the tests given in this section.
b. All water and electricity required for testing purpose wUl be supplied by
others.
5. PRETREAMENT
a. Prior to start-up and after satisfactory hydraulic testing, all piping

systems shall be flushed and drained at least once through to rid off
contaminating materials.
b. All strainers shall be inspected and cleaned out or replaced.

- Pre-conditions the metal surface to resist reaction with water or air.
- Established an initial protective film.
- After pretreatment, the system shall be drained and refilled with fresh
water and left until the system is put into operation.
- Details and procedures of the pretreatment shall be submitted to the
Engineer for approval.
G. COMMISSIONING, TESTING, MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE
1. GENERAL
On completion of the work, the contractor shall commission the installation

and put it into operation in accordance with the intent of this specification.
The Contractor shall provided all necessary facilities and instruments to

carry out such test in accordance with local regulations as my be necessary
to satisfy that the installation and put it into operation in accordance with the

intent of this specification.
After handover of the work, the contractor shall carry out regular preventive
maintenance at interval not exceeding three calendar month, or other wise
as directed by the £ngineer and shall provide a fast, efficient and
comprehensive breakdown services as required during the defects liability
period.
All materials supplied and installed by the Contractor shall be new and
such material must be suitable for incorporation in the tropics.
Materials must be of good quality products from the latest production. For
the materials mentioned below are the Owner must guarantee that the
goods are
good and new by producing delivery of mail order dealers / agents / factory.
The Contractor must be willing to replace the material that is not
approved due to deviating from the specifications or other matters, where
such replacement is no extra cost.
2. LIST OF MATERIALS
For all the materials offered the Contractor must complete list of
materials that mention the brand, type, class complete with a brochure /
catalog that are also attached at the time of submitting their tender.
The table of the list of these materials gives priority to the components
in the form of factory-manufactured goods.
3. THE MENTION OF BRANDS / FACTORY PRODUCTS

If in the technical specifications or on the drawing some particular
brand or grade quality (quality preformance) of certain materials or
components are mentioned, especially for materials which in terms of the
level of quality / factory those are mentioned.
If later during the course of the project it happens that the materials listed
on thet tabel of materials cannot be made available by the Contractor
for a strong reason acceptable to Owner, Construction Management, a

replacement of the brand/type may be considered with a certain sanction
to the Contractor.
4. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION MANUAL
The contractor shall within 14 days of reaching practical completion hand-

over to the Engineer four (4) copies of a maintenance Instruction Manual.
Manual should the following:
a. A cover giving
• The same of the development
• The title of the document
• The same and address of the installation contractor.
b. Inside page giving similar information to the cover but including contact
telephone numbers for normal and emergency use.
c. Content page.
d. Description of the installation.
e. Scheduled details of all equipment and plant.
f. Operating instruction including details of any automatic control system.
g. Maintenance and fault finding instructions including composite schedule
of routine maintenance.
h. Tests reports and commission records.
i. Recommended spare parts and lubricants.
j. List of equipment and plant with manufacturer’s name and address and
local agent, if applicable.
k. Manufacturer’s literatures suitable indexed to include shop drawings,
wiring diagrams, performance curves, etc.
I. A complete valve schedule as described in the “painting, labeling and
finishing” section.
m. List of as-installed drawings.
Manual should be produced on A4 size paper, all sections should be

suitable separated and ready identifiable or pages should be numbered
consecutively and pages numbers included in the contents page.
FinaIly. approved manuals should be submitted in loose leaf ring bonders

with hard covers to facilitate storage.
As-installed drawing may be folded and accommodated in the manual if

appropriate.
As-installed drawing should include a diagrammatic layout of the completed

installation with major items of plant suitably referenced to the schedules
(item above)
A set of the as- installed drawings should be provided for each copy of the
O & M manual required to be provided.
In addition one set of copy negatives should be provided.
5. SERVICE
The Contractor shall undertake to provided a comprehensive breakdown

service whereby a qualified electrician or plumber attends to breakdowns as
soon as practicable after a break down is reported and carries out
immediate remedial work.
6. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
The Contractor shall carry out regular inspections periods not exceeding
three calendar month, and shall fully service all plant installed under this
specification for the term of the defects liability period, and shall maintain all
such plant in perfect operation during that period.
At each maintenance visit, the Contractor shall
a. Carry out all lubrication necessary

b. Check and adjust as necessary all drives.
c. Check all bearing for correct operation
d. Check all anti-vibration supports for deterioration
e. Check all connections for tightness
f. Check all sump and drains, and cleans as necessary
g. Prove correct operation of all safety controls
h. Prove operation of all automatic controls, and
i. Check all glands, packing, etc. and adjust or replace as ecessary.

In addition to the monthly maintenance schedule, the Contractor shall at

interval not exceeding six months:
a. Clean and re-grease all bearings as necessary

b. Inspect and clean as necessary all items of plant and equipment.
c. Clean and adjust all switchgear, contactors and starters
7. STATUTORY AUTHORITIES’S TESTS AND INSPECTIONS.
The contractor shall attend all tests and inspections carried out by statutory
authorities, and shall forthwith executive any variation work as a result of his
failure to comply with the statutory requirements.

III. FIRE HYDRANT SYSTEM
A. SCOPE OF WORK
The scope of works for the fire Hydrant System shall include the following :
a) External Pillar Fire Hydrants
b) Standpipe and hose system
c) Automatic fire Alarm System
d) Portable Fire extinguisher
Parts of works becoming the scope of works and the implementations of

works in the site in the Hydrant and Sprinkler work package are:
a. Procurement and installation of Fire Hydrant and Sprinkler main system
that covers pump installation and pump panel along with the pipeline
thereof.
b. Procurement and installation of fire fixtures such as Fire Hydrant Box
(HB), Hydrant Pillar (HP), Seamese Connection (SC) and Sprinkler unit
tools.
c. Conducting the finishing of work room’s ceiling and completed
reinstallation up to completely-finished resulting from the Hydrant.
d. Conducting Testing and Commissioning to the entire Fire Hydrant System
in order to be functioned properly and meet the requirements standards,
the entire work systems installed is able to obtain a proper system in
accordance with the present applicable law and regulation in Indonesia.
And it is not in contradiction with the provision of the Work Safety
Department.
e. Handling the licensing process and other requirement to obtain the
approval from the DPK Institution and Local Authority that the Fire Hydrant
System Creating Standard of Operation and Procedure (SOP) from the
aforesaid Hydrant
1. CODES AND REGULATIONS
The design and installation of the Fire Hydrant System shall comply with the
following codes : -
a) Fire Fighting System
b) Public Work Ministry Regulation No. 02/ KPTS /1985
c) Regulation of DKI Jakarta/ Makasar Government
d) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
- NFPA 10 Portable Fire Extinguisher
- NFPA 14 Installation of standpipe and Hose System
- NFPA 20 Installation of Centrifugal Fire Pumps
The material / equipment and the Fire Fighting system installation and
sub-system that become part of work scope in this chapter, should meet
and in compliance with few references, standard material and works,
including the relevant Regional Regulation but not limited to the matters
specified hereuinder:
- Indonesian National Standard / SNI 03-1745-2000 pertaining to the
Planning Procedures and Installation System of Vertical and Slang
Pipe for the Prevention of Fire Danger In Building Construction.
- Indonesian National Standard / SNI 03-0000-2001 pertaining to
Pump Installation Permanently Installed for the Fire Protection
- Indonesian National Standard / SNI 03-6481-2000 pertaining to
Plumbing System -2000
- Indonesian National Standard / SNI 03-0255-2000 or General
Requirement Electrical Installation (PUIL-2000) specifically for the
electrical works in sub-work plumbing system
- Certain International/other country Standard which are not in
contradictory with the related SNI such as: NFPA, National Plumbing
Codes, etc.
- Indonesian Plumbing Regulation Guidance published by the
Directorate of Sanitation Engineering of Directorate General of
Creative Works of Public Works Department.
- General Examination for building material NI-3 (PUBB) 1956 NI-3
1963. PUBB 1969
- Indonesian Concrete Regulation PBI-NI-2 / 1971
- Indonesian Labor Regulation pertaining to the daily, weekly, monthly
and labor contract usage.
- DKI Regional Regulation-Greater-Jakarta No. 8 Year 2008 pertaining
to the Procedure of Fire Anticipation in the territory of Special
Region of Capital City of Jakarta that can be used in the other
Districts.
- Ministerial Decree of Public Works No. 28 year 2000.

2. GENERAL
The Hydrant system shall be supplied and installed in .accordance with the
drawings, the requirements of the local regulations and NFPA 14 as
appropriate.
3. SYSTEM
The system shall with wet system.
4. HYDRANT PIPE WORK
a The Hydrant pipe material shall be black steel pipe conforming to ASTM
A53 BSP Sch 40.
b Pipe joints shall be as described in the suction on the pipe work.
5. EXTERNAL PILLAR HYDRANT
An exterior system of fire hydrant in a loop piping arrangement shall be

provided around the building. Isolating valves shall be provided in the loop
piping to be able to sectionalize the system in the event on the break.
External pillar Fire hydrants shall be provided along the fire engine access
way. The hydrants shall be spaced not more than 150m.
6. STANDPIPE & HOSE SYSTEM
The building shall be equipped with hose stations containing one 65 mm

and one 40 mm hose valves, a linen hose and nozzle on a rack.
Hose stations shall be distributed in the building such that any portion of the
building is writhing 9.2 meters of a nozzle when attached to a 30 meter
hose.
Hose station shall be properly grouped with each group proceeded with
pressure reducing device to be able to limit flowing pressures at any hose
valve at a maximum of 6.5 bars (100 psi).
Pipe work for the wet riser system shall be galvanized mild steel pipe to BS
1387 :1967 heavy grade (Class C ).
7. SIAMESE CONNECTIONS

Siamese connection shall be installed to allow the fire department to

supplement the water supplies to the combined Hydrant Box, standpipe and
external hydrant system.
They shall be located at the entrance on the Street side of the building and
arranged so that hose lines can be easily attached to the connections by the
fire department.
The water supply system shall consist of two electric fire pumps, each pump
is provided with emergency generator power supply, and a jockey pump.
Jockey pump shall be used to maintain design pressure in the system. It

shall be started automatically trough a pressure switch in the jockey pump
controller once system pressure drops below the recurred pressure. A
further reduction in system pressure after the jockey pump has already
operated will automatically start the main electric fire pump.
8. PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHER
Portable fire extinguisher shall be provided throughout the building. Portable

fire extinguisher shall be selected to match the size and type of fire
expected in the building. The extinguishers shall be readily visible, properly
marked and easily accessible.
9. PIPES & FITTINGS

Black steel pipes as per
ASTM A53, minimum
Wall thickness
Schedule 40
Note : Protective corrosion resistant coatings to pipes, Fittings and hangers

shall be used where corrosive conditions exist or where piping is
exposed to the weather. Underground pipes shall be protected
against corrosion before being buried.
10. FIRE HYDRANT BOX

The said box should be made from steel plat with ± 2mm thickness. Box
Dimension: see the drawing plans. The heights should be ± 20 cm thick

from the floor. The hinge should be located adjusted with the condition so
that it is easily-opened.
• The entire boxes and door should be in red paint Duco ex
Danapaints and engraved with Hydrant writing in white color.
• The length of the fire hose should be not less than 30 m, and easy
to be equipped with hose rack pressure proof and use the coupling
system as the connection. Nozzle variable (set spray) φ 1 ½” and
landing valve φ 2 ½” should be in new condition and fabricated, with
minimum class of 200 psi, bronze material.
11. HYDRANT PILLAR

a. Two-way type, made from steel and strengthened by sufficient
concrete foundation.
b. Pillar is painted with red color using Duco paint ex Danapaints.
c. Fire house is provided completed with its nozzle, coupling is
adjusted with the standard of coupling local DPK, the length of the
house is not less than 30 m with measurement of φ 4” x 2 ½” x 2
½” and equipped with check valve.
12. OUTDOOR HYDRANT BOX
Size : 190x660x200 mm complete with Support.

Material : Mild steel plate 1.5mm thick.
Accessories : 65 mm @ x 30 meter linen hose
65 mm hose valve.
13. INDOOR HYDRANT BOX
Size : 1250x750x180mm complete with support.

Material : Mild steel plate 1.5mm thick.
Accessories : 40 mm Ø x 30 meter linen hose
65 mm Ø and 40mm Ø hose valves
40mm Ø variable jet and spray nozzle Hose rack
14. FIRE DEPARTMENT (SIAMESE) CONNECTION.

a. Seamese connection is using Two-way type Y made from casting

steel.
b. In Seamese connection unit installation should be provided with a
strong foundation as holder.
c. Seamese connection should be in easy condition to see location
and near by the cars traffic so that it is easy to be used whenever
it is required. (See the drawing plan)
Dimensions : 100x65x65mm
Free standing type with chrome
Dimension : 100x65x65mm
Free standing type with Chromium plated finish or Cast iron with anti-
corrosion Coating
15. FIRE HOSE CABINET

Type : Semi-recessed wall mounted indoor hydrant Box.
Cabinet / Box : Steel Plate with 2.0 mm thickness with the frame
construction, welded connection and bright paint
color
Door : Door with hinge, institutional (heavy duty).
Hose Rack : One piece 16 US gauge steel.
Accessories : 1.5 inch hose rack equipped with; 1.5 inch nipple
1-5 inch cast brass valve 1,5 inch rubber lined
hose, 30 meter length.
Nozzle : 1.5 x 10 inch smooth bore, straight type, 300 psi
test pressure.
Standard : ANSI.
16. HYDRANT CHECK VALVE

Type : Hydrant underground check valve cast iron,
Size : 6 inch
Standard / Class : ANSI, 300 psi WOG.
17. HYDRANT MAIN VALVE

Type : Hydrant underground Gate valve cast-iron,
Size : 6 inch,
Standard/ Class : ANSI, 300 psi WOG
18. LANDING VALVE

Type : Oblique cast-iron landing valve with red bright
paint
Size : 2.5 inch, 1.5 inch

Utilities : Cap and chain, hose coupling, hand wheel
operated, Cadmium plated escutcheon.
Standard / Class : ANSI. 300 psi WOG
19. AIR RELEASE VALVE

Installed in each tip of the end of the straight Hydrant pipe inside the
building
Type : Cast-iron floating Ball
Size : 0.75 inch connection, 1.625 inch valve
Standard / Class : ANSI / 300 psi WOG
20. PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE ASSY

Should consist of equipment that meets the following standards;
Constant Pressure Output with pilot operated (self flushing type),
Maximum pressure reducing ratio 10 : 3, Body : Ductile Iron, Internal &
External : fusion bonded epoxy powder coating that refers to the standard
of NSF 61 ( Portable Water ), seat ring & Stem : SS 316, Diaphragms :
Synthetic end connection.
The requirement for side entrance pressure and exit pressure side should
be in compliance with what listed in the drawings and should be equipped
with By-Pass equipment.
21. PRESSURE GAUGE

Size : Bourdon-Tube Pressure Gauge
Size of Dial : 100 mm
Measurement Unit : psi and kg/cm²
Measurement Scale : 0 s/d 25 kg/cm² or 0 to 350 psi
Connection nominal diameter : ½ inch
22. SIGHT GLASS

- Material : Pressure proof glass
- Easy to see / clear
- Diameter 25 mm.
23. PUMP EQUIPMENT ACCESSORIES
a. Unless it is otherwise specified the use of pipeline accessories should

use:
* Diameter size 15 s/d 50 mm is threads type
* Diameter size above 65 is Flans type

* Standard / Class: ANSI / 300 PSI
b. Gate Valve
* Diameter size 15 s/d 50 mm
* Valve body, steam disc bronze material, female thread.
* Diameter size 65 upper
Non Rising Stem, cast iron body, Hanged end
c. Check Valve
Valve body, steam disc bronze material, female thread, Y type
Cast iron body, stainless steel screen, flanged end, Y type.
d. Strainer
Valve body, steam disc bronze material, female thread, Y type
Cast iron body, stainless steel screen, flanged end, Y type.
e. Flexible Connection
* Synthetic rubber material flanged end.
f. Fortex Plate
Bronze body
24 PIPELINING SYSTEM
a Pipe Connecting System
Fire Fighting Pipe
The use of fitting
Pipe below φ 40mm” malleable iron ANSI B. 163 class 300lb, Screwed
and pipe above φ 50mm”, wrought steel Butt weld fitting ANSI B 16.9 SCH
40 Flange: Diameter above 50mm”, Forged Steel RF Class 300lb, welding
joint.
To strengthening from the leak, the pipe connecting using thread should
be firstly layered with Primatone EPOXY ADHESIVE & SEALANTS.
While the flanged connection should be equipped with Ring Pack ujs /
gasket rubber made homogenously.
b. Installations of Fixtures, Fitting and etc.

1) All fixtures should be properly installed and free from any dirt that
might interfere the flow or cleanliness of the water, and should be
rigidly installed at its place with a rigid foundation.
2) All fixtures, fittings, water pipes should be in tidy condition and does
not disturb the installation process / porcelain wall and etc. The
fixtures component should be synchronic and well-installed, and also
installed in strong foundation to hold up the components, such as
fixtures, fitting and etc. The Contractor should be responsible in
completing the said component on the installation networks as
abovementioned.
3) For the pipes with high pressure water / main pipe, a concrete block
with strong mixtures should be installed and it is installed in every
connection of pie, tee, elbow, valve and etc.
c. Hanger and Pipe Leverage

1) All pipes should be fastened / established by a strong hanger or rigid
anchor, so that the inclination of which will be fixed to prevent it from
any vibration.
2) Horizontal pipe should be hung by the adjustable hanger with a
distance between not more than 2,5m
3) Flexible joint should be used to all pipes that pass the area of site
location to prevent the pipe from any breakage due to site shifting.
4) The hanger or pipe leverage should be bolted / fastened on the site
construction from the insert /anchor installed by the time of concrete
drilling using Ramset.
5) Vertical pipes should be levered on the bracket clamp and made in
distance not more than 3 m.
d. Valves
1) Water valve with φ 2” is “screwed bronze body type with external
spindle” Type Gate Valve
2) Water valve with φ 2½” - φ 3” is of “bronze flanged body type with
internal screwed spindle” Type Butterfly Valve
3) Water valve bigger than φ 3” is of “flanged steel body type with
external spindle yoke”. Type Butterfly Valve
4) Work pressure from valves should be adjusted with its function, for the
water work of fire fighting, valve with work pressure 300 psi, with cast
iron material must be used.
e. Underground Pipes
1) Underground pipes excavation should be made with 60cm depth for

the pipe below φ 4” and 80-100 cm for the pipes above φ 5”. The
foundation of the excavation hole should be consistent and flat enough
so that the length of the pipe can be in good leverage. For the clean
water pipes and waste pipe should not be located in the same hole.
2) Soil excavation should be clean from any dirt and debris. After it is all
clear then the excavation should be filled with sand with ± 5cm thick
and pipe is installed subsequently in the excavation hole examined by
MK, then restore it with sand and excavation soil that is free from
debris.
3) Standard /Guidance used for the depth of the excavation is measured
by the diameter of the pipe to the road surface / original soil or else
should be adjusted properly as the drawing plan.
4) The requirement of crossing the pipe passing the road or local
drainage should be observed as the drawing plan.
5) Fire hydrant pipe that is particularly located outside of the site plan
should be firstly coated with asphalt material or rust proof plinkoot and
then layered with the jacketing material made from gunny sack.
f. Painting
All underground irons / steel pipes should be layered with Tar (Tor Corted)
or coating to prevent from corrosive. While for the exposed pipes should
be marked with color or paint where the color of which will be determined
later by MK. In the purpose of being easily-recognized the entire pipes on
the ceiling should be marked in color / paint for a distance of ± 4 m long
on each main pipe as well as the pipe in the shaft where the examination
door is located. Standard paint colors that will be used are as follows;
- For Hydrant Pipe and Sprinkler will use red color
- For pipe direction will use white color.
25. SPECIFIC TECHNICAL REQUIREMENT

a. Execution Period
The execution period of the procurement, installation and maintenance is
adjusted based on the building phase in accordance with the provided
schedule.
b. Material
The Contractor should warrant that the entire unit of equipment are in new
condition and free from any defective material, improper material, and
also warrant that the quality of the equipments are in accordance with the
specification objective, and should refer to the standard ISO

14000/140002, Environmental Management System.
Each material or equipment that does not meet the specifications should
be replaced with the standard as per the specification within 1 (one) week
after the signing of the official handover.
Any cost occurred as the result of the replacement should be borne by the
contractor.
c. Drawings and Specification

Drawings and planning specifications are constituted an integral and
inseparable part.
Should there be any part of work or equipment required in order that the
installation may work properly, and only stated in one of the drawings plan
or planning specifications, the Contractor shall remain to implement it
without any additional cost.
d. Drawings Plan
1) Drawings plan included into the Fire Fighting works in this bid document
are the drawings with the code drawings FH
2) The Contractor is obliged to examine the design over the possibility of
error / incompatibility occurs either from the side of pipe diameter scale or
installation and etc. The above matters should be proposed in writing or
drawing by the time of bid explanation / aanwijzing. The drawings plan is
not intended to describe about the pipes, fittings, valves and fixtures in
detail. Although, the entire parts as mentioned above are not depicted
according to the specification, they should be adjusted and installed by the
Contractor, however as necessary, this installation should be complete
and able to be well-functioned in accordance with reasonable
implementation.
e. Shop Drawings
Shop drawings for the entire works should be available on the site at all
times. Including the changes or suggestion and etc, during the installation,
Contractor should mark the drawing sets with a pencil or red ink for any
changes made, erasing or any additional to the said installation, shop
drawings should be made in 1 (one) set of calques papers 3 (three) sets
of blue print by the Contractor.
f. As Built Drawing

The Contractor should made drawings installation in detail (shop drawing)

to be approved by Board of Directors Management, as well as to
handover the As Built Drawing comprising the lay out, installed
installation, detail installation, detail of the equipment from the entire
installation abovementioned / draw in calques paper. The installation
execution should meet the applicable general requirement and in
accordance with the Plumbing Guide Indonesia year 2000. As built
drawing is made in 1 (one) set of calques 3 (three) sets of blue print.
g. Model of Goods
The Contractor is obliged to send the model of material that will be used in
the implementation or brochures from the said equipment to MK and
awaiting for the approval from MK prior to the installation.
Should the said material be declared improper/unusable by MK, therefore,
the Contractor should remove the material out from the site within 3
(three) days, the said material should be no longer be in the site area
anymore.
h. Executants
The entire works should be implemented properly by the skilled labor so
that it is able to precisely produce best quality work.
For the particular implementation, the Contractor should provide statement
letter that verify the labor is capable in terms of experience and skill in
doing such work.
i. Security
The Contractor is responsible for the prevention of the material /
equipments of the installation from the damage or thievery. The lost or
damaged materials / equipments should be replaced by the Contractor
without any additional cost.
j. Coordination
During the work implementation, the Contractor is obliged to hold
coordination among the other Contractors that engage the structural,
electrical and interior works and etc, in order to minimize any error and
mistakes happening in the installation.

k. License
1) Permits and other necessary requirements to implement the
installation should be performed by the Contractor at its own cost.
2) All the examinations, utilization worthiness testing from the Fire
Fighting Agency (DPK) and others as well as the official notes that are
necessary for the installation works should be performed by the
Contractor at its own cost.
3) The Contractor should be responsible for the usage of copyrighted
equipment, the possibility of indemnity claims and other necessary
costs for such works. The Contractor is obliged to handover the
statement letter pertaining to this matter.
4) The Contractor should handover the permits or official notes obtained
from the authorities pertaining to this installation project to MK,
Consultant or to the appointed party.
l. Work Correlations
1) The Contractor should provide data, measurements and drawings
pertaining to the excavation and piling works that are performed by the
other parties if any.
2) All machine pedestal manufacturing should be performed by the
Contractor. The Contractor should provide necessary data,
measurements, drawings and equipments to the other parties that
require such data.
3) All electrical cable withdrawals up to the equipment panel can be
performed by the other party. The Contractor is obliged to provide
necessary data and drawings to the other executing parties.
4) All the water pipe withdrawals including clean water pipe, hydrant pipe
and sprinkler pipe which are not listed in the drawings and
specifications performed by the other party, the Contractor should
coordinate and provide data, measurements and drawings to the other
executing party.
5) All electrical facilities, water, emergency sanitary should be done by
the Contractor. The Contractor should coordinate with the other parties
to anticipate this matter.
m Sub Contractor
1) Should there be any requirement particularly in the skilled labor as the
result of incapability of the existing labor to implement the installation,
adjustment, testing and other works; therefore the Contractor is able to
handover part of the installation work to the Sub-Contractor by virtue of

the approval from the MK.
2) The contractor is fully responsible for the scope of works either
performed by its own self or performed by the Sub-Contractor.
3) Taskmaster and MK are ineligible for any prosecution from the Sub
Contractor should there be any inconsistency in payment provided by
the Contractor.
n Site Supervisor
1) The entire works covered in such installation should be supervised by
qualified person. He / She is fully responsible for the work installations
in this project.
2) Name, detail work experience, organizational structure of Site
Supervisors should be provided by the Contractor to MK in order to
obtain an approval.
3) When, in fact, that the appointed Consultant or other authorized party of
Site Supervisor is consider incapable by MK, therefore the Contractor
should substitute them by another person.
o. Installation Report
1) The contractor should provide samples of all materials that will be used
to MK, consultant or other appointed party to request a written
installation approval thereof.
2) By listing a complete brand, type and specification from all models of
material proposed.
3) The Contractor should create a schedule of detail time for every work
and give it to MK, Consultant or other appointed parties to obtain an
approval.
The contractor should provide:
1. Daily Report Book
2. Weekly Report Book
3. Monthly Report Book completed with a Picture
4. Overtime / holiday works permit
5. The Contractor should report the work progress in each week along
with the comparison as per schedule having been arranged.
6. When there is any discrepancy, then the reasons thereof together
with the way how to overcome such discrepancy should be given.
7. For each completed installation work, the Contractor should obtain a
written statement from MK, Consultant and other appointed party

confirming that this installation phase is already fully completed in

accordance with the existing requirement.
8. Installation phases are later determined by the detail time schedule
provided by the Contractor.
9. This each testing implementation, balancing and “trial run”
installation system should be attended by MK, Consultant, Expert
and the representative of taskmaster, as well as any related party.
Therefore, the certificate of testing result should be issued by the
authorized officials.
p. Site Cleanliness
1) The site used should be cleaned up after finishing the work on each
day by the Contractor. The Contractor should contact the other party to
have coordination in cleaning up the field.
2) Immediately after the Contract ended, the Contractor should remove
the entire remaining work material as well as the equipment with the
exception for the equipment that is still required during the
maintenance.
q. Operational Instruction
1) By the time of the initial handover, the Contractor should provide
drawings, operational instruction equipment data and maintenance
method of installed machinery under this Contract in Indonesian
Language.
2) The said data should be handed over to the Owner in 3 (three) sets
and 1 (one) set to the Consultant.
3) By the time of the initial handover the Contractor should provide as
follows; Instruction Manual, Installation Manual, Maintenance Guide,
Operating Instruction, Trouble Shooting Instruction and Original
Brochure.
4) The Contractor should provide 2 (two) sets of abbreviation operational
instruction and maintenance to the Owner that should be placed in
glass framed and attach it to the wall in the main machine room or in
the other locations appointed by MK.
5) The Contractor should provide practical education at no cost pertaining
to the operational and maintenance to technical engineering officers
appointed by Owner / MK until the aforesaid officer is qualified enough
to perform the task.
6) The Contractor should provide a warranty letter toward the main
equipment to the Taskmaster.

r. Certificate
The contractor should provide Certificate / Recommendation from the
regional Fire Fighting Agency (DPK) for the evidence of the said unit is
eligible to be used particularly in works of fire fighting system installation.
s. Spare Part Data

The Contractor should warrant with Warranty Letter for the existence of
spare part which is easily acquired for the equipment that possibly
experiences to get any disturbance or damage within the short period,
either for the main equipment or supporting equipment.
26 TESTING
a. Exhaust System Testing
1) The entire water pipe systems should have pluggable hole so that the
said systems can be filled with water up to the highest “Vent” hole.
2) The said system should be able to hold the water filled as
abovementioned and if the observer would like to have another testing
other than the test above, the Contractor should allocate an additional
cost and borne by the Contractor.
b. Distribution Installation System Testing

1) Prior to performing the test over the entire pipelining to every part of
clean water distribution network, the Contractor is obliged to conduct
the test partially towards the main equipment (pump, electrical panel,
control panel, pressure tank and etc.) The test that should be
performed shall be at least:
• Water debit, Pump rotation
• Pump pressure, motor workflow
The test result should be properly recorded and reported to the
Supervisor / MK for the approval thereon.
2) Together with the Planner and Supervisor / MK, Project Owner and
Contractor Planner are obliged to conduct the testing towards main
equipment performance with the system having been fully functioned.
This test covers:
• Pump capacity, Motor Workflow
• Water pressure on the farthest fixture and etc.
The test result should be properly recorded and reported to the
Supervisor / MK for the approval thereon.

The test should comply with the procedure of NFPA 20 in the condition
that Valve is plugged by pump Head 101-140% in the capacity of 150%
of normal capacity, Head pump 65% of the normal pump Head.
c. Damage and Failure of Testing

Should there be any damage or failure during the test from the part of
installation or material from the installation, then the Contractor should
replace the part or the material damaged or failed and the test should be
retaken in regards to the Supervisor satisfaction.
27. MAIN EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

a. Fire Fighting Works
b. Fire Fighting Pump System
Fire fighting pump is unit that consist of supporting pump, main pump with
electrical motor NFPA 20 standard.
c. Jockey Pump
ITEM TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
Type of Pump : Horizontal Split Casing
Capacity : as per the Drawings of Planner
Pump Head : as per the Drawings of Planner
Pump Rotation : as per the Drawings of Planner
Pump Power : as per the Drawings of Planner
Electric Characteristic : as per the Drawings of Planner
Quantity : as per the Drawings of Planner
d. Electric Fire Hydrant Pump

Type of Pump : Horizontal Split Casing Pump, UL/FM
Pump Power : as per the Drawings of Planner
Electric Characteristic : as per the Drawings of Planner
Quantity : as per the Drawings of Planner
Standard : NFPA 20
e. Diesel Fire Hydrant Pump

Type of Pump : Horizontal Split Casing Pump, UL/FM

Engine Type : 4 Tak Diesel multi cylinder
- Compression Ignition Type
- Double solenoid starter
- Completed control over speed
- High Temperature
- Low oil
Clutch System : Direct Connection
Power : 456 HP
Power : Accu lead acid / Nicad Battery 24 volt, 80
Amp, 2 pieces of maintenance free type.
Utilities:
• Pump is equipped with diesel engine couple on the top of the base
plat, completed with the radiator, muffler, and flexible pipe; unloose
plat, fuel tank, electrical panel and etc.
• Battery charger
• Fuel tank for 2 hours capacity (cap 1 Gal / 1 HP plus 10%)
• Operation system, automatic start and manual stop
f. Control Panel and System Arrangement

Control panel is part of the utilities of fire fighting unit system that is able to
regulate the pump automatically either jockey pump as supporting pump,
main pump with electric motor.
The said system is regulated by a special panel for fire fighting pump in
compliance with NFPA 20 standard regulation as follows;
- Power
- Phase reversal
- Relief valve discharge
- Flow Meter
- Water level
1)Arrangements of Hydrant Pump Set is as follows;

a. If water pressure on the network is decreasing due to the leakage test,
either flushing up to the maximum value provided, the Jockey Pump
will automatically start and stop if the water pressure reaches the
maximum value provided.
b. If the water pressure on the network is continuously decreasing due to
the open of one or more hydrant valves or due to the works of heads
up to the time limit, the Main Pump will automatically start, and will be
manually stopped by the operator if the testing or the fighting test is
completely accomplished.
2) Hydrant Pump Set Electric Driven

a. Hydrant Pump Set should be able to supply the water necessity for
fire fighting at all times to the maximum limits of pump capacity
automatically and in manual stop.
b. Hydrant Pump Set should consist of one or more main pumps and
Jockey Pumps
c. Centrifugal Type Pump unit with flanged connection and component
is as follows;
- Cast Iron Casing, bronze Impeller
- Heavy duty steel shaft, MECHANICAL seal
- Heavy duty grease lubricant bearing
d. Pump Motor should get electrical power from (PLN and Generator
set automatically)
e. Electrical Power from PLN should be taken from particular switch
before the main switch
f. Hydrant Pump Set should consist of the equipment as follows:
- Jockey Pump c/w motor, Main Pump switch motor
- Outlet Header, Inlet and Outlet Valve.
- Check valve against water hammer, Inlet Strainer.
- Power and control panel, Pressure switch, pressure gauge.
- Flexible connection, Hydraulic connections, Electric
connections, Base frame.
g. Annunciating Pump Status:
- Jockey Pump On, indicating lamp, Main Pump with motors
- Water level drop, Alarm horn & indicating lamp.
- Water level too low, Alarm horn & indicating lamp.
3).Engine Driven Fire Pump
a. Engine driven fire pump is functioned to supply the water for the fire
fighting during the failure of electrical pump or when requiring a great
deal of more water for extinguishing
b. Engine driven fire pump should be tested minimum once in a week
for an hour
c. Engine driven pump should be in a package especially-designed for
the fire fighting necessity that consists of;
- Horizontal fire pump, Diesel Engine.
- Staring device with pully or motor starter.

- Battery starter and outside battery charger
- Engine speed control, Fuel oil tank, Hydraulic Connections.
- Electric connections, Control board, Instrumentations
28. WARRANTY, MAINTENANCE AND DELIVERY

a. Warranty Period
The entire works of installation and all equipment should be warranted to
make sure that they will work properly. All works included into the scope of
theses works should be warranted for 1 (one) year after deliverance of the
said work.
b. Maintenance Period
Maintenance period should be determined for 180 (one hundred eighty)
calendar days since the date of initial work delivery along with the Official
Notes. The Contractor should repair all the damage or the improper
functions of the equipment due to imperfectness of the implementation or
the material used. The repair should be performed immediately by the
Contractor on the first warning time from Board of Directors. The
Contractor should immediately repair the damage resulting from the
implementation of the work.
Should the Contractor fail to do so or the repair is undertaken

unsatisfactorily, then, the Construction Management may ask another
person to do the repair or replace it at Contractor’s expenses.
After the expiration of maintenance period and all the damages or the
imperfectness are already properly accomplished by the Contractor, the
works can be then delivered for the second time.
c. Work Delivery
The said work should be fully accomplished and delivered for the first
period as mentioned above. The notice of the work delivery should be in
writing prepared by the Contractor and mentioning the desired date of the
handover to the Construction Management within 1 week prior to the
desired performance of handover. Should the works be considered
eligible, then the Construction Management will accept the said work for
the first time, declared in writing in the First Official Notes.

29. SUBSTANCE AND MATERIAL REQUIREMENT

a. General
1) All materials supplied and installed by the Contractor should be in
new condition and the material should be fit to be installed in the
tropical area.
2) The material should come from good quality product and the
newest product. For the materials mentioned below should be
warranted by the Owner that the material is good and new condition
by presenting the order letter from the dealer / agent / factory.
3) The Contractor should agree to replace the disagreed material due
to any deviation from the specification or other matters, where the
replacement of is at no cost.
b. Material List
For all the materials offered, the Contractor is obliged to fill-in the material
list form mentioning about the brand, type and class thereof, completed
with brochure / catalogue which are also included into the bidding
preparation. This table of the material list is mainly prioritized for the
components which constitute factory manufacturing products.
c. Brand Factory Product Statement

1) Brand/Factory product statement is if in this technical specification
or in the drawings, some particular brands or quality classes (quality
performance) of certain materials or components which are
mentioned in the technical specifications or on the drawing are
stated especially for the materials where the level of quality / factory
of which are, mentioned.
2) If later on during the ongoing project, the materials listed on the

table of materials cannot be provided by the Contractor due to a
strongly acceptable reason to the Owner, MK, therefore, can
consider the replacement of brand / type thereof with a certain
sanction to the Contractor.
B. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT AND INSTALLATION
1. GENERAL
This section covers the general requirements for electrical work to be

installed under this specification.
The contractor shall supply and install all electric wiring electrical and
control panel and level control etc. for the complete, safe and satisfactory
operation of the plant covered by the specification.
The entire electrical installation shall be in accordance with the regulation

and requirement of all relevant authorities having jurisdiction over the
installation,
The electricity supply will be 220 Vt phase/50 Hz and 380 V/3 phase / 50Hz,
4 wire. All equipment shall be designed to operate with ± 10% voltage
The power supply to the systems shall be provide by the Electrical

Contractor up to electrical power panel in pumps room, Chilling plant and
where else required.
The Contractor shall be responsible for extending the supply from the above
including control panels. starter, conduits and wirings etc. Necessary
operation of their equipment offered.
4. PUMP CONTROL CUBICLE
Before commencing any work whatsoever on the pump control cubicle, the
contractor shall submit drawings of the proposed layout showing all
dimensions, the total weight, fixing details, cable sizes and cable termination
details of both incoming and outgoing cable to the Engineer for approval.
Approval of drawings will be given I principle only, without abrogation of the
Contractor’s responsibilities in respect associated details.
Cubicle shall be constructed by heavy gauge sheet steel of thickness not

less than 2mm, finished in enamel of a color which will decided by the

Engineer and Architect.
Cubicle shall be wall mounted and provided with hinged lockable access
doors with mechanically retained gaskets and hinged top panels containing
control switches, supervisory instruments and pilot light. All exterior door
fitting shall be chrome plated.
Pump control cubicle shall contain a main fused switch, bus work, Brach
switch, bus work, branch switch fuses or molded case circuit breakers,
motor starters, auxiliary relays, control fuses, on/off push buttons,
manual/auto power ‘on’ lights, pump running and overload lights, ammeters,
terminal blocks, wiring and accessories for the full operation and control of
the associated pumps. All electrical equipment shall comply with the
relevant section of this specifications.
The Plumbing and drainage Contractor shall provide voltage free dry
contacts in from of terminal block inside the pump indication panel for each
respective alarm of the pumps and water tank status. The following points
for each pump/water tank/sump pit are required to be monitored; Pump
Running, Pump Trip
5 CABLES
All wiring shall be carried out using PVC insulated stranded single core
copper conductor cable to B.S. 6004,6231,5345 or 6500 as appropriate.
The Contractor shall confirm loads and sizes of cable prior to placing orders.
All main conductors (including neutral) shall be colored in accordance to

PUlL for their entire length, and the phase to which they are connected All
control wiring shall be colored coded using spiral stripe tracer on base color.
approved trucking.
To eliminate the possibility of damage to cable due to thermal expansion,
allowance for movement shall be made by the introduction of bend or set in
each cable/core adjacent to the terminal.
Cables shall, at alt times, be handled with care and every effort made to

shall be exercised when breaking the rotation of the drums and under no
circumstances shall babble be dragged over loose earth of concrete
Approved type of cable rollers shall be used.
resistance and records of test submitted to the Engineer for approval. Single
core cable shall be pulled into conduit only after the whole network, or a
complete section of conduit has been installed, tested for continuity and
swabbed through.
6. ELECTRIC MOTORS
Motors shall be manufactured in accordance with B.S. 4999 AND 5000.

Motor of water pumps for plumbing uses shall be of drip proof squirrel cage
type, equipped with ant condensation heater and the heater is off when the
starter is on & vice versa. Heaters shall be wired from the motor control
cubicle. Totally enclosed fan cooled motors are also acceptable.
Motors shall be selected to be capable of running without overload at 20%

in excess of the horse power absorbed under normal pump duty conditions.
Motors shall generally be three Phase, however, small motors of 1 KW or
Les may be single phase.
Ratings shall be based on continuous duty in the prescribed environment or

an ambient temperature of 40 c whichever is the more demanding, with an
efficiency under load of riot less than 0.85.
Winding insulation shall be to class B in accordance to B.S. 2757, allowing

on 90°c temperature rise above ambient, unless otherwise specified.
The power factor of all motors shall not be less than 0.85 lagging under all
conditions.
Motors up to including 3.7 Kw shall be fitted ball bearings at both end,

larger motors shall be fitted with roller or deep grove ball beanngs. Motors
operating with vertical shafts shall be equipped
With bearings designed to counter unbalanced end thrust. Motors shall have
a synchronous speed as shown in Equipment Schedule.

All motors rated at 20 Kw or more shall be fitted with thermistors or other

sealed, temperature sensitive devices embedded in the windings and
suitable for connection to motor protection control circuits.
Motors shall be mounted on a common bed plate with the driven machine
wherever possible.
The precise method of carrying out the following test shall be agreed with
the Engineer prior to Commencement.
The following items shall be tested in the sequence indicated and a

completed report shall be prepared by the contractor and submitted to the
Engineer for approval
C. PAINTING, LABELLING AND FINISHING
1. MATERIALS
All parts of the work installed under this specification shall be painted with
approved first quality enamel paints, except those items specified as being
painted by others or otherwise exempted from painting in this section of the
specification.

conditions in which it shall be located.
All paints used shall be of one approved manufacturer, and finishes shall e
Before ordering any primer, undercoat and finishing paint, the Contractor
shall submit the color scheme to the engineer for approval.
The sub-contractor shall select all finishing and painting materials from type
suitable for the surfaces to which they are applied and for the environmental
conditions in each area.

2. PLANT, MACHINERY & EQUIPMENT
All items of paint, machinery and equipment supplied painted ex factory

shall be given one finishing coat of full gloss enamel, Except where the
manufacturer’s standard finish is approved.
3. EXPOSED METALWORK
All exposed metalwork shall he wire-brushed and iron cleaned from rust,
scale, dirt and grease, and shall then be given one priming coat, one
undercoat and one approved color finishing coat of full gloss enamel
The priming coat for exposed galvanized iron shall be an approved
galvanized iron primer.
The priming coat for exposed non-ferrous metalwork approved as suitable

for the metal to switch it will be applied shall be.
4 CONCEALED METALWORK
All galvanized iron surface concealed in roof spaces, false ceilings~ building
ducts etc. shall not be painted.
5 PIPEWORK & METAL SHEATING
Pipe work and metal sheeting shall be painted as metalwork as

applicable.for exposed or Turned parts of valves, controls etc. shall be
cleaned and polished to approval
6. PIPEWORK IDENTIFICATION
All pipe etc. shall be identified in accordance with British Standards 1710:
1984.
Circumferential bands of standard ground colors shall be not les than

100mm wide on pipes up to 50mm nominal diameter, and not less than
150mm wide on pipes greater than 50mm nominal diameter.

Supplementary colors shall be displayed as bands not less than 25mm

wide in the centre of the ground color bands, Where lettering is required it
shall be painted in contrasting color in accordance with the standard, in
block letters not less than 15mm
high for pipes up to 50mm nominal diameter, and in block letter not less
than 40mm high for larger pipes.

nominal diameters, and 150mm long larger pipes.
7. LABELLING
All plant and equipment provided under this specification is to be labeled in

both English and Indonesian as to duty or services, all such labeling to
correspond to schedules, diagrams, etc. To be provided as part of the
Record Drawings. Labels are white trifoliate with black engraved lettering
not less than 20mm high or as otherwise required and approved
Manufacturer’s nameplate shall generally be provided for all plant and

equipment and shall show serial and model numbers date of manufacture.
The following refers to specific items (but not by way of limitation) requiring
labeling
a. All valves, motor starters, fans, distribution boards, gauge, Contractors,

cable terminals in switchboards, circuit breakers.
b. Labels to be attached to valves (or pipe adjacent thereto) with a light

gauge metal band or alternatively to be screwed to the insulated valve
box where provided. These labels shall state the valve number.
c. Distribution boards, starters etc. Are to be labeled to indicated the circuit

number, phase and item controlled.
Label shall be screwed or riveted to sheet metal. Adhesive fixing is not

acceptable.
Details of exact lettering shall be agreed with the engineer prior to

manufacture.
A Complete valve schedule shall be incorporated in the as-built

drawings and this schedule shall clearly indicate the valve numbers,
duty, function, size, flow rate and any other relevant information
necessary to allow the Employer’s plant operators to safety operate
each valve and to subsequently maintain of replace the valve as
required.
The valve schedule shall clearly relate to the various system schematics
to enable the entire operating sequence and circuitry to be followed.
8 APPLICATION OF PAINTING
All parties shall be prepared and applied in accordance with the

manufacturer’s recommendations.
All galvanized metal surfaces shall be properly etch primed to ensure

correct adhesion of the paint to the surface. Materials etch-priming shall be
as recommended by the paint manufacturer’s. Subsequent painting of
galvanized surfaces shall comply with this specification.
Prior to painting, all metallic surfaces except galvanized surfaces shall be

thoroughly scraped and wire brushed as necessary to remove scale, rust
and sward. Surfaces shall then be solvent cleaned to remove all oil, grease
and dirt.
When the surfaces to be painted are clean and dry, one coat of an approved
primer shall be evenly applied over the entire area. After surfaces have
been primed, the sub-contractor shall notify the engineers so that an
inspection of the primed surfaces can be made prior to the application of the
undercoat and the finishing coats.
When the priming coat has been approve, one coat of an approved paint flat
undercoat shall be applied. Before applying the finishing coats, the sub-
contractor shall ensure that the under coated surface is rubbed flat and

smooth. Finally, two coast of an approved high gloss finishing paint shall be
when all dust has been removed.
Each successive coating shall be completely dry prior to the application of

the next coat.
The minimum thickness of each layer of paint shall be 50 u.
D. TESTING AND OPERATING OF INSTALLATION
1. GENERAL
The contractor shall ensure to the satisfaction of the Engineer that the
installation complies with all requirements including the following clauses
2. CLEANING AND FLUSHING
a. The contractor shall the entire installation including all sanitary fitments
and pipe work, etc. After installation and keep them in a new condition
b. All pipes etc, shall be flushed through with water, ridded when
necessary to ensure clearance of debris.
c. Cleaning and flushing shall be carried out in sections as the installation

becomes completed.
3. HYDRAULIC TESTING OF PIPEWORK
a. The Contractor shall carry out hydraulic test on the completed fire
fighting systems to show that it is functioning satisfactorily within the
requirements of this specification and local regulations.
b. The Contractor shall provide suitable tests pumps and arrange for a
supply of water required in connection with testing of pipe work. The test
pu mp shall be fitted with pressure gauges which shall be fitted with
pressure Gauges which shall be of suitable range for the pressure being
applied.

c. Hydraulic tests shall be carried out as the pipe work is installed and
shall be completed before cases in walls. Also tests shall be carried out
prior to false ceilings and other finished are installed
d. All water services pipe work shall be hydraulically tested for a period of
not less than 24 hours to a pressure of not less than one and half times
the working pressure. The Contractor must record all test figures
together with schedules of pipe lengths and should note that testing
shall be witnessed by the Engineer. No pressure drop shall be allowed
during the tests.
e. Testing apparatus shall be provided by the Contractor.
f. The Contractor must carry out any additional tests if required by the
local authorities, without any additional cost.
g. On completion of the section of drainage pipe work to be tested blank

off all open ends pipes and ensure that all access covers are securely
tightened so that they are airtight.
At the base of each stack, a drain bag drain plug is inserted and small
quantity of water allowed to settle above it so as to form a seal that can
easily be inspected if it leaks.
Blow air through the tube and reconnect at the manometer gauge to
obtain a reading of 38mm w.g. the level should remain for a period of
not less than five minutes without falling and without further air being
following
- That the plant and apparatus is of robust construction and of capacity

for the duty specified.
- That all valves, switches, controls, etc, are properly regulated and
capable of proper operation and in the case of valves that are
capable of tight shut-off.
- That all apparatus is silent.
- That all instruments are correctly calibrated and read accurately.
- That all services are tested in accordance with the details of the
relevant clauses of this specification.

- That the alignments for all pumps are proper.
h. Should the results of these test shown that the pumps, etc or any other
items of equipment fail to perform to the efficiencies or others
performance figures as given in this specification, and as replace the
equipment without additional cost to the contract in order that the
required performance is obtained. Should it be necessary for the
Contractor to attend to item of plant as described he will be responsible
for cast for any damage or deterioration to the building or any other
services consequent on such attendance.
i. The Contractor shall perform all tests and demonstrations as called for
by the local authorities.
j. Testing procedures shall be submitted two months after the approval of

major equipment to the Engineer for approval.
4. SUPPLY OF TESTING EQUIPMENT
a. The Contractor shall provide all tools, pressure pumps, instruments and
recorders required to carry out the tests given in this section
b. All water and electricity required for testing purpose will be supplied by
others.
5. PRE TREATMENT
a. Prior to start-up and after satisfactory hydraulic testing, all piping

systems shall be flushed and drained at least once through to rid off
contaminating materials.
b. All strainers shall be inspected and cleaned out or replaced.
E. COMMISSIONING, TESTING, MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

1. GENERAL
On completion of the work, the contractor shall commission the installation

and put it into operation in accordance with the intent of this specification.
The Contractor shall provided all necessary facilities and instruments to

carry out such test in accordance with local regulations as my be necessary
to satisfy that the installation and put it into operation in accordance with the
intent of this specification.
After handover of the work, the contractor shall carry out regular preventive
maintenance at interval not exceeding three calendar month, or other wise
as directed by the Engineer and shall provide a fast, efficient and
comprehensive breakdown services as required during the defects liability
period.
2. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION MANUAL
The contractor shall within 14 days of reaching practical completion

handover to the Engineer four (4) copies of a maintenance Instruction
Manual.
Manual should the following:
a. A cover giving
The same of the development

The title of the document
The same and address of the installation contractor.
b Inside page giving similar information to the cover but including contact
telephone numbers for normal and emergency use.
c. Content page.
d. Description of the installation.
e. Scheduled details of all equipment and plant,

f Operating instruction including details of any automatic control system
g. Maintenance and fault finding instructions including composite schedule

of routine maintenance.
h. Tests reports and commission records.
I. Recommended spare parts and lubricants.
j. List of equipment and plant with manufacturer’s name and address and
local agent, if applicable.
k. Manufacturer’s literatures suitable indexed to include shop drawings,

I. A complete valve schedule as described in the “painting, labeling and

finishing” section.
m. List of as-installed drawings.

suitable separated and ready identifiable or pages should be numbered
consecutively and pages numbers included in the contents page
Finally, approved manuals should be submitted in loose leaf ring bonders

with hard covers to facilitate storage.

appropriate.
As-installed drawing should include a diagrammatic layout of the completed

installation with major items of plant suitably referenced to the schedules
(item above)
A set of the as- installed drawings should be provided for each copy of the 0
& M manual required to be provided.
In addition one set of copy negatives should be provided.

3 SERVICE
The Contractor shall undertake to provided a comprehensive breakdown

service whereby a qualified electrician or plumber attends to breakdowns as
soon as practicable after a break down is reported and carries out
immediate remedial work.
4 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
The Contractor shall carry out regular inspections periods not exceeding
three calendar month, and shall fully service all plant installed under this
specification for the term of the defects liability period, and shall maintain
all such plant in perfect operation during that period.
At each maintenance visit, the Contractor shall
a. Carry out all lubrication necessary
b. Check and adjust as necessary all drives.
c. Check all bearing for correct operation
d. Check all anti-vibration supports for deterioration
e. Check all connections for tightness
f. Check all sump and drains, and cleans as necessary
g. Prove correct operation of all safety controls
h. Prove operation of all automatic controls, and
i. Check all glands, packing, etc. and adjust or replace as necessary
In addition to the monthly maintenance schedule, the Contractor shall at

interval not exceeding six months:

a, Clean and re-grease all bearings as necessary
b. Inspect and clean as necessary all items of plant and equipment
c. Clean and adjust all switchgear, contactors and starters
5. STATUTORY AUTHORITIES’S TESTS AND INSPECTIONS
The contractor shall attend all tests and inspections carried out by statutory
authorities, and shall forthwith execute any variation work as a result of his
failure to comply with the statutory requirements.
IV. ELECTRICAL

SECTION I SCOPE OF WORK
A. SCOPE OF SPECIFICATION
This specification sets out the requirements, methods,materials,

workmanship, standards and regulation in connection with the Electrical
Installation for SDF DHL Indonesia Facility, PLN Makasar Indonesia.
The electrical work in this technical specification covers all electrical works
and lightning rod.
1. EXPLANATION
The works included in the field of this expertise include:
a) Provide all electrical systems works so that it can operate perfectly.
b) The drawings, specifications and bills of quantity are
complementary parts of and something that is contained in the
drawings and specifications which shall be binding.
c) All electrical installation works undertaken should be done by the
installer Contractor who can be trusted, has a good reputation and
has skilled and experienced workers in their fields, and the
company is registered as a PLN official installer by holding the
highest class installers fitting (D) which are still valid for a current
last year or has a valid technique responsible person determination
(SP-PST) and Certificate of Expertise / SKA from AKLI.
d) All installation works must be done according to "General
Requirements for Electrical Installation in Indonesia last edition in
2000 (PUIL) and PLN Rules (SPLN)" as a guide and also prevailing
regulations on the local area and other recognized standards/codes
such as IEC, VDE/DIN, AS, BS and others.
e) The Contractor shall place a scholar or who is deemed an expert as
a representative of the company and can make decisions if at any
time necessary. MK may request another supervisor turnover when
considered incapable.
2. DRAWING
a. The plan drawings that include the scope of electrical installation work
in this Tender Document are the drawings with the drawing code
number EE.
b. The Contractor shall check the design against the possibility of
errors/lack of match in terms of electrical quantities as well as
installation and others. The matters above shall be submitted in writing
or drawing on the explanation of the tender/aanwijzing.
c. Before the work is submitted in whole or in stages, the contractor shall
submit to MK of 3 (three) sets of drawings called "as-built drawings"
that are drawings of all materials, equipments and installations of
electrical systems, (1 set tracing 3 sets of blueprints)
d. The electricity drawing shows the overall magnitudes and numbers
and terms of the purposes of installation, the installation must conform
to local conditions on the project.
e. The drawings of architecture and structure must be related to the
construction and final details of the project, while other drawings must
be related to the details construction with regard to each work. The
contractor must complete all further purposes such as "shop drawings"
and detailed drawings.
f. Meaning that if there is technical or physical incompatibility then this
matter must be submitted in writing 4 days prior to the performance of
work, to be reported to MK/ the Planner in the field as a step of
execution, where the costs are already covered in the unit price of the
item.
3. PERFORMED FIELD OF WORK

a. The contractor must help managing PLN's power connections, in the
amount of: according to the drawing of planning including
administrative arrangements, all legal fees will be paid by the Owner.
b. The provision and installation of the TM-20 kV cable from PLN
distribution substation (kWH meters) to the consumer HVDP panel.
c. The provision and installation of consumers HVDP-20 kV panels

d. The provision and installation of the TM-20 kV cable from the HVDP
panel to the distribution transformer
e. The provision and installation of distribution transformers
f. The provision and installation of LVMDP panels.
g. The provision and installation of SDP panels, lighting, power and
control panel
h. The procurement and installation of cable from the distribution
transformer to LVMDP
i. The procurement and installation of cable from the Generator Control
Panel to LVMDP
j. The procurement and installation of low voltage distribution cable from
LVMDP to each floor as shown in the drawing of planning
k. The procurement and installation of control cable from LVMDP to the
Generator Control Panel (PKG).
l. The procurement and installation of banks capacitor equipped with
detuned reactor.
m. The installation of inside lighting including emergency and exit lamp,
outdoor lighting lamp and general purpose outlet/socket.
n. Complete lightning rod with grounding
o. Equipment grounding system.
p. The procurement and installation of fire stop materials among others
shafts spaces and existing sparing holes on each floor.
q. Testing and commissioning of equipment and installation.
4. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
a. Standards And Referens

All materials, equipments and installation works must comply with the
requirements specified in the standard and reference and other documents

issued by institutions or organizations that refer to the drawing of planning,

including but not limited to the standard or reference below:
1) General Requirements for Electrical Installation in Indonesia last
edition in 2000 (PUIL)
2) PLN Regulations (SPLN) as a guide and also prevailing regulations
on the area
3) Indonesia National Standard (SNI)
4) International Electrotechnical Committee (IEC)
5) VDE/DIN Standard
6) IEE Wiring Regulations, latest edition
7) Australian Standard (AS)
8) British Standard specification (BS).
9) National Electrical Code latest edition (NEC).
10) National Fire Protection Association (NFPA).
b.Referenced Clause
If there are matters that are mentioned again in other
section/chapter/drawing then this shall be interpreted not to eliminate one
another but instead to further confirm the matter. If there occurred any
contradictory matters between drawings or to technical specifications as
well as BQ, then a benchmark which shall be taken is having technical
weights and or having the highest cost weight.
c. Coordination Of Work
To smooth this work must be held coordination of all parts involved in this
project activity. All activities involving in the project must be coordinated in
advance for any disruption and conflict with one another can be avoided.
Localizing/itemizing each work until the details for approval by MK/the
Planner.
d. Material And "Workmanship"

All equipments, materials used in this work must be new and the material
must be resistant to the tropical climate. All works must be carried out in
the right way and every worker must have a satisfying skill. Where special
training for workers is necessary and the Contractor must perform it. The
Contractor must complete the valid certificate for any expert personal,
stating that the personnel has participated special trainings or has special
experiences in their respective areas of expertise.
e. List Of Material
At the time of bid, the Contractor must include/ attach "List of Materials"
which is firstly specified from all materials to be installed on the project and
must be mentioned factory, brand, manufacturer, type, complete with a
brochure/catalog. This shall be binding and must be filed complete, not be
a partial.
f. Name Of Manufacturer / Specified Brand

If this technical specification is mentioned the name of manufacturer/brand
from one type of material/component, then the Contractor shall offer and
install as specified.
So there is no reason for the Contractor at the time of installation stating
the goods are no longer on the market or are difficult to be obtained in the
market. For the goods to be imported, soon after being appointed as the
winner, the Contractor shall immediately order it on the agency in
Indonesia. If the Contractor had attempted to order it, but at the time of
ordering of such material/brand is not/is difficult to obtain, then the Planner
will ask for approval of the Board of Directors of Field/MK, to determine
alternatives from other brands with the same minimum specifications. So
after 1 (one) month the appointment of the winner, the Contractor must
submit a copy of other material order, stating that these materials have
been ordered (order import).

g. Shop Drawing
After the approval, in this case before the list of material specification, the
Contractor is required to submit shop drawings for approval of the Planner.
The shop drawings must be given the records of the Contractor, stating
that what is recommended is in conformity with the specifications and the
conditions of the space provided.
The data for each system must show the complete installation of all
component coordination to review the overall of the actual from the entire
system, the partial delivery will not be considered. The drawing of shop
drawings must be made in 4 (four) sets.
Shop drawings to be submitted are:
1. HVDP and LVMDP Panel
2. Power and lighting panels, outlet boxes and others.
3. Transformer, distributions wire layout and other.
4. The details of the installation of lamps.
5. Plan of lighting installation, socket every floor.
6. And others as requested by the Planner/MK.
Shop drawings are inserted for review / approval of the planner/MK at
least 14 (fourteen) working days after the issuance of Offer Letter
(SPK).
h. Subtitution
1) Product mentioned name of manufacturer
Materials, equipments, furnishings, accessories mentioned the name
of the manufacturer in the specification, the Contractor must complete
the products mentioned in the specification, or may propose an
equivalent substitution product, with complete data for approval of the
Planner/MK before order.
2) Product not mentioned name of manufacturer

Materials, equipments, furnishings, accessories and products that do

not mention the name of the manufacturer in the specification, the
Contractor must ask in writing the state name from its manufacture
that produce it, catalog and then describe the data that shows
correctly that the products used are in accordance with the
specifications and conditions of the project.
i. Sample
The Contractor shall submit samples of all materials to obtain prior
approval from the Planner/MK. All costs shall be borne by the Contractor.
These samples (mock-up) are included at least 14 (fourteen) working days
after the issuance of Offer Letter (SPK).
j. Protection
All materials and equipments must be in truth and adequately protected by
the Contractor, prior to during the construction and after the completion of
installation (under warranty period). Which materials and equipment were
damaged as a result of a sloppy installation and the inadequate protection
cannot be accepted for the installation of project.
k. Acces Opening
The Contractor shall provide an access opening (openings) for the
installation and maintenance of electrical installations. The openings
(access opening) contained in building construction such as walls, ceilings,
and so on upon the opening shall be equipped with proper closing facilities
for equipment surface, the cover must be released and transferred without
causing damage to the adjacent surface.
l. Painting
If the equipments have been painted from the manufacture and the
additional painting in the field is not specified then the entire defect surface
must be repaired or done repainting to obtain a perfect painting results. If

the equipments have not been painted from the manufacture, the
Contractor shall be responsible for such painting.
All frames, covers, cover plates and electric panel doors must be fully
given primer paint or prime coat and given a final paint coating (finishing
paint.) This final paint with the temporary color is specified "gray" unless it
is held a change of color. The determination of gray color type and brand
of paint in advance shall be asked approval of MK/the Planner. Painting is
done with the "stove ennameled" process for lamps, while for the electrical
panel must be made corrosion resistant by way of "galvanized cadmium
plating" or with "zinc chromatic primer" shall be painted with fuel paint.
m.Actual Installation Drawings

The Contractor must use well a complete set of drawings in the field where
it must be marked appropriate on the location of all types of panel/cabinet
outlet system, equipment, wiring and so on with dimensions taken from the
center column standard (as column). The Contractor must complete the
actual installation drawings ("as installed") of the installation. The
Contractor at the approach of delivery (2 weeks before delivery) must
submit a drawing "as-built drawing" stating the drawings such as those
installed for the delivery to the Planner/MK of 4 (four) sets of printed
drawings and 1 (one) set of tracing.
n. Testing
The Contractor shall perform all testing as described and must perform an
experiment as properly real operation of the entire system. The
equipments, materials and how to work the damaged / defective / wrong
equipments must be placed/corrected and the repeated experiment. All of
the cablings, installations of "keur" the Contractor shall be responsible to
gain approval of PLN for the installation of electricity network system and
all the costs shall be borne by the Contractor. The period of the electrical
equipment testing is 1x24 hour non-stop, the testing costs shall be borne
by the Contractor.
o. Spare parts data

Since the delivery of parts and equipments into the field, the Contractor
shall submit to MK a complete list of spare parts and submit for each parts
accompanied by a unit price list and addresses of suppliers and an
additional list of spare parts and supplies that are be normal shall be in
any purchase or spare parts mentioned in the specifications to be
furnished by the contractor at a cost of the Contractor.
p. Regulation Of Patent Right

The Contractor shall protect the Owner against all claims or demands,
costs and price increases due to any disaster, in connection with any trade
or production name, copyright, in all materials, equipments used in this
project.
q. Cleaness
The Contractor shall clean all dirt/trash and the unused waste materials as
the result of his work and must finish each part of the regularly and orderly
installation.
r. Built-In Insert, Sleeves And It’s Equipment

Complete inserts, sleeves and other equipment for the purpose of built-in
concrete or construction work.
s. Manual And Instructions Book

The Contractor must complete manual and maintenance book and manual
how to operate it, and the language of instruction for all parts of this
equipment must be in English and Indonesian.

t. Installation Completeness
In this technical specification and in the drawing for a system or a device
of electrical equipment is intended as a system that can operate well in
such a way so that if any part or component of the installation system that
is not mentioned in this technical specification as well as in the drawings,
then this means the Contractor must establish and ensure the system /
installation will work well.
u. Training
Educating the operator or persons designated by the owner to run, operate
the necessary testing and maintenance of installations. All these costs are
borne by the Contractor
5. EXTENT OF WORK
The work embraced by this specification covers the supply, installation,

testing, commissioning and maintenance of electrical services installation of
the building in accordance with this specification and associated drawings,
and without abrogating the more extensive details decrypted elsewhere in
the specification and drawings, includes the following
a. Electrical
Incoming electricity supply from the PLN substation to 20 KV
switchboard, power transformers, L.V. main switchboard, including
supply and installation of incoming cables to 20 KV switch board to PLN
requirement 20 KV main switchboards, 20 KV I 400 V power
transformers, LV. main switchboards.
Power cables, busbar chambers and feeders to points of local

distribution, cable trays, cable ladder, conduits, energy meters and all
other auxiliary equipment to complete the installation as shown on the
drawing.
Distribution boards, including all protection devices and switchgears.

Lighting installation, including fittings and all electrical accessories for all
areas including where specified to be supplied by others, but will be

installed by this contractor.
Small power installation, including all devices, isolating switches and the
like. Detection, control circuit and wiring for automatic operation of the
system.
1) Power supplies to air conditioning plant.

2) Power supplies to water pumps, Power Supplies to fire pumps.
3) Earthing installation including equipotential/supplementaly
bonding, complete with all tapes, test link and cross bonding
conductors.
Lightning protection system. Facilities required by PLN inside the
transformer rooms and M.V. cable ducts.
4) Painting of material and equipment
5) Testing and commissioning.
6) Liaison with PLN or all permits and final connections including
the submission of all forms and application. All arrangement fees to
be included.
7) Provision of spare parts.
8) Provision of twelve (12) months operational maintenance and
breakdown services, including the replacement of all failed lamps in
public areas.
9) Provision operation/maintenance manuals and as-fitted
drawings Remote control system.
6. DESCRIPTION OF EXTENT OF WORK

a. Site Location
The site is situated at the Makasar Industrial facility Indonesia it
comprises the construction of :
- General Site Plan
- Main Building
- Office
- Canteen
- Lockers
- Medical and pray room
- Trafo Building
- Potash and chemical room

- Boiler room
- Storage and Maintenance Building
- Pump room
- Weigh Bridge
- Guard house
- WWTP
b. Electrical
Source Power Supply shall be taken from PLN substation at Ground
Floor Site Plan. The Sub-contractor shall supply and install a 20 KV/630A
MV switchboard with load break switch SF-6 inside the Owner’s
transformer room to receive power from PLN substation Totally filled
transformer DYN5 2OKV/400V power transformers shall also be supplied
and installed by the Sub-contractor to distribute power to air conditioning
equipment, pumps etc.
Transformer Room The room shall house the 24 KV main switch board
cubicle and power transformers to receive power from PLN substation,
All installation works inside the room shall comply with PLN and all
relevant government Rule & Regulation
The location of all plant equipment shall be verified by the contractor on
site.
• Low voltage Main Switch room
Power from the transformers shall be delivered to the main switch room
cubicle via bus way/Tray & Ladder Power shall be distributed at
380v/3phase /50Hz to the entire building Cubicle switchboards complete
with switchgears, protective relays and instrument/metering facilities as
detailed in the Drawing/Specification shall be supplied and installed by
the Contractor Sub-switch rooms are located on each floor of area for the
distribution of power supply to the electrical equipment of the entire
building.
• Light Fittings Installation
All light fittings as shown on light fitting schedule shall be supplied and
installed by the Contractor c/w conduit and wirings.

Ground floor lobby and all outdoor/garden/external light fittings shall be

installed by Electrical Contractor c/w conduit and wirings.
Exit sign boards and staircase lighting shall be installed by the

Contractor c/w self contained Ni-cad batteries for 2 hours operations and
ancillary components and associated wiring for the proper operations of
the fittings
Lighting in plant rooms, such as transformer room, pump rooms fan

rooms, toilets etc. Adm. Building, shall be controlled by local switches.
Staircase lights shall be switched on all at times. Lighting for exit’ signs
shall not be controlled by any switch other than the MOB.
All cabling in Building areas shall be PVC/PVC cable attached to

messenger wires. Conduit are required.
• Earthing system
A complete earthing system shall be provided to comply with the PLN

Rules and the 15 th Edition of EE Regulations.
All main earthing tapes shall be connected to the main switchboards and
then connected to the earthing electrodes located on B1FL in
accordance with the Drawings.
The contractor shall be responsible to carry out all the equipotential

bonding to extraneous and exposed conductive parts in compliance with,
the 15 th Edition of lEEE Wiring Regulations.
Bounding should be done using cad weld.
Separate earthing system shall be provided for:
• 20 KV systems
• LV system
• Transformer neutral
• Electronic (telephone, fire alarm, sound system etc).
• Lightning protection system

Lightning Protection System
The Contractor shall supply and install complete lightning protection

system complete with perfector on top roof and coaxial down conductor
connecting to the earthing electrode located at ground Floor in
accordance with the Drawings.
Facilities Required by PLN
The sub-contractor shall be responsible for the complete electrical fitting
out works inside the PLN’s requirements.
Application of Meters
The sub-contractor shall fill in all details, submit the forms to the power
compan~,’ and arrange for subsequent testing and meter connection.
7. WORK BY MAIN CONTRACTOR
a All concrete equipment plinths and concrete piers in plant rooms, keyed
to the floor slabs and graded where required. Plinths and concrete
supports shall have shapes and dimension as indicated on detailed
drawings to be provided by the Electrical Contractor.
b The building in off all sleeves and equipment holding down bolts, where
required to be built in during construction. The Electrical Contractor shall
supply all bolts and sleeves, and detailed Drawings accurately
positioning such items
c All cutting, patching framing up, furring in, chasing and making good
associated with the building construction for the passage of ductworks,
pipes, conduits etc.
Detailed and drawings shall be provided by this Electrical Contractor
d Trimmed opening in suspended ceilings for light fittings.

e Provision of access openings to service equipment installed by Electrical

Contractors.
f Sealing and waterproofing Utility Company’s cable entry ducts.
g Temporary lighting and power for construction and testing purposes
h Provision of earth pits and PVC ducting for earthing and lightning
protection system etc. as indicating on the tender.
8. REGULATIONS
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein pertaining to this

installation, it shall be the subcontractors responsibility top ensure all the
works is in strict accordance with the following statutory obligation,
regulation and specification together with any amendments made thereto
a British Standards Insulation or other approved international standards

b 15 th Edition of LEE. Wiring regulation including latest amendments
published by the Institution of Electrical Engineer, u.k.
c Supply Rules and Regulation of PLN
d Latest Local Fire Safety Department (F.S.D.) regulation and code of
practice
e The Telkom Regulation
f Regulation of the Local telecommunication authority of Indonesia
g Any other local authority having jurisdiction
9. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
a. MEDIUM VOLTAGE MAIN PANEL (20kV)
1)General
Medium Voltage Main Panel (PUTM) or medium voltage switchgear is a
partner in and placed in the building. The switchgear must be metal
enclosed, prefabricated.
The switchgears that strung which will be called Panel

Circuit is composed of compartments or units. The circuit panel and its

components must be able to meet operating conditions for hot and humid
tropical climate area.
2) Standard
Switchgear shall be designed and fabricated according to the
requirements set forth in the last edition IEC’s recommendation and the
corresponding added with the possible application of the following
standards:
• NFC Standard
• VDE/DIN Standard
• British Standard
• NEMA Standard
And the edition mentioned in this specification. The equipment that meets
the other regulatory standards, which guarantees the same quality or
better than the standards in this specification, will also be accepted.
3) Climate Conditions
 Geography: equator
 Height: less than 1000 meters above sea level
 Atmosphere: humidity 80% - 100%
 Temperature:
- Browse temperature: 16OC - 40oC
- The average temperature in 1 year: 270C
- The average temperature in 1 day: 350C
4)Electrical Characteristics of Medium Voltage

• Identifier voltage 24 kV
• Service voltage 20 kV
• Identifier frequency 50 Hz
• Endurance voltage of impulse standards, dried (peak) 125 kV
• Power endurance frequency voltage in 1 minute, dried 50 kV

(rms)
• Endurance voltage on isolation distance to edge:
- Impulse voltage (peak) 145 kV
- Voltage at 1 minute power frequency 60 kV
• Busbar normal flow 630 A
• Endurance flow of short circuit 1 second ≥ 14.5
kA
• Maximum ground fault flow for 1 second 1 kA
• Test voltage to auxiliary circuits 2 kV
• Switching surge voltage on power breaker switch shall be
in accordance for transformers with oil cooler (without
arrester) at 125kV BIL
5) Design And Composition

Circuit For Panel Design
a. Construction
Circuit panel for medium voltage must consist of compartments which
are fully enclosed in metal enclosures including closing of the base.
Panel of circuit for in the fabrication of steel plate and consists of
cubicles which can be exchange-switch its position.
Cubicles which can be exchange-switch must have the dimension
standards and can be combined easily.
Steel plate used to the panel construction must be perfectly flat and has
a thickness of not less than 1.5 mm.
Enclosures and insulation must be made strong so that the mechanical
impact of 2 Joules (equivalent to a ball weighing 0.5 kg falling from a
height of 0.4 m) did not result in ineffectiveness of controlgear or modify
a specified degree of protection or reduce creepage distances or
clearances distances under the specified value.
b. Degree of Protection

The degree of protection or the protection of humans against the

dangers is adjacent with the voltage parts and moving parts must have
IP2X for enclosures and IP2X for the separating wall/partition.
An object with a diameter of 2.5 mm should not be entered into the circuit
for panel. This is for security against the entry of small animals into the
compartment.
c. Access to Compartments
1) Switchgear Compartment
This compartments meet the connection of cables, isolators, load
break switch (LBS), power breaker switch (CB), earthing switch, fuses
switch, measuring transformer and relays. Access to equipment
installed in this compartments is by way of opening the door or lid.
Access partially or completely into the switchgear compartment by the
operator shall be possible only if all the equipments that is connected
to the circuit outside the compartment.
Type of mechanical interlock must prohibit access to the switchgear
compartment if the conditions are not fulfilled:
• Switches (LBS, DS, etc.) on open positions/out
• grounding switch in the closed/in position
• Any conductive parts that are beyond the compartment is in the
event of grounding
Closing the door or cover is not possible to be done except grounding
switch in the entry/closed position.
However, the grounding switch must allow to be opened while the
door in an open condition.
2) Busbar Compartment
Closing and sealing of this compartment is securely installed and
cannot be opened unless the use of equipment (for example
tightening with hexagon-headed screw).

Modification or replacement of parts on the busbar requires that the

entire Circuit For Panel in the condition of "switch of."
d. Operator Safety Against Internal Disturbances

Internal disturbances in the compartment that may occur such as a
bow to the ground, breaking operation that does not work, the arc at a
distance of end isolation to end, shall not exist due to the operator
who was in front of the switchgear.
All arrangements for the construction to avoid any risks must be
taken into account.
The test of types must be performed to prove the efficiency of the
settings.
e. Control levers
The control lever for separator switch/ circuit breaker will be preferred
if on the top position when the switch is in position "closed" and the
low position when the switch is in a position to "open".
Energy required by the operator to operate the lever must not exceed
250N.
The direction of rotation of the crank shall be such a way as to not
stuck to the wall or to the opened door of the adjacent compartment.
The position of all the separation equipments/breaker shall be clearly
and automatically shown in the mimic diagram which must be
contained on the face of cubicles.
f. Control Mechanism
Control mechanism to separator switch/breaker, must be independent
manual operations type.
The operation of the separator switch/breaker must be done without
entering the switchgear compartment.

The components in the control mechanism or locking equipment and

components associated with it, are designed and constructed so as to
provide a safety 3 factor in relation to permanent deformation or
rupture of transmission (depending on material) in the unlike preferred
condition of a style 250 N which is applied to the crank / control lever.
Interlocking equipment must have a higher safety factor than control
mechanisms.
The position of separation equipment/breaker including insulation, must

be seen with one of the followings:
• Edge contacts moving in open position allows to be seen through
"translucent window" available in front of the enclosure / cubicle door
• Partition that can be seen clearly, can inserted between fixed
contacts and moving contacts
• Separation by the way of equipment is pulled out
• Opening contacts is shown by a pointer to their each joint pole,
depending on its construction
• Equipment of this pointer must be connected directly to contacts
which move with tight relationship so that it cannot be changed its
adjustment.
g. Information Label
Information plate indicating the function of the equipment contained in
the various compartments is installed in front of switchgear panels.
Information that indicates the open / close position and direction of
rotation for the CB, LBS, DS open/close operation and earthing
switches must be placed adjacent to the respective switches
concerned so that it is easily known by the operator.

Plates of information must be written in Indonesian.

Identification plates measuring 110 x 40 mm are installed with screws
in front of each cubicle.
h. Dimension
Minimum overall dimensions of a unit load breaker switch (LBS) are:
• High (Height) : 1600 mm
• Depth (Depth) : 1,000 mm
• Width (Width) : 500 mm
"Lifting lugs" that can be removed for cubicles following facility, must
be provided and installed on top of each cubicle.
i. Painting and Corrosion Protection

the Circuit For Panel as a whole must have a construction that is
designed for use in hot areas with a humid tropical climate, must also
be provided anti "condensation heater" on each cubicle with no more
than 50W power, but able to guarantee in terms of overcoming
humidity problems.
The execution of all steel plates used must be careful in the protection
against corrosion and painted prior to assembly.
Enclosures, coverings and separators wall, must be coated twice on
the final painting.
Methods of protection against corrosion and painting proposed, must
be described in the bidding.
Nuts and bolts used in the construction, must be in accordance with
ISO Standard (metric) and must be in the protection against rust.
j. Isolation Medium / Termination of Arc of Fire

Isolation Medium / termination of the arc of fire must be of type of SF6

gas both for circuit breaker switch (CB) and Breaker Switches Load
(LBS).
6) 20 KV Cubicle Specifications
a. Incoming Unit Load Break Switches
 1 set of 630 A busbar
 1 LBS three-pole 24 KV with manual control:
1. Identifier flow 630 A
- Endurance flow of a short time of 1 second ≥ 14.5kA
- Capacity of Entry 31.5 kA
- The main active load breaking capacity 630 A
(Power factor = 0.7)
2. Charging Cable breaking capacity 25 A

 1 three-pole earthing switch with manual control
 3 voltage control equipment with fluorescent lamps as voltage
indicator
 Room and holder / cable clamps must be provided at the bottom
of the cubicle for the installation of three single-core terminals,
for medium voltage cables which are in isolation with solid
dielectric material
b Unit Voltage Transformer Type
 1 set 400A busbars
- Identifier flow 100A
- Endurance flow of a short time of 1 second ... ≥ 14.5 kA
- Top endurance flow... .. 31.5 kA
- 3 HRC Fuses (high-breaker capacity)
- Identifier flow 6.3 A
- Termination capacity ≥ 14.5 kA
 3 voltage Transformers

Ratio 15.000-20.000/100 V
S3 S3
Identifier burden 30-50 VA
Class of accuracy 0.5 (IEC 186)
 3 TR Fuses for the phase and one link for secondary circuit
neutral. The fuse is placed in a cover
c. Unit Outgoing Load Break Switches
 1 set 630A busbars
- Identifier flow... ... ... 630A
- Endurance flow short circuit time of 1 second... ≥ 14.5 kA
- Capacity of Entry ... . 31.5 kA
- The main active load breaking capacity ... ... 630A
(Power factor = 0.7)
- The breaking capacity of the cable charging 25A
 1 three-pole earthing switch with manual control

 3 HRC Fuses (high- breaker capacity)
7) Shop drawing
The Contractor is required to submit shop drawings as listed below for
approval before the panel in the fabrication:
a) Drawing of layout and elevation
b) Bill of Material
c) Wiring diagram
d) Details layout of the components within the panel
e) electrical characteristics of components
8) Medium Voltage Panel Room

The Contractor is required to provide the following equipment / fixtures in
medium voltage panel room:
a) Rubber Mats

The Contractor is required to provide and install the rubber mat with
a size of 1000mm (width) and 6mm (thick). The length is adjusted to
the length of medium voltage panels.
b) Diagram of One Electric Systems Line
The contractor must provide drawings of Diagram of One Electric
Systems Line installed on glass frame and hang on the walls of the
room. The drawing of the diagram must be sized approximately
1000mm x 800mm.
c) Danger Signs
The Contractor is required to provide a "Hazard Sign" TM panels
room and the room entrance.
B. DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER
1. GENERAL
a) The scope of work of the contractor is a procurement,
manufacturer, factory testing, delivery, installation, testing on site
and commissioning for 20/0.4kV distribution transformers with
capacities as shown in the drawing .
b) The distribution transformer is to use copper windings (copper), oil
immersed type with Class A isolation system with natural cooling.
c) The transformer is used for this type of partner indoor.
2 STANDARD AND REFERENCE

a) The transformer must be designed, manufactured according to the
following standards:
- IEC 60076-1 to 60076-5: power transformers
b) The production standard must be in accordance with ISO 9001
quality standards and environmental standards (environment
friendly), ISO 14001 and also has a test certificate from an

international independent agency for materials, construction and

processing method.
3. DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMER DATA

Type : Oil Immersed Transformer
Number of phase :3
Frequency : 50 Hz
High voltage of system : 24 kV
Voltage without load : 20 kV/400 - 230 V
impulse endurance voltage : 125 kV
Type of cooling : ONAN
Around temperature : 35 °C
Maximum Temperature of Winding : 65 °C
The maximum temperature of : 60 °C
cooling oil (hermetically sealed)
isolation Class : Class A
Insulation Material : Oil / full charge
The short circuit condition of the : 12.5 kV
system
Power : as indicated in the drawings
Vector group : Dyn 5/adjusted with local PLN
Type : Sitting, couples in
 Voltage Adjustment by tap : ± 2.5%, ± 5%
changer
 Applied voltage test : 50 kV
 Sound level : ± 50 dB (A)
 Protection : - Winding temperature
sensor (solid state type)
equipped with a warning
indication (warning) and the
shunt trip in the PUTM panel
side.
- Auxiliary contacts integrated
into the BAS system
C. MAIN PANEL OF LOW VOLTAGE (PUTR) / LVMDP

1 GENERAL

The main distribution panel must be as indicated on drawings, unless

otherwise appointed. The entire assembly including housings, busbar,
protective equipments must be planned, built, tested and where
necessary repaired in accordance with the requirements. The main
distribution panel must be of the type in door type made of steel plate a
minimum thickness of 2 mm and made in accordance with the IEC 439-
1 standard.
Segregation Form of Main Panel of Low Voltage must be a minimum
Incoming Form 3 and outgoing Form 2B in accordance with the IEC
439-1 standard.
The Construction must be made of a rigid structure steel frame, which
can retain its structure by mechanical strees at the time of short circuit.
This framework is completely wrapped in the bottom, top and sides with
cover plates must be sufficiently louvers for ventilation where necessary
to overcome the temperature increase of the parts that drain flow and
voltage parts in accordance with the PUIL-2000 CML / IEC 439
requirements for the covered equipment. Voltage materials must be
prevented perfectly to the possibility of splashing water. All the metering
and transfer buttons required must be grouped to a panel board hinged
which is hidden.
2 SHOP DRAWING
Before fabrication, the Contractor is required to submit shopdrawing for
approval of MK / the Planner Consultant. The working drawings or shop
drawings to be submitted shall include detailed drawings such as:
 layout,
 elevations,
 sections,
 detailed
 schematic wiring diagrams.
3 CABINET
All cabinets must be made of steel plate with minimum thickness of 2
mm, or made of other materials such as polyester or Bakelite. The
Cabinet to "panel board" has the proportional size as required for the
panel board, which the amount is in accordance with the size of the the
planner drawing or by requirements so that for the number and size of
wire used is not too full / solid. The frame / framework of the panel
must grounded to the cabinet must be any good ways to install, support
and set the "panel board" and the lid. The cabinet with wires of "trough
feeders" must be arranged in such a way so that there is a channel
with a width of not less than 10 cm for branch circuit panel board. Each
cabinet shall be equipped with keys. For one cabinet shall be provided
2 (two) pieces of keys, with master key systems.
The high of panels must not exceed 2200mm.
4 BUSBAR / RAIL
Busbar must be of copper material which its outside layer is coated
with a layer of tin (tin plated) with a size in accordance with flow
capability of 150% of load flow installed which its size is adjusted to the
PUIL rules (list no. 630-DI-D4/PUIL-2000). All busbars / rails must be
painted and held by a strong and well isolator material into the
framework of the panel. All busbar / rails must be painted with colors
that match mentioned in PUIL. Paints must be resistant to a
temperature of 75 °C.
Busbar is prepared and held by insulator very well to system 3 , 4
wires as indicated in the drawing. Each panel must have an isolated
neutral bus to ground and a bare grounding bus clamped firmly on the

frame and panel completed clamps for grounding of panels needs to be

grounded max 2.
The drawings of implementation (shop drawings) must indicate the
measures of the buses and its composition. The size of the buses must
be a measure along the panel and have been provided the means for
connecting in the future.
5. PANEL COMPONENTS
a) Air Circuit Breaker Motor Operated
- Current Rating : in accordance with planner’s
drawings
- Insulation Rating : 750 V AC, Voltage rating: 380
V, 50 Hz, 4 P
- Rated Breaking Capacity : in accordance with the
planner’s drawings
-Relay Thermic and magnetic over
current release, under voltage
releases, Auxiliary contact block
(2 NO +1 NC).
-Drive : Motor, 220 V, 50 Hz.
b) molded Case Circuit Breaker

- Insulation Rating : 380 V
- Equipped with Thermal release and
electromagnetic over current
release
- In Current Rating In accordance with the planning
drawings
- Rated Breaking Cap : Minimum 25 kA
c) Current Transformer
- Insulation Rating : 600 Volt
-Class : 1.5
- I Therm : 60 x In
- Rated secondary current :5A
- Rated load cap : 10 VA
d) Rotary Switch (On-Off Cam Switch)

- Rated Voltage : 500 V ZC
-Rated maximum current : 63 A
- Total pole :4
Installation at the "base plate"
e) Digital Meters (in LVMDP)

1. All setup parameters required by the Power Meter will be stored
in Batteries memory and maintained in the event of termination /
shutdown of supply the control system.
2. Accumulated Energy, Peak Demand, Minimum and Maximum,
and the length of time used are stored in batteries memory and
retained in the event of termination / shutdown of supply to the
control system.
3. Power Meters must be applied in 3 phase 3 wire system, 3
phase 4 wire and 1 phase.
4. Power Meters must be able to be applied without modification to
the nominal frequency of 45-65 Hz.
5. Component Measured
Power Meter must be able to display readings of the RMS value
of the system measurement as follows:
i) Reading Real-Time
• Flow (per-phase, N (counted), 3-phase
average)
• Voltage (per-phase, 3-phase average, L-N-per-
phase, LN 3 phase average)
• the actual power (per-phase, 3-phase total)*
• Reactive Power (per-phase, 3-phase total)*
• Pseudo Power (per-phase, 3-phase total)
• Power factor (3-phase total)
• Frequency
• THD (per-phase, current and voltage)
ii) Energy Consumption Readings
• Accumulated Energy (kWh actual power, kVarh
reactive power, kVAh apparent power)
iii) Demand Reading

• Calculation of demand flow (per-phase):
(a) The time is now
(b) The peak time
• Calculation of the actual power demand (3-
phase total):
(a) The time is now
(b) The peak time
iv) The calculation of reactive power demand (3-phase
total):
(a) The time is now
(b) The peak time
v) The calculation of apparent power demand (3-phase
total):
(a) The time is now
(b) The peak time
vi) Value of Power Analysis
(a) THD - Voltage (per-phase, L - L, L - N)
(b) THD - Flow (per-phase, neutral)
(c) Appointment of the power factor (3-phase)
vii) Usage Time
Power Meter must indicate the time when the device
has been located in the service, the appointment in
hours and minutes
• kW, kVAR, kWh and kVARh will show the true

value (net) of the use of energy consumption.
6. Equipped with Modbus and Profibus communications and must
be integrated with BAS systems
f) Ampere Meter
-Class : 1.5
- Over load cap : 1.2 x In Continue
- Size : 90 x 90 mm
- Scale : 0-3000 A
- Type :Moving Iron, for AC
measurements
- Accuracy : ±1.5% for AC measurements
g) Volt Meter
-Class : 1.5
- Over load cap : 1.2 x In Continue
- Size : 90 x 90 mm
- Scale : 0 - 500 A
- Accuracy : ±1.5% for AC measurements
h) kWH - Meters
- Rated voltage : 3 x 380 Volt
-Ratedcurrent transformers output : 5 A
- Ocuracy class : 2.0
-Baseplate of moulded
plastic
- The register : 6 (six) cipher rollers
measurement double
i) Indicator Lights
Tubular lamp, 5-watt incandescent, 54 mm diameter
Color: Red, yellow, blue
j) Push Button
Panel mounting, double on-1, off-0. All push buttons are equipped
with indicator lamps to indicate system in the on or off.
k) Relays

For LVMDP panels, circuit breaker for Main feeder, it is equipped

with OL protective relays (over load), SC (short circuit) and UV
(under voltage). As for the generator, it is equipped with a OL, SC,
UV, EF relay (Earth Fould) and RP (Reverse Power).
l) Selector Switch
From the type of rotary switches, for switching. Rated voltage 380
Volt AC insulation 660 V.
6. DISTRIBUTION PANEL
a) Panel Construction
• Power and lighting Panels completed with all the components
that must exist as shown in the drawing . The panels intended
to operate on 220/380V, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz and direct
grounding and must be made to follow PUIL, IEC, VDE / DIN,
BS, NEMA standard and so forth.
• The panels shall be constructed of 2 mm thick iron plate with
iron frame and must be entirely in zinchromate and in duco 2
times and must be painted with fuels paint, color and the paint
will be determined later by the Owner or MK / Planner. Door
panels shall be equipped with a master key.
• The construction in the panels and the location of the
components and so on must be arranged in such a way so that
improvements, switching on the component can easily be
implemented without disturbing the other components.
• The size of each panel unit must be adapted to circumstances
and needs and has been approved by MK / Planners.
• Body of panels must be properly grounded
b) Panel components:
1. Accessories

Busbars, terminals, selector switches, contactors, timers,

indicating lights and other equipment must be made in
factories and qualified and installed in the strong panel and
there should be no part that vibrates.
2. Busbar
Each panel must have 5 busbar copper consisting of 3 busbar
of RST phase, 1 neutral busbar and 1 busbar for grounding.
The amount of busbar must be reckoned with large current
flowing in the busbar without causing the increase in
temperature greater than 70 °C.
Each copper busbar must be colored according to the rules of
PLN, where the busbar color layer must be resistant to heat
that arise.
Busbar is pure copper rod with a minimum of 98%
conductivities. Ampere rating is based on the drawing .
Busbar shall be painted in accordance with color code in PUIL
as follows:
• Phase : Red, Yellow and Black
• Neutral : Blue
• Ground : Green / Yellow
3. Circuit breakers
• Circuit breakers for lighting and outlet may use the
MCB with a breaking capacity of at least 6 kA symmetrical.
• others Circuit breaker must be of MCCB type, in
accordance with given the plan drawing in the breaking
capacity of at least 10 kA symmetrical.
• Circuit breaker shall be of automatic trip type with a
combination of thermal and magnetic instantaneous unit

• Main Circuit Breaker of each emergency panel shall

be completed a shunt trip terminal.
4. Metering
Using the Digital Meter equivalent "Socomec" Diris E53 with
the following specifications:
• Contacted through current transformer
• Readings total and partial kWH
• Reading total and partial kVARh
• Reading of the active power / reactive instantaneous
(momentary)
• Refer to Class 1IEC 62053-21
• Indication if there occurred wrong connection
• Reading of the number of current and voltage
• Readings power factor in 4 kwadrant
• Readings 4 rate management via RS485
communication (Modbus and Profibus and Ethernet
communication.)
a) The Panel shall be constructed of galvanized steel plate of 2 mm
thick plate, folds and angle plate forms through a mechanical
process.
b) The components of the lighting panel:
1) Molded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB)
Voltage Rating : 380 V, 50 Hz
Type : Compact
Breaking Cap. : 18 kA
2) Contactor
Current Rating : in accordance with drawings
Voltage Rating : 380 V, 50 Hz
Pole : 3 poles
3) Miniature Circuit Breaker
Rated voltage : 220 V, 50 Hz

Rated voltage : 220 V, 50 Hz
Type : have "Instantaneous tripping value" 12 x In
D. CABLE
1) 20 kV Cables
a) General
Medium voltage cable that is used is single-core and multi-core
cables with isolation of "Cross Polythylen" from the outside copper
protective with PVC coating on the outside.
The working voltage is 12/20 kV.
The cable will be planted directly in the ground at a minimum depth
of 0.8 m or according to the requirements in PUIL 1987 and in the
pipe at the building entrance, or held in the trench cable provided.
The ability to do this cable current at ground temperatures is about
300C cm/w, at least:
Cross-section (m²) Ability (A)
95 260
The maximum temperature of cable in the load state should not

exceed 90°C. At the time of offer must be also included the ability
to do the cable current for a short time of 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1 second.
The maximum temperature of cables for this short circuit current
does not exceed 250°C. The cable is delivered in drum rolls of 300
m. Drums are not refundable.
The characteristics of electrical systems served are:
• Total phases :3
• Frequency : 50 Hz
• High voltage : 24 kV
• Impulse endurance Voltage : 125 kV,
• Short circuit conditions: 13.6 kA

• the temperature around average: 35°C
b) Construction
- Core Composition
Each conductor must be made of pure copper in accordance
with the requirements of IEC publication No. 228. Wire cross
section must be perfectly round.
- Core Protective Layers
The conductor protective layer that must be placed between the
conductor with a layer of insulation must be made of nonmetallic
materials and is a semi-conductive material with a thickness of
5% of the thickness of insulation material.
- Isolation
This ground cable insulation material must be polyethylene that
is in "cross linked", must be homogeneous.
2) Low Voltage Cable (NYY, NYFGbY, NYM)

a) General
This specification describes the requirements for low voltage
cables that must meet the requirements of the ability to flow at a
temperature of 35°C, maximum temperature of the cable in a state
of load should not exceed 70°C and maximum temperature of the
cables for short circuit current should not exceed 250°C.
b) Construction
The cable shall consist of:
- Two or four conductor made of twisted copper wire or
"compacted" copper which was twisted.
- PVC material insulation layer on each conductor phase and
neutral conductive.

- The waterproof settling layer is surrounded by the phase

conductor veins and space filler between the phase wires.
- The second settling layer is outside the settling layer above.
- The protector of the material ribbon settling on the second
settling layer in accordance with the requirements of IEC
(NYFGbY).
- Outside the protective coating of steel pipes is given a plastic
layer as a protective.
The cable cross-section used is:
 6 mm ²  10 mm ²  16 mm ²  25 mm ²  35 mm ²  150 mm ²
 50 mm ²  70 mm ²  95 mm ²  240 mm ²  120 mm ²  185 mm ²
c) Marking/Color
The surface cable color as signs for each wire are:
Phase: Red
Yellow
Black
Neutral: Blue
3) Fire Resistance Cable

a) FRC Cable must have the ISO 9001 quality standards and ISO
14001 environmental standards of independent agency that is
recognized worldwide.
b) The construction of the manufacture of fire resistant cables shall be
in accordance with IEC 60331 standard (750ºC 3 hours) and
BS6387 paint CWZ with 600/1000 volts voltage capability.
c) The copper conductor must be hard drawn with type stranded
annealed copper wire.
d) The cable insulation is XLPE/PVC (double insulation), non-toxic
nature and LSOH (Low Smoke Zero Halogen) when burned.

e) Fire proof layer thickness is minimum 0.14 mm, where the fire-
proof layer coating is wrapped with longitudinal system along the
cable, not with overlapping systems for at the time of the fire the
fire did not spread fast.
f) The flow conductivity power of FRC cable is based on the ambient
temperatures of 40ºC.
g) For the multi-core cable then between the cables must have filler
(filler) that are not spreading fire.
E. FIRE STOP MATERIAL

1) STANDARD
BS 476-4, 1970
2) TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Fire Stop Materials are used to protect cables or prevent the spread of
fire through electrical cables and pipelines in the area of shaft and
aperture wall.
Fire Stop Material Systems planned has the following material
requirements:
- be flexible and easily disassembled at the time of the addition or
replacement of the new cable.
- No material properties which will remove dust.
- Resistant to vibration and not easily cracked.
- Non-toxic and odorless.
- Heat resistant up to 10000C
- No action or absorb water.
- Installation can be used in damp areas.
- Equipped with ROCK WOOL panels, raw density  140 kg/m 3 and
meets BS 476 Part: 4-1970, Temperature Fire max. 750 0C, the
resilience of fiber melting point is 10000C.
- Equipped with HISEAL.
Covered and must be installed within the scope of work of Fire Stop
System of these materials, including:
a. Procurement and installation of fire stop materials, among others:
spaces of shafts and holes of Electrical sparing that exist at each
floor.
b. Installation and supervision are carried out by skilled personnel or
experienced experts from the factory.
c. Installation of Fire Stop Materials in Electrical shaft is made as
much as possible 2 (two) layers used in the Electrical shaft, the
thickness of the first layer is minimum 2 mm and so on.
F. CABLE TRAY
1) Hot dipped galvanized is accordance with BS 729 or colors powder
coating
2) Cable tray is perforated and is made from 2mm thick steel plate
(mild steel sheet)
3) Support / buffer of cacle tray must be installed every 1200mm and
150mm from each corner, a fork or riser
4) Cable trays must be grounded
G. CABLE LADDER
1) Factory standard, heavy duty type
2) Hot dipped galvanized
3) All components and auxiliary equipments must be manufacturer
standard and from the same manufacturer
4) Installation of cable ladder including cable clamps must be able to
sustain minimum of two times the weight of the cable attached
5) Cable ladder must be grounded
6) Cable Trays (hot dipped galvanized + colors powder coating)

H. INSTALLATION MATERIAL
1) The installation equipment in question is the materials to complete
the installation in order to obtain results that meet the requirements,
reliability and easy maintenance.
2) All cable clamps used must be made of manufacturer.
3) All cable connections must be made in the junction box / doos, the
cable must be the same color.
4) Juction boxes / doos that are used must be large enough and
equipped with a safety cap.
5) Boxes and switches to be installed on the wall of a brick wall is the
type of installation of entry / inbow (flush mounting).
6) Regular sockets (inbow) installed has 10A and 16A rating and follow
the VDE, 2Pin + E standards, while special sockets for indoor AC
split has 13A rating, 3 Pin standard BS.
7) Flush-box (inbow doos) to place switch, wall socket and push button
must be used of the type of blakely or metal material.
8) Wall boxes installed are 300 mm from the surface of the floor unless
otherwise determined by the Interior and the wet/damp spaces must
be water tight type (WP) while for the switch it is installed 1.500 mm
from the surface of the floor or in accordance with the drawing
9) The installation conduit of lighting and socket used is of the type of
PVC High Impact where the diameter in of the conduit is minimum
of 1.5 times of the diameter in (19 mm) or stated otherwise in the
drawing.
I. CAPACITOR BANK
1) The capacitor must follow the IEC 60831 standards, tests type is
carried out in accordance with the temperature of the D category
(maximum 55 ºC).

2) The unit capacitor is a three-phase and dry type and is designed

to operate at a nominal frequency of 50Hz.
3) The capacitor must be installed in the metal cabinet where all
the elements and wiring in it is connected to 3 phase termination
and a termination for grounding.
4) All elements in the capacitor are surrounded by non-toxic
materials, inorganic, inert and fire resistant which absorb the
energy produced or to extinguish the fire.
5) The capacitors must be installed in a cabinet made of material
that is not flammable.
6) The capacitors shall be equipped with a discharge resistor and
an internal fuse to prevent a damaging explosion.
7) Each capacitor must be equipped with the means to discharge
the capacitor unit in 1 minute to 50 volts or less, from the initial
peak voltage of the square root of 2 times the value of the
capacitor voltage after the capacitor is disconnected from the
supply source as mentioned on the IEC 831-1 & 2 standard.
Discharge circuit must be connected to the terminals of each
capacitor unit.
8) The capacity of capacitor bank is listed on the planning
drawings.
9) Losses of capacitor unit must be less than 0.2W per kVAR or
0.5W per kVAR including with the discharge of resistor.
10)The capacitor unit shall be designed to have a "self-healing
properties", which combines high-quality film polypropylene as
dielectric vapor-coated with a layer of special metal.
11)Each capacitor unit shall be provided with nameplate or label
containing among others, rating data, the manufacturer's name,
year of manufacture and other relevant information as specified
in IEC 60 831.

12)The capacitor banks must be equipped with detuned reactor

filter with the following specifications:
 Type: Dry, Self Cool
 Capacitor rating: 40kVAR and 80kVAR
 Voltage System: 400 Volts
 Capacitor Voltage: 525 Volts
 The reactor will be designed according to the basic system
harmonic currents of 5th, 7th, 11th, and 13th orders, as follows:
I5 = 50%
I7 = 25%
I11 = 12.5%
I13 = 1.25%
 Inductance tolerance: 3% at rated effective current (leff)
 Inductance linearity: 1.2 leff with L 0.95Ln
 Insulation class: F class (155 C) suitable for ambient
temperatures 40 C (others on request)
 Impregnation: Completed units are impregnated under vacuum
with over pressure and dried in oven chamber.
 Standard: Designed & Tested Comply with IEC-289
Power Factor Controller (PFC)

Power Factor Controller must be of the type of microprocessor and can
be operated either manually or automatically.
PFC must have the following characteristics and functions:
a) measurements : - Active power (kW), Apparent power
(kVA), Reactive Power (kVAR),
Voltage (V), Current (A),
Temperatures, THDV%, THDI%,
Frequency, Voltage harmonics U2
up to 49 and Current harmonics I2
up to I49.
b) Parameter : - Manual programming on PF, c/k,
programming switching delay time, operating
sequence, number of output
- Automatic programming on C/K,
current transformer connection &
automatic adaptation to phase
rotation
c) Operating : - Circular
sequence - Selectable sequence 1:1:1: ..., 1:2:2:
..., 1:2:4: ... and any other customer
programmable sequence
d) Safety protection : - Automatic disconnection of all
capacitor when power outage
- Automatic disconnection of all
capacitor when high temperature
capacitor when over voltage and
under voltage
capacitor when over THDV%.
e) Alarm : - Alarm contacts and LED when not
achieving targets PF when all
capacitors are switched on in a
period of time
- Alarm contacts and LED when over
temperature
f) Switching delay time : - Switching delay time programmable
g) Saving function : - All programs and parameters saving
when power outage and insensitive
to harmonics
h) Mounting position : - Vertical mounting panel
i) Communication : - Modbus

J. FIXTURES AND ARMATURE

1) FLUORESCENT LAMP ARMATURE
a) Armature 3xTL8-18 Watt, complete recessed mounting of M5
Louvre reflector and Prismatic diffuser.
- Housing : 0.7 mm iron plate material, the making must be with
the machine, built-in lamp equipment.
- All electrical components are in a home / housing (built in).
The home construction must be strong and sturdy and made in
such a way as to easily be opened / removed for repair /
replacement of components within it. All housing must be coated
with a base paint, and given final layer of white paint. Painting is
done by way of "stove enamelled / bake enamelled" (fuel paint).
All of the armatures must be complete with a frame of holder /
hanger.
b) Armature 2xTL8-36Watt, Open Type / TKO
 Armature is a kind of open type.
 All equipments and armature processing such as
specifications point a) above.
c) Armature 1xTL8-36Watt, Open Type / Balk.
 All equipments and armature processing such as
specifications point a) above.
2) LAMP / TUBE / BULB FLUORESCENT

a) TL8-36Watt Fluorescent Lamp
 Fluorescent gas discharge tube type lamps, white color "840.
 Minimum output lumen of 3350 lumens (after 100 hours of
flame).
 Lifetime 2700 hours
b) TL8-18Watt Fluorescent Lamp
 Fluorescent gas discharge tube type lamps, white color "840.

 Lumen output is minimum 1350 lumens (after 100 hours of
flame).
 Lifetime 1250 hours
3) TL LAMP COMPONENTS
a) Ballast
 Non-dimmable electronic ballasts
 Dimmable electronic ballasts.
Must be leak proof, has a lower working temperature, less
noise, low loss. For 2 (two) lamps it is arranged/used "twin-
lamp ballasts" 2 (two) ballast (anti stroboscopic).
Ballast shall be equipped with terminals connection.
b) Lamp Holder and Starter Holder
Lamp holders and starter holders are of white plastic material,
unobtrusive and touchproof. Lamp holders and starter holders of
contact vibration queue. Rating lock lamp holder type, with or
without starter socket adapted to home used.
c) Starter
Starter for fluorescent lamp has reliability. It is made from high
quality white polycarbonate. Rating starter is adjusted with
fluorescent lights rating.
d) Capacitor
As compensation for losses on the lights and get cos  0.95.
e) In all lighting fixtures must be made nuts and bolts as a grounding
terminal place (grounding)
4) SQUARE BERETS LAMP

Lamp house consists of 0.7 mm thick steel plate with the lid of a heat
resistant Acrylic material and has not changed the color of the light edge
using rubber to ensure impermeable.
 Power : 20 Watt / 220 V, 50 Hz
 Type : Square Round TL
5) WASHTAFEL LIGHTS
Grounding system implemented must be based on prevailing standards
and codes, among others:
 Power : 1 x 20 Watt, 220 V
 Type : complete square of heat-resistant acrylic cover and
do not change color. Its housing is fitted the rubber,
impervious to outside air and solid.
6) DOWN LIGHT
Housing aluminum cylinder, brown polycarbonate inside is equipped with
black bayonet fitting diaphragm and reflector. Lamp: PL-C 13 W and
PLC18 W.
7) EMERGENCY AND EXIT LIGHTS

Installed at several places in accordance with the planning drawings of
lights are marked with arrows and signs direction of "OUT" in red color,
for lights mounted amid the corridor are mounted 2 (two) sides (double
side) while the light on the wall is 1 (one) side (single side).
Equipped with a Ni Cad battery, charger and other control devices, the
light stays on well when there is interference of PLN source. Installation is
installed before switching / main CB at the incoming feeder panel in such
a way so that so long as there is still tension on the main feeder cable, the

lamp is still burning and otherwise for the emergency exit lamp or is taken
from a series of socket.
Technical Specifications:
 Type : Maintained
 Length : 2 hours
 Lamps Power : TL 10 Watt Exit Lamp
 Input Voltage : 220 V, 50 Hz
 Power Consumption : 20 VA
 Body : Epoxy coated zintec sheet steel.
Equipped with monitor charging current and battery can work for ± 5
years and given a minimum 2-year warranty.
8) STREETLIGHT
 Housing made of fiber glass material
 High quality methacrylic bowl
 Aluminum Reflector
 Light rays distribution diagram of CIE recommendations
 Installation of glass Reflector is fastened with klips
 Component (ballast, capacitor, etc.) can be easily installed and
removed
 Lamp High Pressure Sodium (SON) 150 Watt
 Forms / model are defined landscape
9) SPOTLIGHT
 Housing is made of cast Aluminum
 It is not easy rusty
 High quality Aluminum Reflector
 the heat-resistant tempered glass Cover will not crack

 Gaskets rubber to hold the water jets and the IP 55dust enter
 HPIT Lamp 1000 Watt, 2000 Watt
10) GARDEN LIGHTS

 Housing is made of Aluminum glass luminary
 Aluminum Base
 Fitting E.27
 Milk Color
 50 Watt HPLN Lamp
 Forms / models are defined landscape
K. MOTOR STARTER
1) All electric motors shall be in accordance with DIN classification, both
in terms of protection, safety isolation, manner of operation,
installation and others.
2) For motors with a rating of:
• Up to 1.5 kW - 1 phase / 3 phases
• 1.5 kW and above - 3 phase
Except as otherwise provided by the manufacturer.
3) Selection of starter-motor is as follows:
• Direct starter for motor of 3.75 kW (5 HP)
• Star-delta open transition starter 5.5 kW (7.5 HP) up to 37.5 kW
(50 HP)
• Motor above 37.5 kW, start-delta closed transition, auto-
transformers or rotor resistance starter
• Starter variable speed drives (VSD) must be used for all ACMV
work pumps, plumbing or other works mentioned in the
specification.

4) All auxiliary/extra equipments for this starting must be included in the

scope of Contractor’s work.
5) Cubicles of starter panel shall:
a. Fabricated by using steel plate with thickness of 2.0mm is
equipped with a neutral and grounding terminal.
b. Metal-clad, ventilation itself with the degree of IP42 protection
c. For indoor pump space or outdoor pairs must use a panel with a
degree of 56 protection.
d. Equipped with locks and hinges, complete with gaskets and labels
traffolite.
e. Equipped with NO and NC contacts for integration with the BAS.
L. GROUNDING SYSTEM
1) SCOPE OF WORK
a. Procurement and installation of body grounding system (touch
voltage) on all electrical appliances made of metal, namely: TM
panels, transformers, lighting panels, power and others.
b. Connection of the neutral grounding of the transformer terminal to
the grounding electrode.
c. Grounding system a maximum of 3 .
d. Connection of grounding system of Mesh/Loop with Bare
Standard
e. 70 mm ² copper conductors inside the conduit pipe leading to the
Rod electrodes in the control basin.
2) APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND CODES

Grounding system implemented must be based on applicable
standards and codes, including:
• British Standard, BS.CP.1013 on grounding.
• Underwriters Laboratories Standard UL. 467, Standard for
Safety On Grounding and Bonding Equipment.
• And other applicable standards in Indonesia.
3) GROUNDING SYSTEMS
• The Contractor shall carry out this grounding work in
accordance the planning drawings.
• Grounding system uses multiple Electrodes Rods / Earth
Rod and interconnected with one another to form a relationship in
Mash.
• The Contractor must consider the condition of the existing
ground type resistivity in order to have a good grounding system.
4) WORK AND ADDITIONAL DEVICES

Each of grafting / fork of the conductor must use "Cadweld
Connection". It can also use a connector clamp for clip system with a
lot teeth by considering things:
• Clamp materials must materials that have been galvanized
or in a particular Treatment so it will not proceed if the contacts
with other types of metal.
• BC at the point / place of grafting must be "tinned".
• It is recommended that the connection place after completion
jointed, wrapped with certain materials, such as a type of epoxy
and so forth.
If there is a termination that use cable shoe type terminals then it must
notice things:
• Shoes cable used must have two (2) bolt holes.
• It must be of stainless materials and has been in treatment
for it will not proceed if the contact with other metal species.
M. INSTALLATION TECHNIQUES

1. CABLE / WIRING INSTALLATION
a General
All cable used for electrical installations must meet the SNI
requirements. All cables / wiring must be new and must be clearly
marked on the size, type of cables, the number and type of its spun. All
cables with cross section more than 6 mm² must be made a twisted
(stranded). This installation can not use a cable with a cross section
smaller than 2.5 mm² except for the use of remote control.
Unless other requirements, the conductor used is of type:
• For the installations of lighting are NYM, all the installation of
lighting and socket using the 3 cores system where the third cores
are the grounding network. Its grounding is incorporated in the
panel.
• For the distribution cables and garden lighting by using NYFGbY
or NYY cable.
• For the installation of garden lighting / outdoor lighting cutting
the road must be in GIP conduit.
All installation cables in buildings must be in super high impact PVC
conduit adapted to its size, cable tray, cable trench, rack cable and
must be clamped.
It is used flexible conduit with the same material for connecting the
installation to each light fixture.
b. "Splice" / branching
It is not allowed the "splice" or the connections in both the feeder and
the branches except on the installation cable of lighting and socket.
Connections of the cable is made mechanically and must firmly be
electric by the ways of "solderless connector." Voltage cable types, the
type of "compression or soldered." In making the connectors "splice"

must be connected to the conductors properly, so that all conductors

are connected there are no bare wires which are visible and can not be
separated by the vibration.
All cable connections both within the junction box, panel or other
places must use the connector that is made of copper insulated with
porcelain or bakelite or PVC, which the diameter is adapted to the
cable diameter.
c. Insulation materials
All insulation materials for the splice, connection and others such as
rubber, PVC, asbestos, glass, synthetic tape, resin, splice cases,
compostion and certain others must be installed using an approved
manner according to the recommendation of government
representatives and/or manufacturer.
d. Conductor Channels In Building

• For installation of lighting in areas that use the hanging ceiling, the
conductor channel (conduit) is installed on the top of the cable rack
and hang separately on the top of the ceiling.
• For the installation of conductive channels outside the buildings, it is
used concrete channels, except for lighting the park, used
galvanized pipe  2”. Concrete channel is equipped with Hand-hole
for turns (this concrete work shall conform with the requirements in
PBI -1971).
• Each cable channel in wall building is used conduit pipe
• a minimum PVC of 3/4". Each branch or channel collection to the
outside must use an appropriate junction box and the connection
which is more than one must use a terminal strip inside the junction
box.

• End of the pipe cable included in the panels and junction boxes
must be equipped with "Socket/lock nut", so that the pipe is not
easily removed from the panel. If not otherwise specified, then any
cables that are at the height of the floor surface up to 2 m must be
included in the pipe. And the pipe must be clamped to the building
at each distance of 50 cm.
2. SWITCHES INSTALLATION AND SOCKET (OUTLET)
a. Switches
The switches must be of type of mechanism rocker with a rating of 10
A/ 250 V, the switch is generally installed inbow unless stated
otherwise in the drawings. If not otherwise specified, the switches
frame must be installed flush on the wall at a height of 150 cm above
the finished floor unless otherwise determined by MK. Switches must
be installed in the boxes and rings (standard). Connections are only
allowed between adjacent boxes.
b. Socket
Socket must be the type which uses earthing contact (2P + E) with a
rating of 10 A, 16 A, 25 A, 250 V AC.
All couples socket with a voltage of 220 V must be given a channel to
the ground (grounding). Sockets shall be installed flush with the
surface of the wall with a height of 30 cm from the top of the finished
floor or wall duct outlet according to the drawings of plans or the MK
instructions.
3. LIGHTING FIXTURES INSTALLATION
a. General

Lighting fixture shall be of the type shown in the drawings. It shall be

made of suitable material and the shape must be interesting and his
work must be neat and nice, the thick of steel plate used for housing
fixture is a minimum of 0.7 mm. The Contractor must provide examples
of all the fixtures which will be installed to the Planner/ MKR for
approval.
b. Cables for Fixture

Unless otherwise appointed or required, the cables for the "fixture"
must be closed asbestos and heat-resistant. There should be no
smaller cable than 2.5 mm², the wires must be protected with a "tape"
or "tubing" in all places where there may be abrasion.
All cables must be hidden in armature construction except where
required hanging chain or if the installation/ planning of fixture appoint
otherwise. There should be no cable connection in an armature and
lynchings and must continue to start at the connection box to the
special terminals at the lamp armatures. Cable channels must not be
sharp and protected so as not to damage the cable.
c. Lights
All fixtures must be equipped with lights and installed in accordance
with the terms and drawing s. For incandescent lamps uses lamp
holders and base type edison screw, for lamp holder types edison
screw should not be connected to a control center, unless required by
another. Fluorescent lamps must be of the type of cool white or
according to the planning.
All fluorescent lamps or other lights that need repair power factor must
be equipped with capacitor. In this specification the size of "microfarad"
of the capacitor for each light is not too stressed because of what is
needed is the end result of power factor to at least 0.95.

d. Cable Installation to kWH meter

Type of cable from kWH panel to panels of Tenant unit is NYM. The
cable is neatly arranged in the cable rack on the top of the corridor,
then the cable down into the wall leading to the panel of Tenant units.
From the cable rack leading to the panel unit, the cable must be flexible
conduit PVC.
4. INSTALLATION / PANEL CONSTRUCTION
a. Cabinet
All cabinets must be made of steel plate with minimum thickness of 2
mm, or made of other materials such as polyester or bakelite. The
cabinet for "panel board" has the proportional size as required for the
panel board, which the amount is in accordance with the size of the
planning drawings according to the needs so that the number and size
of cable used is not too full /solid. Frame/framework of the panel must
be grounded in the cabinet it must be any good ways to install, support
and set the "panel board" and the lid. The cabinet with cables of
"trough feeders" must be arranged in such a way so that there is a
channel with a width of not less than 10 cm for branch circuit panel
board. Each cabinet shall be equipped with keys. For one cabinet shall
be provided 2 (two) pieces of keys, master key systems.
b. Finishing
All cabinets shall be painted with the color specified by the Planner/MK.
All the cabinets of the doors for electrical panels, shall be made
corrosion resistant by the way of "galvanized cadmium plating" or with
"zinc chromatic primer." In addition to the above, it shall be coated with
anti-rust coating that is as follows:
• The inside of the box and door.

• The outside of the box that is galvanized or cadmium plating

is not necessary painted if completely buried, if used zinc chromate
primer shall be painted with fuel paint.
c. Panel Installation
The installation of panels in such a way so that each equipment in the
panel can still be easily reached, depending on the kind/type of panel.
Then if it takes the base/foundation/leverage/hanger then the
contractor shall provide and install though it is not shown in the
drawings.
d. Main Distribution Panel

The main distribution panel must be as indicated on drawings, unless
otherwise appointed. The entire assembly including housings, busbar,
protective equipments must be planned, built, tested and where
necessary repaired in accordance with the requirements. The main
distribution panel shall be of the type in door type made of steel plate a
minimum thickness of 2 mm and is made following the IEC 439
standard.
The construction must be made of a rigid structure steel frame, which
can retain its structure by mechanical strees at the time of short circuit.
This framework is completely wrapped in the bottom, top and sides
with cover plates shall be sufficiently louvers for ventilation where
necessary to overcome the temperature rise of the parts that drain
current and voltage parts in accordance with the requirements of PUIL-
2000 LMK/IEC for the equipments covered. Voltage materials must be
prevented with a perfect to the possibility of water splashing. All the
gauges and transfer buttons required shall be grouped to a hinged
panel board which is hidden.
e. Name Board
All cabinets, control panels, electrical panels, power breakers (CB),

switches, and other parts of the equipment, if not mentioned in other
things, must be made name board to indicate/identify/use the name of
the tool. The name board must be made of back plate stainless steel
with the digravier letter arise.
For the whole, the name board shall be measuring 1.5 inches (3.81
cm) high with a width as necessary with letters of 1.0 inches high (2.54
cm), for smaller sizes where the lid is limited to use 1.5 inches (3,81
cm) high from the plate. And the minimum plate thickness of 3 mm.
f. Busbar/Rail
Busbar must be of copper material which its outside layer is coated
with a silver layer with a size in accordance with current capability of
150% of load current installed whose its size is adjusted to the PUIL
rules (list no. 630-DI-D4/PUIL-2000). All busbar/rail shall be painted
and held by a strong and well insulating material into the framework of
the panel. All busbar / rails shall be painted with colors that match
mentioned in PUIL. Paints shall be resistant to a temperature of 75 °C.
Busbar is prepared and held by insulator well for system of 3 , 4 wire
as indicated in the drawing . Each panel must have an isolated neutral
bus to ground and a bare grounding bus clamped firmly on the frame
and the panel is equipped by the clamps for panels grounding needs to
be grounded max 2 .
The implementation drawing s (shop drawings) must indicate the
measures of the buses and its composition. The size of the buses must
be a measure along the panel and must be provided the means to
connecting in the future.
g. Terminal and Nut-bolts

All branch terminals shall be given a layer of copper (ver-tin) and

screwed by using the ring nut-bolt of copper material or nut-bolts given
nickel (or stainless) with a copper ring.
h. Backup / Connection in the future

When in the drawing it is declared the existence backup then these
rooms shall be equipped with a busbar, installation clamps, support
and so forth, for the equipment to be installed later it can be busbar
equipment, new panels, switches, circuit breakers and others.
i. Measuring Tools
Each panel must be equipped with measuring tools such as in the
drawings. Meters are of the type of "moving iron vane type" specific for
the panel, with circular scale, flush or semi-flush, in a vibration-resistant
box, measuring 144 x 144 mm or 96 x 96 mm, with linear scale and
thoroughness of 1.5 %. Position of rotary switch for voltmeter
(Voltmeter Selector Switch) must be clearly marked.
j. Current Transformer
Current transformer is of the dry type, in the window type space with an
appropriate comparison with the precision of 0.3 with the burden in
accordance with IEC standards. The installation must be strong and
can withstand styles and mechanical when there occurred short
connection of 100 kA. The current transformer for Ampere-meter can
also be used in conjunction with kWH meter provided the accuracy is
still good. If it is not better then it must be used the special current
transformer.

k. Control Cables
Control cable from the panels must be installed at the factory /
workshop completely and bundled and protected against mechanical
damage. The minimum size is 1.5 mm2 of 600 Volts type.
l. Factory Brand
All safety equipments must be arranged one factory-made, similar
equipments must be moved to each other and exchanged its place on
the frame.
m. Safety Equipment of Power breaker

Safety equipment is the power breaker with the casting house, thermal
and magnetic trip with sufficient breaking capacity (according to the
load).
n. Pilot lamp
All of the surface lid of panel is equipped with:
Pilot lamp to declare the existence of R, S and T voltage.
Provision of the Pilot lamp mentioned above is a must, even in the
drawing s is not printed.
The colors for the pilot lamp:
• For R phase: red
• For S phase: yellow
• For Q phase: blue

SECTION II - 20KV INSTALLATION
1. GENERAL
The sub-contractor shall supply, install, commission, test and maintain the
20 kv switchgears, cables and transformers as herein specified and shown
on the drawings. Any item not mentioned but required for a complete system
operation shall be provided as part of the contract.
The supply will be obtained from the PLN / 20kv substation at ground floor.
The feeder cables between the consumer’s 20 kv switch room and the PLN
substation shall from part of the Contract.
The Contractor shall arrange for a,M.V. Licensing engineer to turn on the
consumer M.V. switchboards. All application and submission for supply of
electricity including any testing fees shall be paid by the Contractor, and
shall be deemed to be included in the contract price.
All work shall conform to this section of the specification and to the best
principles of modem engineering practice and be carried out by fully
competent tradesmen of appropriate grades.
All electrical equipment shall be of first grade quality with regard to design,
manufacture, installation and shall be completed for satisfactory operation,
control, maintenance and safety under all conditions of services.
2. QUALITY ASSURANCE
the switchgear shall conform to the requirements of PLN and shall be

manufactured, tested and approved in accordance with BS531 1 or 1EC298.
It shall be certified by ASTA, KEMA, or other independent testing authority
acceptable to PLN and local authorities having jurisdiction over the
installation.
3. MAINS

The Contractor shall supply and install 20kv cables from PLN substation to
consumer’s 20 kv switch room. The cables shall be of the types and sizes
indicated on the Drawings.
4. MAIN EARTHING
The contractor shall supply and install main earthing conductor from the 20
KV switchboards and transformers to the main earthing system as
described in section Earthing System’.
5. H.V. MAIN SWITCHBOARD AND TRANSFORMER
The contractor shall supply and install all 20 KV main switchboards and
2Okv/400V transformers as shown on the drawing and in the positions
indicated.
The construction of the switch board and transformers shall be in

accordance with section 20 KV/400V Power Transformers’.
Equipment shall be of the manufacture and ratings specified on the

drawings.
6. 20 KV CABLES
The contractor shall supply, install and connect all 20 KV cables as shown
on the drawing, together with all manholes, trenches, cable ladders,
saddles, glands, etc, as necessary for the complete and satisfactory
installation. All 20KV cables shall be installed in accordance with drawings
Cables shall be of the types and sizes as indicated on the Drawings.
7. TESTING
The contractor shall carry out such tests on the installation as my be

required by the supply authorities or the Engineer and shall provide all
instruments, labour and materials necessary for such tests.
8 LABELLING, CIRCUIT DIAGRAM AND SCHEDULES

Labelling shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the Engineer and to the
requirements of the supply Authorities.
SECTION III 20KV SWITCHBOARD
1. H.V.SWITCHGEAR
All high voltage switchgear shall be of the indoor type rated at 20KV with a
short circuit interrupting capacity of not less than 500 MVA for 3sec. They
shall be manufactured to suit tropical atmospheric conditions with
temperature range of 24°C and humidity range of 65% to 95%.
2. CONSTRUCTION
All switchgear cubicles shall be of sheet steel construction with folded edges
bolted together, modular type, totally enclosed and be of factory standard
design, Each cubicle shall be capable of fixing onto another cubicle without
any major alteration, Each cubicle shall be partitioned into compartments to
accommodate individually the following :
(a) Withdrawable track which carries the circuit breaker.

(b) Protective relays and measuring instruments.
(C) Bus-bars
(d) Fixed plug type contacts.
(e) Cable terminations.
Partitions shall be of sheet metal. A hinged panel door shall be provided at

the front of each cubicle with openings for the mounting of voltmeter,
ammeters and neon light indicator and a cut out for a glass panel for the
observation of relays.
AU metal works shall be treated against corrosion with a minimum of 1 coat

prime/antirust paint and 2 coats of finishing paint, colour to factory standard,
as selected by the Construction Management.

3. SAFETY SHUTTERS
automatic shutters which covers the exposed fixed contacts as soon as the
breaker track is withdrawn shall be provided. The operation of the shutters
for the upper and lower fixed contact shall be independent of each other so
that each individual set can be manually opened.
Tee busbar shutter shall be painted ‘SIGNAL RED” and labeled with
“BUSBARS” in large white letters. Circuit shutters shall be painted “LEMON”
COLOUR.
On bus-section panels both sets of shutter labeled “BUSBARS” in large

white letters, In addition, an arrow shall be painted in white towards the
section of busbar with the shutter is associated.
4. EARTHING
Earth cubicle shall be provided with its own earthing terminal/switch.

Earthing leads shall be provided, one set for each cubicle.
5. BUS-BARS
The bus-bar shall be constructed and installed in accordance to BS 158 and

BS 159.
The high voltage bus-bar shall be of minimum rating 630A at 20KV. The
bus-bar shall be constructed to withstand any electro-mechanical stress
under normal condition or under fault condition of up to a maximum of
55OMVA for 3 seconds. All bus-bars that that penetrate into the wall
partition of adjacent cubicle shall be insulated by cast resin wall bushing
isolators mounted on the opening of the partition walls.
All bus-bars shall be of the tinned hard-drawn copper type.

6. HIGH VOLTAGE CIRCUIT BREAKER
The high voltage circuit breaker shall be of SF-6 type and fuse bad break
switch for transform protection.
The circuit breaker shall have the following features:

(a)rated voltage - 20KV
rated current - 630A
rated breaking - 55OMVA at rated
capacity voltage for 3sec
(b) Truct mounted horizontal withdrawable type.
(c) Capable of 3 operating position
service, position — in this position the breaker is ready for operation test
position — in this position, the breaker can be operated and tested
engaging the live contacts.
isolation position — in this position, the breaker cannot he engaged at
all.
(d) Interlock facilities
Positive interlock facilities shall include but not be limited to the following
The breaker cannot be withdrawn when it is in the ‘closed’ position. The
breaker cannot be pushed into the serve position when the breaker is
engaged in the closed position or if safety shutters are not un locked.
(e) Are control device

Are control device shall be provided. A full description of its operation
and characteristic of over voltages shall be given.
(f) Operating mechanism

This shall be of the stored energy type. An electric motor operating on
220V AC voltage shall automatically charge a spring mechanism which
will close the breaker on initiating a push button or toggle switch. Anti-
pumping relays shall be incorporated to prevent accidental switching
‘ON of the circuit breaker when it is all ready in the ‘ON’ position. A
manual means of charging up the spring shall be incorporated

7. PROTECTION RELAYS AND INDICATING METERS
All high voltage circuits shall be protected for over current and earth fault
Current transformers shall be of the cast encapsulated type capable of with
standing the voltage level and short-circuit currents
Current transformers necessary for the operation of instrument and meters

shall have accuracy not less than class 1 for measuring, class 0 5 for
metering and class 5P/10 for protection. There shall not be any arching
between un-connected open-circuited secondary winding terminals with full
load current flowing in the primary.
One set of metering CTs shall be provided to PLN under this Sub-contract
Metering CTs shall be of class 0.5 and 15 VA.
Over current and earth fault relays shall be solid state electronic type They
shall be mounted with a switchgear cubicle and have a glass window door
panel for observation. The relay casing shall be dust proof and relay
removable from the front for easy replacement. The relay cover shall
incorporate a reset button so that re-setting is carried out without opening
the cover. Light emitting diode indicators shall be provided to indicate the
type of fault and the phases at fault. All indicators shall be visible without
opening the switchgear cubicle door panel. The tripping contacts shall be of
approved material and capable of repeated operation without deterioration.
The relay shall conform to BS 142.
All instrument shall be of flush mounting, square or rectangular type and

mounted on a panel separate from the circuit breaker panel covers. They
shall be of industrial grade type and shall be calibrated for use with their
respective current transformer, to carry the full load and fault current without
overheating and damage. Zero adjustment for the indicating instrument shall
be provided.
8. PROTECTION SYSTEM
The 20KV panel shall have the following protection 4 nos. Over current
protection and I no. earth fault relays. Over current protection relays shall be

have high set instantaneous trip elements type

Current shall be prom the secondary of the current transformers, with the
over current setting from 50%-200%, eath fault setting range from 1 0% to
40% and the time delay multiplier from 0.1 to 1.0. Instantaneous trip setting
range shall be from 1 to 30 times of the rated current.
9. SUBMITALS
Submit for the approval the engineer the following drawings before
manufacture of the equipment
(a) Plan and elevation drawings.

(b) Bill of material
(c) Wiring Diagram.
(d) Detail layout of all the component in the switchgear.
(e) Electrical characteristic of the components.
10. TEST REPORTS
Reports of all the tests in accordance with BS 5311 and any other tests
required by PLN shall be provided prior to shipment to site for review by the
Construction Management and PLN.
11. M.V. SWITCHROOM REQUIREMENTS
The following miscellaneous items shall also be provided

(a) Rubber Mats
Provide in front of the maint switchroom and other floor mounted sub-
switchboards rubber mats of approximately 1000mm wide and 66mm
think for the full length of the switchboard.
(b) Single Line Diagram

Provide a main single line diagram framed in a glass panel in the main
switch room. Diagram shall be 1000mm x 800mm approximately shall
clearly show full details of connecting circuits.

(c) Danger Sign

Provide a ‘Danger Sign’ in the transformer room and elsewhere as
required by PLN
(d) First Aid’ Demonstration Sign

Provide a First Aid demonstration sign in the transformer room and
elsewhere as required by PLN
SECTION IV 2OKV/400V POWER TRANSFORMER
1. IMMERSED TRANSFORMERS (ONAN OIL-TYPE)
(a) Continuous KVA rating — as shown on drawing.
(b) Voltage ratio-2OKV/400V volts between phase at no load, delta/star

connection with LV neutral solidly earthed.
(c) Vector group — DYN5
(d) Tapping - +5% at step of 2.5% on HT side with of toad, tap changer.
Tap-changer shall be by external hand well and padlocked. A tap
position indicator shall be provided.
(e) Transformer impedance shall be 6,9% or less.
(f) Total iron and copper losses at full load shall be less than 1 %
(g) Temperature rise - less than 125°C
(h) BIL-95KV
(i) Frequency — 50HZ
(J) Housing lP2O

(k) Noise Level — less than 76db
2. TRANSFORMERS ACCESSORIES
(a). Transformer accessories.

General accessories
- HV Porcelain Bushing on.

- LV Porcelain Bushing on cover.
- Oil level indicator.
- Thermometer wlo Contact.
- Manual off— Load Tap Changer.
- Name Plate.
- Earth Terminal.
- Radiator.
- Drain Valve.
- Sampling Valve.
- Lifting Lug.
- Jacking Lug.
- Roller.
- Hand Hole.
- Skid Base (Pad Mounted).
- Hanger (Pole Mounted)
- Thermowell.
- Oil filter Valve.
- Voltage Change Over Board.
- Filter Valve
Special Accessories
- Plug in Bushing 50mm2 clw straight connector or cover.

- RIS/DMCR.
- Magnetic oil level gauge c/w contact.
- Dial thermometer clw alarm & trip contact.
- Buchholz relay.
- Conservator c/w sampling valve.
- Breather cfw Silicagel.
- Air Filled LV junction box.
- HV/LV cable box.
- N2 Filling Valve
- Pressure Relief Valve.
- Pressure Vacuum Gauge.
- Pressure Relive Device c/w Contact.
- Radiator Fans.
- Radiator Valves.
- Winding Thermometer.
- Terminal Box.
(b) Billboard.
Data to be published on the billboard are
- Transformer type.
- Factory Name
- Serial number.
- Year of production.
- Nominal price voltage, frequency, current.
- Market diagram.
- Short circuit voltage on nominal current.
- Cooling type.
- Total weight.
- Oil Weight.
- Certificate.
3. CONSTRUCTION
The transformer shall be of totally filled or oil immerced type and shall be
self cooking and indoor use type. The transformer shall be equipped with a
truck with plain wheels for travel length ways or side ways.
4. MAGNETIC CORE
The magnetic core shall be constructed of high grade non-aging silicon

steel lamination of low hysteresis loss and high permeability. The three
limbs of the iron core shall be arranged in the same plane and
interconnected by yokes. An adequate number of core bandages shall
ensure uniform compression of the limbs. Several coats of paints shall be
applied to protect the core against corrosion.
5 WINDINGS

The windings shall be so designed to give a high dielectric and mechanical

strength of insulation. The high-tension coils shall be wound together with
high grade insulating sheet to the terminals. The winding shall be
maintenance-free, damp-free and suitable for service in the tropics. The
windings shall be of class H insulation. Transformer with aluminum wilding
shall be suitable for termination to copper conductor cables or bus ducts.
6. MECHANICAL VENTILATION
Ventilation shall he provided near the base of the transformer blowing

upwards. The fans shall be controlled by the temperature sensors located
in the low-tension windings of the transformers.
The fans shall be switched on when predetermined temperature is

exceeded. They shall be switched off again by preset time-delay relay.
A pair of contacts shall be provided so that if the temperature of the

transformer LV winding exceed a predetermined temperature it shall close
the tripping coil circuit and trip the transformer circuit breaker.
7. TERMINATION
(a) HV Side
3-pole cable box suitable for the reception of a 3-core 150 mm sq.
XLPE/SW A/PVC 20 KV cable descending vertically from cable
ladder. Termination shall be insulated by head-shrunk rubber. All
exposed termination shall be insulated or shrowded to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
(b) LV side
4-pole cable box suitable for the reception of copper cable.

SECTION V - 20KV CABLES
1. 20KV CABLES
The cables shall be of 20KV 3/C copper conductor, extruded shielded,

cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) insulated, semi-conducting tape
shielded, copper tape screened, assembled with non-hygrocopic filters,
PVC separation sheathed power cable.
All high voltage cables shall have a minimum rated voltage 20KV, X-linked
polyethylene insulated, single wire armored and PVC sheathed, suitable
for installation in cable tray, manufactured to BS 5467, All cables runs shall
be straight through without joints and where cables are subject to bending,
a minimum bending radius of 18 times the cable diameters shall be used.
All cables when cut shall have the ends sealed immediately unless
plumbing follows subsequently. After installation of the whole system, the
cables shall be subjected to the pressure tests of 76KV

between current carrying conductors and 30KV between current carrying

conductors and screen and armour for 15 minutes without any break
down.
The contractor shall carry out a short circuit calculation and prove to the
Engineer that the Contractor’s choice of cables is correct.
2. CONSTRUCTION & MATERIALS
(a) CONDUCTORS
The conductor shall consist of compacted circular (class 2) stranded
annealed plain copper wires in accordance with lEO Pub 228.
(b) CONDUCTOR SIELDING

The conductor shielding shall consist of extruded semi-conducting
separator tape may be applied between the conductor and the semi
conducting compound layer at manufacture’s discretion. if
necessary.
(c) INSULATION
The insulation shall consist of extruded cross linked polyethylene
(XLPE).
The average thickness shall be not less than the specified nominal
value.
The minimum thickness or any point shall not fall below the nominal
value by more than 0.1 mm plus 10% of the nominal value.
(d) INSULATION SHIELDING

The insulation shielding shall consist of a semi-conducting tape
applied with an overlap.
(e) METALIC SCREEN

The metallic screen shall consist of annealed plain copper tap
applied with an overlap.
(f) LAYING-UP
The screened cores shall be assembled together with non-

hygroscopic filters. The direction of lay shall be left hand.
(g) Separation sheath

The separation sheath shall consist of extruded black PVC. The
minimum thickness at any point shall not pall below 80% of the
nominal value by more than 0.2mm.
(h) Armour
The armour shall consist of one layer of galvanized steel wires. The
nominal diameter of each wire shall be 3.15mm. A suitable binder
binder tape may be applied over the armour at manufacturers
discretion, if necessary.
(i) Outer Sheath

The outher sheath shall consist of anti-termite treated and extruded
PVC compound. The minimum thickness at any point shall not pall
below the specified nominal value by more than 0,2mm plus 20% of
the nominal value.
(j) Core identification

The core identification shall be carried out by coloured Narrow tapes
longitudinally applied over the insulation shielding.
(k) Manufacturer’s identifications

Manufacturer’s name and/or trade mark Year of manufacturer
3. TEST
The following test shall be performed at manufacturer’s work by the method

in accordance with lEO 502.
(a) Measurement of the electrical resistance of conductors

(b) AC high voltage test for 5 minutes
(c) Partial discharge tests.
(d) Check of dimension.
4. PACKING

The cable shall be wound onto non-returnable strong and seaworthy reel
lagged with wooden or steel battens.
SECTION VI - LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
1. GENERAL
The requirement, methods, materials and standards of workmanship in

connection with the LV. Work shall be defined below and/or as indicated on
the drawings.
All work shall conform to the specification and to the best principles of
modem engineering practice and be carried out by fully competent

tradesmen of appropriate grades.
2 SUPPLY
The LV. supply system is 380/220V 50 Hz 3 phase 4 wire and originates at

the 400 V terminals of the transformers as shown in the drawings.
3. MAINS
The contractor shall supply and install 380 V mains from the secondary
terminals of the transformers to the LV. switchboards. The main shall be of
the types sizes indicated on the Drawings.
4. MAIN EARTH ING
Supply and install main earthing conductor from the L..V. switchboards to
the main earth system as described in section ‘Earthing System.
5. L.V. MAIN SWITCHBOARD
Supply and install all L.V. main switchboards (380V and 220 V) as shown on
the drawings and in the position indicated.
The construction of the switchboard shall be in accordance with section L.V.
switchboard & Distribution Boards. Equipment shall be of the manufacture
and ratings specified on the drawings.
6. SUBMAINS AND TEE-OFFS
Supply, install and connect all sub-mains as shown on the drawings,

together with all cable trays, saddles, glades, etc., as necessary for the
complete and satisfactory installation. All sub-mains shall be installed in
accordance to drawings. Sub-mains shall be of the types and sizes as
indicated on the drawings. All the KWH meters (double tariff) shall be
supplied and instaued by the Contractor.

7. SPARE FUSE CARTRIDGES
Supply 5% spare H.R.C. fuse cartridges of the type and rating installed.
8. EARTHING
All L.V. equipment and exposed metal parts shall be effectively earthed in
accordance with section ‘Earthing System”.
All light fittings shall be earthed. All metal clad switches shall be earthed.
9. WIRING TO LIGHT FITTINGS
Wire and connect all light fittings as shown on the drawings. Switches shall
be shown on the Drawings and/or as specified in “Light Fittings Installation”.
Circuit wiring shall be as indicated on the Drawings if shown. Each circuit

shall terminate at a miniature circuit breaker in the distribution board.
10. WIRING TO SWITCH SOCKET OUTLETS (S.S.O.’S)
Supply, install and wire all S.S.O. as shown on the Drawings.
11. POSITION OF OUTLETS
The position of outlets shown on the drawings is approximate, and variation

of position up to 300mm may be effected without
variation if such alteration is made prior to the installation of conduit.
The Contractor shall be responsible for checking the lighting layouts against
structural plans and other services prior to the installation of trunking,
conduits, and lighting fixtures so that conflict of light fittings with structural
members and other services can be avoided.

The Contractor shall be responsible for measuring rooms and spacing

outlets accurately and symmetrically and shall verifythe positions of outlets
before commencing installation.
12. BALANCING OF CIRCUIT
Balance the loads throughout the installation to the satisfaction of the supply
Authority and the Engineer. Phase balancing shall be carried out in stages,
when the building is partially occupied and when fully occupied.
Calculate and check the maximum demands for all submains and cables,
etc., from the information given about equipment to be connected and check
the rating of all cables, circuit breakers, switches, etc., accordingly notify the
engineer immediately of any discrepancy. Check that the voltage that drop
shall not exceed the limit of 5% for final circuits from the main switchboards.
Minimum size of cables shall be 2.5mm2 copper conductor for lighting, 2.5
mm2 for general purpose socket outlet, 2.5 mm2 earth continuity cable, 1.5
mm2 copper conductor for control wiring, matering and indicating lights.
Each lighting circuit shall be served by a separate neutral wire.
13. TESTING
The Contractor shall carry out such tests on the installation as may be
required by the supply Authorities or the Engineer and shall provide all
instruments, labour and materials necessary for such tests.
14. LABELLING, CIRCUIT DIAGRAMS AND SCHEDULES
Labelling shall be carried out by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the

Engineer and to the requirements of the Supply Authorities.
Labels shall be ‘TRAFFOLITE” with black lettering on white background.
Each switch, power outlet and equipment shall be fitted with a circuit
identification disc, numbered to indicate the distribution board and circuit.

These disc shall be of the press in type, approximately 9 mm diameter of

various colours engraved to suit to fit into screw holes on cover plates.
Similar disc shall be fitted on or beneath the corresponding fused or circuit

breakers on the distribution boards.
As specified elsewhere, on completion of the installation, the subcontractor

shall supply ‘as built’ drawings to the Engineer, showing all variations and
alterations from the Tender Drawings as well as final circuits and which
outlets are controlled by such.
All circuits shall be numbered and printed on identification charts.
SECTION VII - LOW VOLTAGE SWITCHBOARD CUBICLE

1. SCOPE
This section of the specification covers the general requirements for the
switchboard cubicle when called for else where in this specification or in the
drawings.
2 GENERAL REQUIREMENT
Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein pertaining to this

installation, it shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure all works are
strictly in accordance with the 15 th Edition of lEE Wiring Regulations and
Supply Company’s supply rules, BS 5486 Part 1 The switchboard shall be
suitable for tropical climate with R.H. 100% and ambient temperature of
4000.
3 SWITCHBOARD CONSTRUCTION
(a) LV. switchboard shall be of floor-standing, or wall mounted totally

enclosed type, built up from enclosed units housing the circuit breakers,
fuse switches, relays; Contractors, busbar and other items of ancillary
equipment as shown on the drawings.
(b)The L.V. switchboards shall be suitable for indoor service on a 380/220
volt, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50Hz system. The rated short-time withstand
current shall be 50 KA for 3 seconds for circuits of 1600A and above,
and 50 KA for 1 seconds for circuits below 1600A.
(c) All switchboards and associated equipment (switchgear, busbar

assemblies, etc.) shall be certified for the category of duty specified.
(d) The L.V. switchboard shall comply with BS 5486 Part 1 class 3 with type
test certificates issued by an independent and approved test authority.
(e) The sheet metal for constructing the switchboard shall be specially
selected, dead flat mild steel not lessthan 2mm thick. The panel shall be
built up on substantial framing with all necessary stiffeners and supports
with no cross struts. The entire panel shall be vermin proof.

(f) The degree of protection of enclosures shall be in accordance with P 31

to BS 5420 under normal service condition.
(g) Front access doors shall be provided and back of the panel shall be
provided with hinges and lockable handles to facilitate inspection and
maintenance. Removable gland plates shall be provided at the top and
at the bottom of the switchboard with knockouts or blanked off openings
for incoming and outgoing circuits cables.
(h) All doors shall have concealed hinges and where necessary, shall be
interlocked with the switch mechanism. All doors shall be provided with
dust excluding gasket of neoprene or equal and approved material.
(i) Screened ventilating louvres of approved type shall be provided on the

sides and rear panels to IP 31 of BS 5420.
(j) All switchboard shall be finished in the manufacturer’s standard, except

the essential sections shall be finished in red
(k) The LV. switch board shall be supplied with an integral channel iron
plinth of not less than 100 mm in black.
4. BUSBARS
(a) Busbars and busbars connections shall be constructed in accordance

with the requirements of BS 159.
(b) Busbars shall be restangular section, hard drawn, electrotinned high

conductivity copper to BS 1433, adequate rated and supported by
moulded insulators spaced at suitable intervals. All busbars shall be in
the same manner as the type-tested arrangement. The complete
assembly shall be capable of withstanding the maximum mechanical
stresses to which it my be subjected under fault conditions.
(c) Full size neutral bar shall be provided.
(d) Busbars installed in switchboards shall be so arranged that aU

conductors can be brought onto the bars brought undue bending.
Busbars shall be coloured at strategic locations for phase

identification.
(e) For rectangular section busbar, connections shall be made with double
split cast brass clamps. Drilling of the bars will not be permitted unless
approved by the Engineer.
(f) Insulators for busbar supports shall be nonhygroscopic and non-

deteriorating.
(g) Notwithstanding the above, all conductors between the busbars, circuit
brakers and fuse switches shall be high conductivity copper bar,
having a current rating of not less than that of the fuse switches to
which they are connected. The conductors shall be coloured to BS
colour code for phase identification.
(h) Copper busbars and connection joints shall be tinned to BS 1432.
(i) Atinned copper earthing strip of dimension not les than 150 mm2 shall
be provided for the full length of the switchboards and sufficient
provisions shall be made for earthing connections of all electrical
circuits. It shall be effectively connected to all metal parts other than
current carrying conductors.
(j) Main busbars of cubicle switchboard shall be run in a horizontal

chamber over the full length of the switchboard (or the section of) with
bolted links at the end for easy future extension.
(k) Removable bolted links shall be provided for the accommodation to

current transformers for metering and protection Facilities without
affecting the mechanical and electrical properties of the busbars as a
whole.
5. AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
(a) Air circuit breakers to be provided shall be of triple pole or four pole as
specified on the drawings. The circuit breakers shall be rated at 41 5V
and certified by type tests by ASTA to 50 KA short circuit breaking

capacity and the rated short time withstand of 5OKA for 3 second for
ACB or MCCB of above 1600A and 4OKA for 1 second for ACB or
MCCB for 1600 and below.
(b) The circuit breakers shall be of metal clad, flush mounted, air break,
horizontal drawout type and comply with B.S. 4752: Part 1.
(c) The circuit breakers shall have a sufficient short circuit performance.
(d) The design shall be such that the main contact pressure increases
with heavy through-fault currents. Auxiliary arcing contacts shall be
provided to protect the main contacts from burning during the
switching operations. All contact parts shall be readily replaceable.
(e) A mechanically operated visual ON/OFF/ISOLATED indicating devicxe

shall be provided to indicate the circuit breaker position. A local push
button shall be provided for manual tripping. Provision shall be made
in such a way that it shall be possible to padlock the ACB in the
ON/OFF position.
(f) With hand charged spring mechanism, the springs shall not be
discharged until the spring has been fully charged and the means of
charging has been removed or disconnected.
(g) The operating mechanism shall be trip-free. The speed of operation

shall be dependent on the stored spring energy and speed of the
operating of charging device.
(h) Mechanical interlocks shall be provided to cater for the following

functions:
The circuit breaker cannot be inserted or withdrawn when in the closed
position. Atempted with drawable shall trip a closed circuit breaker.
The circuit breaker cannot be closed until it is fully engaged or

completely isolated and withdrawn.
Covers or door giving access to the circuit breaker cannot be removed

or opened unless the circuit breaker is fully isolated and with drawn.

(i) All air circuit breaker shall be equipped with the following as shown on
the drawings:
One 3 element I.D.M.T.L. type relay-three elements for overcurrent

protection, with 50% to 200% plug settings in accordance with B.S.
142 (for incoming ACB and where shown on the drawings).
One single element I.D.M.T,L. type relay for unrestricted earth fault
protection with 10% - 40% plug settings to B>S> 142 (for the incoming
ACB and where shown on the drawings).
One 3 element instantaneous overcurrent relays, with 200% to 800%

plug setting (for sub-main ACBs where shown on the Drawings).
• Direct acting overcurrent release shall be provided on ACB not fitted

with I.D.M.T. protection as specified on drawings.
• Tripped, breaker close and breaker oven indications. Phase

indications lamps, where indicated on the drawings. Settings levels
of all adjustable tripping devices shall be clearly indicated and
marked up on equipment. Where breakers is withdraw, all live parts
shall be protected by lockable shutters. Where 4 pole breaker is
specified, full neutral shall be provided.
Local breaker control.
Castell interlocks, where shown on the drawings.
• Two sets each of spare auxiliary NC and NO contact.
• Volt-free contacts as required for remote indication, as shown on

the drawings/as specified.
(j) The tripping mechanism shall be stable and its operation shall not be
influenced by shock or vibration. The design of the trip plunger shall be
such that its action is instantaneous once the trip circuit is operated.
Shunt trip coils operated by power supply from the mains shall not be
used. A separate D.C. power pack c/w 30 V nikel cadmium cells
batteries and booster trickle charger unit shall be used for shunt trip
coils. The batteries under fully charged condition shall be able to
maintain a minimum of 20 times consecutive tripping.

(k) Individual are chutes shall be provided on each pole of the breaker.
They shall be so designed that any are caused by the opening of the
breaker under maximum fault condition shall be contained in the are
chute the
6. CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
(a) current transformers shall comply with B.S. 3938 of the ‘straight
through’ type and shall be rated for Class B temperature rise and a
primary voltage of 600V.
(b) Current transformers shall be of the epoxy resin encapsulated type

and shall be capable of providing the necessary output to operate all
the VA burdens of connect and protected devices or instruments.
(c) Current transformers with adjustable primary turns will not be

accepted.
(d) The secondary circuit of each set (R-Y-B-N) of current transformers

shall be earthed at one point only. Means shall be provided for these
earth connections to be disconnected at accessible position for testing.
(e) Rountine test reports as detailed in B.S.3938 shall be supplied for

individual current transformers with the actual figures provided.
(f) Current transformers provided in polastic casings and of the split core
type will not be accepted.
(g) Measuring current transformers shall be connected to test terminal

blocks, The test blocks shall be provided with easily removable links
and designed to facilitate connection of the current transformer.
(h) Current transformer shall have an accuracy not less than Class I for
measuring and metering and Class lOP 15 for protection.
(i) Current transformer shall be capable of operation, without damage,

with open circuited secondary and full load current flowing in the
primary.
(j) Current transformers shall be firmly supported and installed as to

permit easy access and to be readily replaceable, if necessary, without
dismantling of adjacent equipment.
7. PROTECTIVE RELAYS
(a) Except where otherwise specified, protective relays shall comply with
BS. 142.
(b) Plug selection design shall be such hat the 50% to 200% plug setting
can be changed on load without open-circuiting the current transformer
and the highest current taping point will automatically be selected
when the plug is removed.
(c) Draw-out cases finished in phenolic black shall be provided for flush
mounting of the relays. A contact shall be fitted which shall short circuit
the associated current transformer on withdrawal of the relay.
(d) For I.D.M.T, overload protection relays, three single phase units shall
be arrange in one horizontal plane in accommodated in a common
casing. Earth fault relay shall be separately accommodated.
(e) Overload protection relays shall have adjustable current settings

between 50% to 200% in seven equal steps and time setting of 0-3. 0
seconds at 10 times current setting. The relay shall be of GEC CDG,
Reyrolle TJM or equivalent.
(f) I.D.M.L. earth fault protection relay shall have adjustable current
setting of 0-1.3 seconds at 10 times current setting. The relay shall be
of GEC CDG, Reyrolle TJM or equivalent.
(g) Instantaneous overcurrent relay for instantaneous phase or earth fault

protection, instantaneous high set overcurrent protection shall be three
single phase units having continuosly adjustable current ratings
between 200% to 800% of 1.0 amp (CT. rating). The relay shall be of

GEC CAG or equivalent.
(h) Relays shall be housed in dust and vermin-proof accessible cases with
viewing glass.
(I) Operation indicators shall be provided for each protective element and
installed within the same relay. The relay shall have a common hand-
reset devise openable without opening the relay case.
(j) The relay contacts shall be capable of making and breaking the
maximum current which my occur under fault conditions in the circuit in
which they are connected.
8. AMMETER
(a) Ammeters shall be of moving iron type class 1.5 accurancy to B.S. 89
industrial and be capable of carrying their full load current without
undue heating and shall not be damaged by the maximum fault levels
of the switchgear.
(b) All ammeters shall have a continuous overload capability of 120% of

the upper limit of the scale for two hours. All ammeters are to be
100mm dial square flush pattern with quadrant scales.
(c) Mechanical zero adjustment shall be provided and accessible from the
front without dismantling.
(d) The ammeters shall give direct readings without application of any
multiplication factors.
(e) For the ammeter combining with of maximum demand current, a

separate calibrated reading scale shall be provided in one case.
9. VOLTMETER
(a) Volt meter shall be of accuracy class 1.5 and have expanded scales.
The arrangement, scale deflections shall be approved prior to
assembly of the associated switchboard.

(b) Mechanical zero adjustment shall be provided.
(c) Other requirements shall be as per the applicable clauses specified for
ammeter.
10. POWER FACTOR METER
Power factor indicators shall be of accuracy Class 11.5 having bezel

dimensions 115 x 115mm. They should give direct readings without the
use of multiplication factors. The arrangement, scale deflection shall be
approved prior to assembly of the switchboard.
11. FREQUENCY METER
Frequency meter shall be of accuracy class 0.5 and indicate by vibrating

reeds. Each reed is turned to a different value in the frequency span.
12. VOLTMETER SELECTOR SWITCH
(a) The voltmeter selector switch shall be mounted on the front of the
panel and shall be of the rotary type with break-before-make contacts
for selection to measure red-yellow, yellow-blue, blue-red and red,
yellow and blue phase voltages with RY, YB, BR, R-N, Y-N, B-N
marked clearly on the switch.
(b) Contact shall be rated for a thermal current of 6 amperes, 220 V,

50Hz.
13. BATTERY
DC supply shall be used for tripping of MCCB’s and to effect the

operational sequence of the switchboard described elsewhere in the
specification.

14. FUSES
(a) HRC cartridge fuses to BS 88: Part 2, Class Qi shall be supplied, ASIA
certified.
(b) The voltage rating shall be 415V 50Hz. The rated breaking capacity of
fuses shall be 89 KA at 415V 50Hz.
(c) All live terminals and contacts shall be effectively shrouded and it shall
be possible to change fuses with the circuit alive, without danger of
contact with live part.
15. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH (ATS)
(a) The automatic transfer switch shall comprise a pair of circuit breakers.
Air circuit breakers shall be used for automatic transfer switch. The
pair of circuit breakers shall be the mechanically held type,
mechanically and electrically interlocked to exclude any possibility to
paralleling the normal and standby sources. Operations of circuit
breakers shall be by individual momentarily energized solenoid
mounted on each breaker. The solenoids shall be operated at D.C.
supply.
(b) To ensure continuity of service both circuit breakers shall have two
stable positions, closed and open. It shall be possible to manually
operate the circuit breakers in the event of the absence of control
voltage.
(c) The circuit breakers shall have a neutral position with both breakers in
the open position. It shall be possible to lock each breaker in this
position.
(d) The front panel of the equipment shall be provided with indicating
lights to indicate closed and opened status of each breaker.
(e) Where the circuit breaker is not withdrawable, an isolator shaH be

provided for the isolation and maintenance of the automatic transfer

switches.
(f) The three phase sensing circuits shall be provide on the main busbar
of switchboards. Failure of one or more phases of the incoming supply,
or a reduction in voltage to less than 60% of normal, shall initiate a
timing device adjustable in the range 0 to 15 seconds. If the failure
persists at the expiry of this pre-set time delay, a signal shall be
initiated to start the engine of the standby generator. When power
becomes available from the generator, the changeover contractor shall
operate with an adjustable time delay between 0 to 15 seconds to
transfer the essential load to 9 the generator supply.
(g) After restoration of the normal supply, the automatic changeover

switch shall automatically be restored to its normalposition after an
adjustable period of ten seconds. A signal shall be initiated to stop the
engine of the standby generator which shall continue running for a
certain period to ensure security of mains supply
16. CONTROL AND AUXILIARY CONTACT
Control and auxiliary relay shall be to BS 142 and shall be plugin type,
rack-mounted, provided with cable connection sockets and anchored by
quick fastening vibration-proof devices as required where deemed
necessary for proper operation of the Circuit Breaker or starting
equipment. The switches of the relays shall be double break, easily
accessible for maintenance and have adequate current rating to carry the
connected load.
17. CONTROL RELAYS
(a) “Volt-free” contact shall be provided as required for the use of other
trades for external control, alarm or indication circuits.
(b) Volt-free contact shall generally be provided to effect the following

remote indication:
• Availability of generator supply at the switchboards.

• Status of all incoming ACB, bus section ACB.
• Others as shown on the drawings/or specified in this specification.
18. CONTROL WIRING
(a) All instruments and equipment shall be securely mounted and all
internal wiring runs shall be so positioned as to insure complete
accessibility for servicing purposes.
(b) All internal wiring shall be PVC insulated, neatly bunched, run on
supporting cleats or insulators and shall be coloured and adequately
labeled or sleeved for identification. All control wiring shall be 1.5 mm
mm. Copper cable and shall terminate on the ‘Klippon” or similar
approved system and shall incorporate loops to permit the opening of
doors and removal of components for inspection without disconnecting
the cables.
(c) Where control necessitates the use for a battery supply, DC wiring
shall be totally segregated from the mains system.
(d) All terminals shall be shrouded and adequately labeled with cautionary
signs. All circuits shall be provided with removable links/fuses to
facilities isolation, checking and maintenance.
19. POWER FACTOR CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
(a) Capacitor bank shall be used as the power factor correction equipment
and shall be connected to the public supply section of the switchboard
as shown on the drawing.
(b) The capacitor shall be dry type.
(C) The capacitor bank shall be arranged in groups and interconnected in

parallel by contractors controlled by a 6 or 12 step control units. The
control unit shall comprise of fuse boards, contractors, CT’s, electronic
measuring and control circuit boards, meters etc. The control unit shall

continuously and automatically measure and adjust the power factor of

the switchboard to within 0.85 to 1 by Switching on and of the
capacitor groups.
20. LOCAL SWITCHBOARD CUBICLE
Switchboards assembled or manufactured locally under licence from a

manufacturer credited with type test certificate from a third reputable
independent party (such as ASTA, CEMA etc.) for a category of duty
specified will be considered providing all certification is valid for the locally
construction units and the following conditions are observed
(a) All drawing covering the design and construction shall be prepared to
the satisfaction of the engineer.
(b) During the construction of the switchboard, a factory engineer from the
licence’s work shall be required to visit the local plant on at least two
different occasions and to inspect the quality and workmanship of the
locally made equipment. Upon completion, a final insfection will be
made by the factory engineer to certify that the completed control
panel is in accordance with the approved drawings, and that the
standard of materials and manufacture fully comply with type tests
requirements.
21. DISCRIMINATION
(a) Full discrimination is required within and between switchboard ACBs

and other switchgear ensuring that short circuits or overloads on sub-
circuits will not trip the switchboard circuit breakers but will effectively
isolate the faulty circuit, leaving the healthy circuits unaffected. The
sub-contractor shall be responsible in selecting correct switchgears for
ensuring discrimination is maintained.
(b) Where earth fault detection is provided, discrimination shall be

ensured as for over loads above. Sufficient adjustment shall be
provided ensuring that spurious tripping due to the inherent earth
leakage of long cable runs and other equipment, does not occur, yet
ensuring that discrimination is steel maintained.

(c) Where circuit protection devices are not provided with earth leakage
detection they shall be arranged to trip on earth leakage by means of
the over current protection by ensuring a low earth fault loop
impedance in accordance with the PEE Wiring Regulations.
22. REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM INTERFACE
The tenderer shall provide sufficient dry contacts and terminals, etc. in the
switchboard for interfacing with the remote control System as detailed on
the Drawings or as specified.
23. TESTING
(a) The following tests shall be included, but not be limited to, at the
manufacturer’s workshop during the course of assembly and on
completion immediately prior to transport to site.
Inspection of the switchboard including wiring, electrical and

mechanical connections, external and internal finish, etc.
Mechanical tests including checking of all mechanical and electrical

connections, interlock, etc.
Primary and secondary injection tests to check if all measuring

protection and control circuits and associated components are
operative. Continuity and dielectric test.
Functional checks of all control circuits including the shunt trip

operation of breaker at 70% and 119% of the rated control supply
voltage.
Calibration of metering instrument, etc. Battery/charger load test.

Any other tests as recommended by manufacturer.
Mechanical operation tests of switchgears. Each switchgear

to be operated through at least three (3) close-open cydes in both

operating and test position. All control circuits, changeover operations

and interlock shall be of rack-in and rack-out of all withdrawable
equipment to be carried out.
(b) After the transport and erection of the switchboard on site, the
following test, but not be limited to, shall be also be carried out
General inspection of the switchboard

• Mechanical tests.
Continuity and dielectric tests.
• Function checks.
Primary and secondary injection tests to recheck all measuring,
protection and control circuits and associated components.
(c) The following commissioning inspections and tests, but not limited to,
shall be carried out before the switchboard is put into normal services.
Voltage tests between any two combination of each phase, neutral and
earth.
• Phase sequence tests on each outgoing units.
Function checks, specially on the controlling devices.
SECTION VIII - LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION

INSTALLATION
1. GENERAL
All work shall conform to this specification and to the best principles of
modern engineering practice and be carried out by full competent
tradesmen of appropriate grades.
All electrical equipment shall be of first grade quality with regard to design,

manufacture and installation and shall be complete for satisfactory

operation, control, maintenance and safety under all conditions of service.
All work performed under this contract shall comply in every respect with
15 th Edition of lEE Regulations, Rules and Regulations of all Local
Authorities having jurisdiction over the installation.
The LV. distribution system originates at the main L.V. switchboards as
shown in the drawings.
2. SCOPE OF WORK
This section sets out the requirements, methods, materials and standards
of workmanship in connection with the L.V. electrical distribution system of
the work defined below and as indicated on the drawings.
3. CABLE INSTALLATION
(a) General Requirement
this section of the specification covers the general requirements for the
supply, installation, testing and commissioning of all cables that are
required for the complete installation of the electrical system.
All the main power cables involved in this sub-contract are shown on
the drawings and the Contractor shall provide all the necessary trays,
ladders. conduits, supports and cables trunking, glands, shrouds, and
boxes, clamps, compounds, specialist tools, etc., necessary to install,
terminate and connect the cables in accordance with good engineering
practice.
All cables shall be provided with identification labels at each and at all
positions where cables change direction. In cases where cables are of
multiple runs, labels shall be provided at 10 m intervals. Labels shall
be copper disc engraved to show the size of the cable and the fed
equipment.
Where multi-core cables are for indication, protection and control

applications, each core shall have an identification number and the

Subcontractor shall in addition to the cable identification labels provide

engraved ferrules over the cable rack. The ferrules shall be numbered
according to a wiring diagram approved by the representatives of the
engineer. All wires shall be terminated with an approved type of clamp
connector. Pinching screw type connectors shall not be acceptable. f
Not with standing the above the Sub-contractor shall install the cables
in accordance with the lEE. Wiring Regulation.
Cables running horizontally at high level shall be supported by

perforated cable trays unless otherwise specified. This tray shall be
not less than 1.6mm steel, hot-dipped galvanised finish, and with
returned edges. It shall be supported from the rib of structural slab,
beams, etc., by mild steel rods of not less than 15mm in diameter, with
undersling steel angle supports. A sample of the supporting bracket
shall be submitted for approval.
They tray design and strength and/or the tray supports shaU be
spaced at such intervals, to ensure that tray sag is not noticeable
when installed with all cables.
Where cables are clipped to wall or ceiling, they shall be secured by

means of space saddles at centre as recommended by the LEE.
Regulations. The space saddles shall be of steel deep spacer type
fixed to the surface by means of “rawplugs” or other equal method.
Each cable shall be fixed by a saddles fixed to bases by two cadmium
plated fixing screws.
All cables shall be of copper conductor type. The Sub-contractor shall

be responsible for the off loading and handling of the cables on site
and shall ensure that cables are new and delivered to site on new
drum and properly protected against mechanical damage and loss with
manufacturer’s seals still intact. Partly used drums of cable which has
already been used elsewhere shall not be acceptable unless special
approval is given by the Engineer in writing.
(b) Fire Resistant Cables
Fire resistant cables shall be provided for fire and emergency

installation in accordance with the drawings.

Cables shall be installed in accordance with the requirements of the

latest edition of the I.E.E. Regulations. Proper tools shall be employed
as recommended by the manufacturer during the installation work.
Fireproof cable and accessories shall be comply with relevant British
Standard and approved by local Fire Services Department.
Jointing of fireproof cables shall not be allowed unless authorized by
the Engineer in writing. Proper jointing material shall be used as
recommended by the manufacturer when jointing is allowed. All joints
and termination joints shall be of approved manufacture and carried
out strictly in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations.
The Sub-contractor shall keep all cables entirely separate from pipe
work associated with other services. No direct contact shall not be
permitted between the cables and such pipes.
The Sub-contractor shall satisfy the Engineer that all labour employed
in the installation of the cables shall be competent and have been
properly trained in the methods of installations as recommended by
the cable manufacturers. Final cable termination to the motor
equipment shall be coiled in ordered to avoid excessive vibration being
transmitted to the cable termination.
(c) PVC/PVC Cable
PVC insulated PVC sheathed copper cables (PVC & PVC) shall be of
single core or multi-core with full neutral and shall be 600 V/I 000 V
grade complying to B.S. 6364:1969.
The core of these shall be high annealed copper conductors complying

with B.S. 6360:1969.
Where cables run horizontally, they shall be properly supported on
perforated cable trays and cleared at intervals of not exceeding 2 m
directly on the tray. Where cables are installed vertically, they shall be
cleared at distances not exceeding im. When cables run in car parks
and other protected areas, they shall be protected with metal trunking
or other approved means. The cable tray and metal trunking shall be
supported with rigid metal brackets.
(d) PVC/SWA/PVC Copper Cable

PVC insulated steel wire armoured cable (PVC/SWA and PVC) shall
be 600V11000 V grade complying to B.S. 6346 :1969 multi-core with
full neutral. The cores of these cables shall be high annealed copper
conductors complying with B.S. 6360 :1969.
The PVC insulated cores shall be coloured coded and shall be

sheathed with PVC which shall serve as a bedding for galvanized
single steel wire armoring. The armoring shall be served with an auter
PVC sheath.
Cables shall be terminated in a gland fitted with an armour clamp. The

gland body shall be provided with an internal conical seating to receive
the armour clamping cone and a clamping nut which shall secure the
armour clamping cone firmly to the armour wires, ensuring that the
armour wires shall be tightly clamped between the armour cone and
conical armour seating. The spigot on the gland body shall be
threaded to suit standard conduit accessories. A PVC shroud shall be
fitted to cover the entire gland body.
The minimum bending radius shall be not less than eight times the
overall cable diameter.
Where cables run horizontally, they shall be properly supported and

perforated cable trays and cleared at intervals of not exceeding 2m
directly to the tray. Where cable are installed vertically, they shall be
cleared I St distance not exceeding 1 m.
(e) PVC Cables
the cables shall consist of copper conductors, insulated with PVC

complying to B.S, 6004 :1969. Cables for three phase and single
phase circuits shall be 450 V/750V grade.
The current carrying capacity of each circuit shall be in accordance

with those indicated in I.E,E. Regulations and latest amendments and
shall be limited to the specified voltage drop.
All wiring shall be carried out by the loop-in system and the wiring shall

be enclosed in PVC conduits. Joints on connectors shall not be

allowed in any such cable length, except that connectors may be used
in accessible positions within fittings. The maximum number of cables
that may be accommodated in a given size of conduit is not to exceed
the limits given in the 15th Edition of the I.E.E. Regulations.
For copper cables sizes 6mm and above, compression type cable
connect~r/7Ugs shall be used for all cable terminations. Where
apparatus is fitted with tunnel type terminals, stranded cable
conductors shall be tinned solid for direct connection to such terminal.
If for any practical reason different termination method is used, prior
endorsement must be obtained from the representative of Engineer.
Connections to electric fixed equipment shall be by means of PVC
cables in conduits, with the final connection being made by PVC
covered pliable conduit, and suitable adaptor. A separate earth
continuity copper earth in accordance with lEE. Regulations and B.S.
6004 of not less than 2.5 mm shall be provided outside the flexible
tube and solidly connected at each tube termination.
(f) Flexible Cords
Flexible cords shall be flame retardant PVC sheathed with copper

conductors of 300v/500v grade to B.S. 6500. Minimum size of cord
shall be 1.5 mm.
4. FUSED SWITCHES, SWITCHFUSES AND ISOLATORS
(a) All fused switchgears and isolators shall be heavy duty type
conforming to the requirements of B.S. 5419. All contact are to fully
shrouded and are to have a breaking capacity of 35 KA.
(b) The fuse links for fuse-switches and switch fuses are to high
interrupting capacity, cartridge type conforming to B.S. 88, or B.S.
1361.
(c) Each switchgear shall be supplied in complete unit consisting of a

basic unit, and enclosure and fuse links. Adequate space shall be

provided in the enclosure for proper cable termination, otherwise cable

boxes shall be provided.
(d) The enclosure shall be of totally enclosed type, made of heavy gauge
sheet metal, adequately rust protected and finished in ename. An
earthing terminal shall be provided. The enclosure shall be suitable for
conduit, trunking and armored cable entries and also for connection to
busbar chamber from top or bottom. Frames sizes for the range of
switchgear shall be kept to a minimum.
(e) The switchgear shall be of quick-made and quick break type and the
switching operation shall independent of the speed of the manual
operation. An interlocking device shall be provided such that the front
cover of the switchgear cannot be opened when it is at the ‘ON’
position.
Similarly it shall not be possible to close the switch with the door open,
except that provision shall be made for authorized persons to defeat
the mechanical interlock for test purposes, and close the switch with
the door in the open position.
(f) Insulation material used shall be of non-ignitable type. The contacts

shall be self aligning so that the contact pressure can be maintained at
all times. All live parts shall be adequately shielded from from the front
of the unit but easily accessible for maintenance by using a tool.
(g) The ‘ON’ and ‘OFF’ position of all switches and isolators shall be
clearly indicated by a mechanical flag indicator or similar device.
(h) Switch and isolator operating handles shall be retractable into the unit
when the switch is either the ‘ON’ or ‘OFF’ position.
(I) In T.P. & N. fused switches or switch fuses units bolted neutral links
are to be fitted. For single pole and neutral switch fuses and isolators,
the neutral conductor is to be taken through a bolted link. Breaking the
neutral conductor is to be taken through a bolted link. Breaking the
neutral conductor, either with linked or non-linked switch will not be
permitted.
(j) Where mounted externally or otherwise specified, weatherproof

enclosure shall be provided.
(k) Unless otherwise specified, switches shall be to utilization categories

AC-22 for general application and AC -23 for electrical motor circuit.
5. BUSBAR CHAMBER
(a) The busbar chamber shall be constructed incompliance with B.S. 5486
Part 1, 1977 with full neutral consisting of electro-tinned, hard drawn
copper busbar of appropriate size insulated by porcelain supports or
other approved insulation material spaced at 600 mm intervals. The
enclosure shall be made of 2 mm thick mild steel and, epoxy powder
paint finish to B.S. 4800.
(b) The busbar chamber shall be of metalclad, air insulated, totally

enclosed type. The length of the busbar chamber shall be sufficient to
accommodate all switchgear connected to it without staggering one
above another. Space shall be provided for future installation of
switchgear when specified in the specification or drawings.
(c) The front cover and end plates of the enclosure shall be removable
and normally held in position by captive, non-metallic screws.
(d) Busbar and busbar connection shall comply with B. S. 159.
(e) Busbars shall be so arranged that all conductors can be brought onto
the bus without undue bending. Each busbar shall be coloured in one
position or labeled to indicate the phase to which it is connected.
(f) Switchgear shall be coupled to the busbar chamber by means of

proper galvanized connection flanges or conduit couplers and male
bushes.
(g) Conductors between the bus bars and switchgear shall be copper
cable with cross sectional area not less than that of the outgoing cable
from the switchgear.
(h) The busbar chamber shall be fabricated by a reputable manufacturer

and shall be fully type tested by ASTA for with stand capacity of 50 KA
for 3 second. Locally made busbar chambers are acceptable provided
ASTA certificate is available.
6. CABLE TRAY AND CABLE LADDER
(a) Cable tray are to be of a perforated pattern 1.6 mm minimum mild

steel with returned edges and hot dipped galvanized overall.
(b) Trays shall be supported from the soffit of structural slabs and beams
by rods not less than 6 mm dia.
(c) Tray supports shall be spaced according to the number and size of
cables being carried on the tray, but nowhere shall they be at greater
than 1.3 m intervals.
(d) Cables mounted on the trays shall be laid after installation of the tray
and spaced in accordance with the LEE. Regulations to avoid derating
of the cables, Cables shall be grooped in circuits and individually
clipped, cleated or tied at intervals of not less than 2 m lengths on
horizontal runs and 1 m lengths on vertical runs, using insulated type
or equal and approved fixing.
(e) Notwithstanding the minimum gauge of metalwork specified, gauges

shall be of sufficient strength to prevent sagging between supports.
(f) Cables leaving cable trays shall be installed properly without damage
to cables by cutting edges of trays and rubbers pads shall be inserted
to underside of cables,
(g) Trays shall not be bent for change in direction of run. Proper bends or
straight trays meeting at angle shall be emplyed at change of direction.
Cable trays shall be supported at either sides of junction.
(h) Where trays are exposed to the weather, they shall be coated with
epoxy resin before painting, PVC coating is not acceptable.
(i) Cable lader shall be fabricated from formed good quality hot dip
galvanized mild sheet steel of not less than 1 .60mm for sizes up to
150mm by 150 mm and not less than 2.00 mm thickness for larger

sizes and finished with two coat of gray enamel paint.
(j) All bends, crosses are to be purpose made, length of cable ladder
shell be jointed together by means of suitable fixing plate complete
with copper earth bonding terminal.
(k) Notwith standing details on contract drawings, where ever it is not

practical or acceptable to the CM, to enclose cables in conduit only.
Cable tray and ladder shall deemed to be included in all necessary
location.
7. CONDUIT SYSTEM
(a) Conduit
The contractor shall supply and install under neath slab all PVC
copper cables into conduit, unless otherwise specified herein or shown
on the Drawings.
Before any work on the installation is started, the contractor shall

prepare drawings of proposed conduit runs showing the number, size
and circuit
reference of all conductors to the satisfaction of engineer prior to the
commencement of works. The Engineer’s endorsement shall not
relieve the Sub-contractor from liability in respect to the provision of an
adequate number and/or sizes of conduits for the installation.
All conduits and fittings used in the installation, flexible conduits, shall
be PVC high impact class, screwed.
The minimum size of conduit used in the installation shall be 20mm

diameter.
Separate conduits shall be provided for circuits at extra low voltage.
Inspection-type and non-inspection type conduit bends, elbows and

tees shall not be permitted.
Conduit system shall be electrically and mechanically continuous and

watertight after installation. They shall be arranged, wherever possible,

to be self draining to conduit outlet points for equipment. The system
when installed, and before wiring, shall be kept plugged with wooden
plugs.
All conduit and conduit fittings shall be erected complete and swabbed
through with approved drawtapes and absorbent cloths before any
cables are installed. The swabbing operation shall be carried out to the
satisfaction of the engineer or his authorized representative.
AU surface conduits shall be run in a vertical or horizontal direction.

Diagonal runs shall not be permitted. The conduits shall be secured to
the surface by means of heavy spacing saddles fixed with brass
screws.
On straight runs, 20mm and 25 mm dia. Conduits shall be supported
by not less than one saddle every 900mm and conduit above 25 mm
dia. Shall be supported by not less than one saddle every 120 mm in
addition to any support provided by structures, boxes, or fittings etc. In
all cases bends shall be supported by wo saddles fitted as near to
either side of the bend as practicable.
• All bends in conduit shall be formed on site by bending machines,

• Runs between draw-in boxes shall not have more than two right
angle bends on their equivalent and the length of such runs shall be
limited to 10 m to permit easy draw-in of cables.
In concealed conduits system all adaptable boxes for accessories and

draw-in boxes shall be installed such that the outer rim of the box in
flush with the finished surface of the wall.
In concealed conduit systems where flush type distribution boards are

installed, a separate 20mm conduit for each spare way, shall be
installed from the distribution board to a convenient point in the wall
near the ceiling and shall be terminated in a common B.S. adaptable
flush type box.
• All conduits shall be entirely separated from other piping services

and no circuit connections shall be permitted between the conduits
and such pipes.

• Conduits and outlets fixed in area where there is water proofing to

building shall be installed with no damage to the water proofing.
• Where a conduit crosses expansion joint, special arrangement shall
be made to allow relative movement to occur on either side of the
expansion joint. The circuit protective conductor shall have a cross-
sectional area rated to suit the largest live conductors draw into the
conduits in accordance with the IEEE. Wiring Regulation.
The maximum number of cables permitted in one conduit shall be in
accordance with the lEEE. regulation.
• All cables used in conduit installation shall have copper conductors

and shall be PVC- insulated. All cables shall be of 450/750v grade
unless otherwise specified.
Each conductor inside the conduit run shall be of one continuous

length. Joints in a conductor in any part of a run shall not be permitted
unless directed by the representative of the Engineer.
Where flexible metallic conduits are fixed to the rigid conduits this shall
be achieved by means of either male or female adaptors terminating at
a B.S. or adaptable box. The adaptors shall be of brass, sweated or
screwed onto the flexible conduit.
Where conduit systems are installed exposed in weather, all fittings

used shall be installed in such manner that each is water-tight.
8. MCB AND MCCB DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
(a) MOB Distribution Boards
• MOB Distribution boards shall comply with and be type tested to

B.S. 5486:Part 12. Consumer units shall comply with and be type
tested to BS 5486:Part 13. Rated Voltage shall be 220 V. single
phase or 380 V three phase. Rated frequency shall be 50Hz. The
MOBs, MOB distribution boards and consumer unit shall be from
the same manufacturer.
Enclosure and doors for Mcb distribution board shall be be constructed

from sheet steel having a thickness of not less than 1.0 mm and store

enameled to a light, grey finish otto the nearest manufacturers’

standard colour, The MOB distribution boards shall be of robust
construction and suitable for indoor application in commercial and light
industrial situation with a degree of protection not less than lP 30.
Conduit knock-outs shall be provided in top, bottom and both sides.
Hinged enclosure doors are to be fitted with ball catch or similar
approval.
MOB distribution boards shall be of two types. Viz. type 1 and type II.
Type I MOB distribution boards shall be suitable for accommodating
single-pole MOB Sonly while type Il MOB distribution boards shall be
suitable for accommodating, in any combination, single-pole and multi-
pole MCBs.
All type Il MOB distribution boards shall each be provided with mould-
case, triple-pole and neutral incoming switch disconnector having
rating not less than that of the supply side protection device.
The black plate assembly shall be of sheet steel of substantial

thickness and attached to the back of the distribution board enclosure
for mounting of MOBs and switches.
The metal front plate assembly shall be of sheet steel and shall be
finished to the same colour as the distribution board enclosure. The
front plate shall be screwed on the enclosure, making the assembly
suitable for both surface and flush mounting. The front plate shall be
affixed with labels for circuit identification.
All current carrying parts of the distribution board such as busbars.

neutral and earthing terminal, incoming cable terminal etc. Shall be of
copper and shall be electro-tinned.
The single pole and neutral busbars for type I MOB distribution boards
shall have current ratings of not less than 100A while type II MOB
distribution boards shall have triple-pole and neutral busbars rated at
not less than 200A. The configuration of the busbars, busbar supports
and mounting arrangements shall be type tested and certified for a
short time withstanding current of not not less than 6 KA for 0.2
second at a Voltage of not less than 380V.

• Blanking-off plates shall be supplied for spare circuit for all

distribution boards.
• AU distribution boards shall be provided with line, neutral and

earthing terminal for the incoming cables. There shall be one
neutral and one earthing terminal for each outgoing MCB way.
Outgoing MOBs shall be connected to busbars by means of bolted

joints. Plug in type of current carrying contacts shall not be accepted.
Al) boards shall be of the same manufacture as the MCB’s installed

therein.
Space shall be provided for the future accommodation for 20%
additional circuit brakers in all distribution boards, All necessary
busbars, studs and and neutral bar ways shall be allowed.
Circuit schedules shall be provided and installed behind a prespex

sheet on the inside of distribution board door, giving in English and
Indonesian for the following information
- Distribution board designation

- Rating of all circuit breakers
- Size of all cables
- Type and location of circuit load
(b) MCCB Distribution Board
The design, construction and testing specifications of the distribution

boards shall comply with BS 5486 :Part I and suitable for use on 380 V
(3 phase) 50 Hz supply. All MCCB distribution boards shall each be
provided with a moulded case isolating switch having a current rating
not less than that of the supply side protective device. The moulded
case isolating switch shall meet the relevant requirement of British
Standard.
The enclosure and door of MCCB distribution boards shall be

constructed from sheet steel having a thickness of not less than 1.5
mm, rust proffed and baked enameled to a light grey finish or to the

manufacturer’s nearest standard colour. Removable gland palte shall

be provided on the top and bottom. The construction shall be of robust
design, capable of withstanding the mechanical, electrical and thermal
stresses under all working conditions including fault conditions. The
enclosure shall have an index of protection not less than lP3O. The
hinged door are to be fitted with ball catch locks or similar approved.
MCCB distribution boards shall be provided with triple-pole and neutral

copper busbars of rating not less than that of the supply side protective
device subject to a minimum of 250 A. All busbars shall be of the hard
drawn copper and shall be electro-tinned. Neutral busbars shall be of
the same cross section area as the phase busbars, and shall have
adequate number of terminals for all out going circuits including spare
ways.
The configuration of the bus bars, busbar support and the busbar
mounting arrangement shall be type tested and certified to a short-time
withstanding current of not less than 14 KA in the case of boards with
busbar rating 225A or above, or the prospective short circuit current
which can occur at the point of installation whichever is the largest for
0.2 second at a voltage of not less than 380 volts.
Outgoing MCCBS shall be mounted on both sides of the busbars. The

connection between the MCCBS and the phase busbars, shall be by
means of copper tapes and bolted joints. Plug-in type of current
carrying contacts shall not be accepted.
Every distribution board shall be provided with a external earthing

terminal for connection to the main earthing terminal. In addition multi-
terminal connector shall be provided within the distribution board for
connection of protective conductors of all outgoing circuits including
spare ways.
Each distribution boards shall be provided with spare ways for future
expansions. Each spare way shall be blanked off with a suitable
blanking plate having a finish comparable to that of the distribution
board.

9. SWITCHGEAR
(a) Switchgear shall include all metal clad switches and circuit breakers
 Miniature circuit breaker (MCB)

 Moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB)
 Residual Current circuit breaker
 Fuse switches
Switch Fuse
Switches
Changeover switch
Automatic transfer switch
(b) The switchgear shall be Triple Pole with neutral (TPN), Single Pole
with Neutral (SPN), Double Pole (DP) or Triple Pole with Switched
Neutral (TPSN).
For DP and TPSN, the neutral pole shall make first and break last, and
shall only be used when specified. Switchgear shall be of surface
mounting or flush mounting type suitable for switchboard installation as
per specified:
(c) All switchgear shall have ratings as specified and carry continuosly,
make and break the rated current without any overheat or damages.
(d) Switchgear shall be dust and vermin-proof. For outdoor application the
switchgear shall be inlockable weather proof enclosures complete with
3 sets of keys. For applications in damp, wet or humid area such as
pump room, chiller plant room etc., damp-proof and flash-proof type
shall be used.
(e) All switchgear shall be constructed to prevent tampering with the

protection device, altering trip point or time delay settings. Switchgear
shall be provided with mechanical interlocking device so as to prevent
the closing of switchgear when the door is opened and the opening of
the door when switchgear in ‘ON”. All switchgear shall be externally
lockable.

(f) All switchgears shall have a quick-make and break action suitable for
both AC and DC application. With the exception of MCCB, MCB and
ELCB which are totall~r erctc~ed~ switchgear shall be completed with
removable phase barrier contact shrouds, and arcquenching devices.
All switchgear shall equipped with spring accelerating mechanism to
ensure positive ‘on’ and ‘off’ and ‘trip’ shall be perrnantely provided.
The front operating handles of switchgear (except circuit breaker) Shall
be chrome palted, extensible and not protruding more than 75mm from
the cover.
(g) Surface-mount metal clad switchgear shall have a casing constructed

of a least 2mm heavy gauge sheet metal. The door shall have lipped
edges and neoprene gaskets and be completed with hinge, chrome
plate handle, and ball catches. Screws shall be captive type. Loose
screw will not be allowed, The switch casing shall be hot-dipped
galvanized (at least 2 layers) or cleaned, degreased, prime coated for
anti-corrosion before painting.
Externally the switchgear shall be finished with gloss grey paint and
internally in matt white paint. All paint shall be synthetic enamel and air
drying type. For plush mounting type, the finishes shall be same and
uniform as the cubicle and other components.
(h) Earth terminal shall be provided for all metal clad switchgear. All
hinged or removable doors shall be earthed by flexible earth tape to
the earth terminal.
(i) Parallel operation of switchgear as a single unit is not allowed.
10. MINIATURE CIRCUIT BRAKER (MCB)
(a) All miniature circuit breaker (MCB) shall be of triple-pole or single-pole

and conform to BS 3871 Part 1. The MOB shall have the tripping
classification of type 2, except for 5 amp which shall be either type 2 or
type 3.
(b) The body and base of the units are to be moulded bakelite, or similar
material, and the units are to be sealed after assembly.

(c) The load handling contacts are to be silver/tungsten and the contacts
and operating mechanism so designed as to give a wiping action both
at make and break.
(d) The breaker operating mechanism is to be of the trip-free type so

designed to prevent the load handling contacts from closing on fault,
(e) Circuit protection against overload and fault conditions is to be

provided by means of thermal-magnetic or thermal-hydraulic device
designed to give thermal operation on overload and
magnetic/hydraulic operation under fault conditions.
(f) Miniature circuit breakers shall comply and be type tested to B.C.
3871. The followings is the minimum requirements for short circuit
duties:
- Single pole breaker 5KA
- Triple pole breaker 8KA
(g) MCB with current carrying contacts of plug-in type shall not be
acceptable
(h) Cable terminals of the MCBs shall be at top and bottom of the unit with
access from the front and suitable for terminating the size of solid or
stand conductor in accordance with table 6 of BS 3871:Part1.
(i) Positions of the breaker operating dolly are to be clearly indicated for
‘ON’ and ‘OFF’.
(J) All cable and busbar terminations shall be sweated and tinned prior to
connection to M.C.B. terminals.
11. MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKER (MCCB)
(a) General
MCCBs shall be four-pole, triple pole or double pole, independent
manual closing air brake type they shall be totally enclosed in moulded
casing formed from an insulating material. The construction of the

casing shall be capable of with standing the appropriate rated short

circuit current and reasonably rough use without fracture or distortion.
The moulded casing shall have protection not less than lP3O.
MCCBs shall comply with and the type tested to BS 4752: Part 1.
(b) Operation Characteristic
MCCBs shall have thermal-magnetic tripping mechanism giving a

fixed, stable, inverse time-current characteristic shaD be such that:
• The time delay on over load tripping shaH be inversely

proportional to the over currents up to a threshold value of
approximately 7 times the rated current.
• There shall be no intentional time-delay on overcurrent tripping
due to short circuit or heavy overcurrents exceeding the threshold
value.
(c) Performance characteristic

MCCBs shall be certified, according to BS 4752 : part 1, to have the
following performance characteristic:
Rated short circuit braking capacity not less than 5OKA for use in main
switchboard or indicating in drawing and 22 KA for lateral sub main
installation or the prospective fault current at the point of installation
switch ever is greater. MCCB short circuit performance shall be
minimum category P-i.
12. FUSE SWITCH
(a) Fuse switch shall be metal clad and type-tested in accordance with
Table VI of B.S. 5419:1977 The rated fused short-circuit current shall
be 50 KA.
(b) Fuse switch shall be of continous duty and shall be capable of closing
onto and remained closed on a fault without overheating and damage.
(C) Fuse link shall be high rupturing capacity cartridge type to BS 88.

rewire able fuse is not permitted to be used.
(d) Live contact shall be shielded from the front so that fuses can be
replaced without damage.
(e) Fuse switch control of motors circuit shall be of AC23 category.
13. SWITCHFUSE
(a) Switch shall be metal clad and type-tested in accordance with table VI
of B.S. 5419: 1977. The rated fused short-circuit current shall be
5OKA.
(b) Switch fuse shall be of continuous duty and shall be able to be closed
onto and remained closed on a fault without overheating or damages.
(c) Fuse link shall be high rupturing capacity cartridge type to BS 88.
rewirable fuse is not permitted to be used.
(d) Live part shall be shielded from the front so that fuse can be replaced
safely.
(e) Switch fuse for control of motors circuit shall be of AC 23 category.
14. SWITCHES
(a) Switches shall be metal clad, type-tested in accordance with Table VI

of B.S. 5419: 1977 suitable for surface mount. The rated fused short-
circuit current shall be 50 KA.
(b) Switches shall be of continuous duty and shall be capable of closing

onto remaining closed on a fault without overheating or damages.
15. CONTRACTORS
(a) Contractors shall be electromagnetically controlled, double aft-break.

four-pole, triple-pole or single-pole as required. They shall comply with

and be tested to B.S. 5424: Part 1.
(b) Unless otherwise specified contractors shall be of utilization categories

AC-i for general application and AC-3 for motor circuits.
(c) The rated operational voltage shall be 380 + 6% volt, 3 phase. 50 hz,
or 220 + 6% volt, single phase, 50 Hz. The rated power and quantities
of the contactors shall be as indicated on the drawings.
(d) Both the mm and auxiliary contacts shall be rated for uninterrupted
and intermittent duty. The main contacts of the contactors shall be
silver or silver-faced.
(e) Two spare sets of NC and NO contacts shall be provided in addition to
the contacts used.
16. AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH
(a) The automatic transfer switch shall be a twin unit consisting of two 4-
pole contractors (1 NC & I NO) in compliance with BS, 5424 :1977 or
lEO 15-1 2 nd Edition 1970.
(b) Automatic transfer switch for load transfer between normal and
generator supply shall be with double relay control. On detection of the
failure of the mains supply by the rated voltage from the emergency
generator by the voltage sensing relay, the contractor shall be
automatically changed over.
(c) All contactors shall be enclosed and ventilated metal casing; arcing
shield or suitable are quenching device shall be provided to minimize
and confine arcing; contact surface shall be of sintered alloy or other
suitable metal.
(d) The contractors shall be of category AC-3 and have adequate

breaking capacity at rated Voltage.
(e) The solenoid coil shall be rated at continuos rating complying with B.S.
764: 1954 and suitable for 220 V single phase 50Hz system.

(f) The twin unit shall be both electrically and mechanically interlocked to
prevent the normal and emergency sources prom parallel operation.
(g) Indicating light showing to with source the switch is connected shall be
provided.
(h) Spare voltage free auxiliary contact shall be provided, minimum 2NC
and 2N0 for each contractor unit.
17. BUSBAR CHAMBER
(a) Bus bar chambers with rated operational currents above 400 A shall
be type tested to a short time current capacity equivalent at last to that
of the incoming switchgear and type tested to the rated operational
current.
(b) A bus bar chamber shall contain 4 sets of fully sized, hard drawn
copper bus bars electro-tinned and supported on epoxy resin or other
approved insulators. The bus bar chamber shall be totally enclosed
and manufactured from sheet steel suitable rust proved and painted or
hot dip galvanized. The front cover and end plates shall be removable
and normally held in position by non ferrous metal screws.
(c) Each bus bar shall be colored to indicate the phase to which it is
connected. Coloring shall comprise a band of paint in one position on
the shall not be painted throughout its length.
(d) Items of switchgear or associated equipment shall be connected or

jointed to a busbar chamber by means of properly designed
connection flanges having similar material and finish of the bus bar
chamber, or by means of conduit couplers and bushes to the
satisfaction of the Engineer.
(e) Interconnection cables between a busbar chamber and other items of

switchgear or associated equipment shall be copper conductors and
shall be sized in accordance with B.S. 5486: Parts 1 and 2 or the lEE
Wiring regulation.
18. CONTROL WIRING

All wiring shall be arranged in a regular manner with bends set at 90o and
securely held in position with suitable clips and where convenient shall be
installed in the up right and/or backstays.
Meter wiring for the switchboard shall be carried out in PVC insulated
cable of not less than 1.5mm2. All meters wiring shall be of similar colour
to those of respect ~ vebusbars to which connections are made. The cable
terminations shall be made with approval lugs.
Wiring shall be carried out in such a manner as to make circuits and

connections easily traceable. Cable marking ferrules shall be used at each
terminators. Terminal shall be designated in an approved manner.
SECTION IX - FINAL SUBCIRCUIT WIRING
1. SCOPE OF WORK

This section out the requirement, standards, workmanship and the extent
of work in relation to the supply, installation of electrical accessories, light
fitting, wiring and switching etc.
2. WIRING SYSTEM
Concealed conduit wiring system shall be generally adopted throughout

the installation except in services plant areas, inside false ceilings as noted
in drawing where surface conduit wiring shall be used.
The specification of conduit installation is the same as that stipulated in

above mentioned relevant clauses of this specification.
3. LIGHTING
(a)General
All light fittings shall be manufactured by a reputable lighting

manufacturer and shall bear the registered trade mark.
All light fittings be as indicated on the light fittings schedule. Fittings by
alternative manufacturers my be considered provided that the
performance and quality are the same or higher than the specified
ones and shall be subject to the acceptance by Engineer and shall
comply to the following.
Luminaries shall be well constructed and shall comply with the

requirements of BS4533 and be choses to suit the conditions under
which it will be operate. They shall be suitable for operation on 220
volt, single phase 50 Hz supply.
(b) Fluorescent Fittings
All fluorescent lighting fittings shall be installed complete with tubes,

control gear, lamp holders and accessories suitable for operation on
220 volts, single phase, 50Hz supply. The housting shall be
manufactured from best quality mild sheet steel. All control gear, wiring
and accessories shall be houses completely inside the metaNiousing.
The entire housing shall be specially treated to prevent rust and
carrosin.
All ballasts shall be naturally cooled polyester filled type with class a
insulation complying with BS 2818: 1981.
All starters shall comply fully with BS 3772 :1981. The canister shall be
made of electrically safe and non-corrosive material capable of
withstanding high temperatures. A ceramic disc type radio interference
suppression capacitor shall be fitted internally to each canister, waxed
paper and foil type capacitors will not be accepted. All capacitors shall
comply fully with BS 4017 : 1979 and shall be suitable to correct power
factor to not less than 0.85 lagging.
All fluorscent tubes shall be of the be-pin energy saving, incompliance

with BS 1853 and have a rated life of not less than 7500 hours. They
shall be of the quick-start pattern shall operate at a colour temperature
of 3500 K unless otherwise specified.
All fluorescent lamps except those under dimmer control will be the
energy saver (high efficiency) type with the following minimum
maintained lumen output (after 2000 hours operation).
- 600 mm = 18 watt, 1200 lumen.

- 1200 mm = 36watt, 2500lumen.
Special for all l44 (lobby, colour corrected lamps refer to incandescent
fluorescent lamps similar to Philips colour 54)
(c) Special requirements for outdoor Luminaires Outdoor Luminaires shall

be able to withstand the weather. Metal work should be protected
against corrosion, and lumnaire parts which have to removed for
access to the interior should be properly gasketed to restrict the
entrance of moisture and dirt. Stirrup mounting and similar parts shall
be heavily galvanized and bolts shall either be made of stainless steel
or be galvanized, and bolts shall either be made of stainless steel or
be galvanized.
The adjustment nuts and bolts of the luminaires that wifl be mounted
high on buildings or coloumns shall be captive to prevent luminaire
mounted at high position dropping. The luminaires installed in such

locations that are within hand reach shall bestrongly contructed, fitted
with an impact resistant transparent or diffusing cover, an shall have
secret key fixings for the cover to the body of the luminaires. Where
necessary, wire quards shall be fitted over the cover to give extra
protection.
(d) Bulkhead Luminaire
Bulkhead luminaire shall have substantial front cover secured by

captive screws. The glass to metal joint in luminaire shall be water
tight of 1P23. The interior of the’ium~naire shall be finished in white
vitereous enamel.
Incoming conduits shall be laid so that no moisture can drain towards
the luminaire. Any spare outlet shall be plug to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
(e) Gas Discharge Luminaire
Luminaires for gas-discharge lamps, such as fluorescent, mercury

vapour, sodium vapour etc., Wich utilize chokes at part of the circuit
shall be complete with capacitors of sufficient capacitance to ensure
that the overall power factor of the lighting circuit does not fall below
0,85 lagging. The control gear shall be placed as near as possible to
the discharge lamp it serves.
(f) Suspended lamps and Light Fittings
Where a lamp or light fitting is suppended other than by means of a

rigid pendant, it shall be connected by means of a flexible cord, except
other’Mse as directed. A sample of the method of suspension of lamps
shall be demonstrated on site for the approval of the representative of
the Engineer before completion.
(g) Lamp holders
No lamp holders shall be connected so that the voltage between its

terminals may exceed the voltage for which the lamp holder is
designed. Lamp holders shall not be connected in series across
voltage grater than 250 volts.

A lamp holder shall not be used for the connection of a lamp of

wattage grater than 200 Watt for normal bayonet lamp holder.
Any lamp holder may be deemed to be an all-insulated lamp holder for
the furpose of trisrule if there is no exposed metal of either lamp holder
or lamp after the lamp has been inserted.
If a bayonet lamp holder is so constructed that terminals move with the

connect plunger, connection to such lamp holder shall not be made by
other than plexible cord.
Every lamp holder of the Edison screw type, other than those
incorporated in portable appliances, shall be connected to the supply
so that the neutral conductor of the supply is not connected to the
centre contact.
4. INSTALLATION OF LIGHT FITTINGS
(a) Tube Pendant
Tube pendants shall comprise a dome cover and a piece of screwed

steel conduit of suitable length to give the required mounting height of
the lumina ire. A lock nut shall be provided to bear against the conduit
entry of the luminaires.
(b) Cable Enclosed Luminaire
Cables within an enclosed type luminaire shall be properly protected

against damage due to the excessive heats generated by the lamp
within the Luminaire.
Protection shall be by means of sleeving the the insulation of the

cables with fibre glass or other equivalent heat resistant insulating
materials. The sieves shall be provided for all cables within the
luminaire and shall extend to a distance of 150 mm outside the
luiminaire.
Alteratively protection shall be by means of using heat resisting cables

selected in accordance with the lEE Wiring Regulations.

(c) Painting of exposed metal part and conduit pendants
Metal parts such as cover plates for adaptable boxes, blanking plate
for any boxes and conduit pendants, etc. Shall be painted white or a
suitable colour to match the interior finish of a particular location.
(d) Joints and Connections in Light Fittings
no joint or connection shall be made within a light fitting, except in

space incorporated therein for the purpose. Any cables used for wiring
within a light fitting shall be of a type suitable for use at the operating
temperature within the fitting.
(e) Lamps Near Flammable Material
Every lamp which is near flammable material shall be suitable shielded

by a reflector guard or enclosure. Flammable shades shall not be used
in such a manner that they are liable to come in contact with any lamp.
Nitro-cellulose base material shall not be used for shades, reflectors,
or candle tubes, or in any situation near a lamp.
(f) Light Fitting in Areas with False ceilings
Light fitting in false ceiling shall be self supported by suspension rods

or chains, Wiring from ceiling box to fittings shall be in PVC/PVC
Cables. The Subcontractor shall check the false ceiling pattern with
the Main Contractor and coordinate with the fire services Sub-
contractor and Air conditioning SubContractor before installation of the
fittings.
5. ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES
(a) General
Electrical accessories shall be generally in white colour, complying

with relevant BS.

(b) Socket Outlet
Socket outlet shall be 3 pin, 13A or 15A as shown on drawings. All

socket outlets shall be switched or non-switched, shuttered type
complying with B.S. 1363 and 546 respectively.
(c) Fuse Connection Unit
Fuse connection unit shall comply with BS 1363 and provided with 2A
to 13A cartridge fuse link having earthing facilities for connections to
the metal work of current appliances being fed.
(d) Appliance Control Switches
Appliance control switches shall be D.P. or T.P. flush pattern, all

insulated, white colour with pilot light having the rating of 20A/30A and
shall comply with BS 3676. Proper words shall be engraved onto the
plate to designate the appliance served, such as air conditioner’,
‘exhaust fan’ etc.
(e) Cable Connection Unit
The cable connection unit shall be flush mounted type with terminal
blocks suitables for fixing onto the BS 4662 box. PVC insulated and
sheathed cable with circuit protective conductor shall be used from the
unit to the appliance served.
(f) Switches for controlflng lighting circuit shall be rocker operator to
B.S.3676 and rated at 10 apms. AC. circuit load shall not exceed 8
amps. For tungsten type lighting fittings and 6 amps. For fluorescent
type lighting fittings.
(g) Switches
Switches mounted outdoors, or in positions where they may be

exposed to rain or water, shall have watertight enclosures with IP5A in
accordance with BS5390. Alternatively they may be mounted inside
watertight enclosures but shall be subject to the statisfaction of

Engineer.
(h) Time Switches
Time switches shall be mains operation and comprise a self-starting

synchronous motor, a main spring of clock mechanism which drives
the out put spindle carrying a switch operating dial, The clock
mechanism shall be controlled by an escapement mounted
horizontally to give accurate time keeping. Switch contacts shaft be
coated with silver cadmium oxide.
The time control unit shall be plug-in type and shall permit instant
removal and replacement without disturbing the wiring. The unit shall
be supplied complete with a socket block which shall be permanently
secured and wired into position.
The unit shall be fitted with a manual 3-position (ON-AUTO-OFF) lever

by means of which the next “ON” or “OFF” operation can be preset
without disturbing the normal automatic switching sequence. The level
shalt be of latching type and shall remain in either “ON” or “OFF”
position, unless it is reset to “auto”.
The time switch shall be off spring reserved type to maintain the clock
mechanis to continue to function of power supply, the motor shall
restart and quickly charge the spring to fully charged condition.
The time switch shall have a viewing window in the front cover for
visual checking of the moving mechanism.
6. PARTICULAR FOR THIS PROJETCT
(a) The Electrical Contractor shall supply and install a complete final sub-
circuit wiring system including commissioning and testing of the work
as shown on drawing and stipulated in this specification.
(b) Method of wiring

The method of wirings installation in the areas will be as follows:
Surface Conduit Wirings :

- Transformer rooms
- Switch rooms
- Pump rooms
PVC/PVC Surface Wiring
- All areas where there are false ceiling in office areas. Cable shall be
attached to messenger Wires.
- Concealed Conduit Wirings (Flexible Connection or special

arrangement must be installed at building expansion joints)
- All area with the expection of the areas as specified in items above
(surface conduit wirings)
- All public area, staircase.
- All toilets
- Security alarm and remote control system.
(c) The position of each light fittings as shown on the Drawings are for
guidance only, the Electrical Contractor shall check the Architectural
Drawings (or Reflected Ceiling Plan) for the exact location off each
light fittings before the conduit wirings.
(d) The Electrical Contractor shall also supply and install a complete final
sub-circuit wiring system throughout each office floor as indicated on
the layout plan. This include all the lighting points, power socket
points, connection points and spare unit etc. as shown drawings.
(e) Provision of TPN MCB distribution board shall be provided for each
office floor. Sample of distribution board should be submitted for
approval prior to ordering.
(f) The Contractor is required to take measurement of the loading on all

sub-mains circuits (excluding final sub-circuit for lighting and small
power) Shortly after occupation. The results shall be indicated In the 0
& M manual. All the electrical accessories, such as lighting switches,
sockets, etc, must be of same colour throughout and be of the product
of the same manufactures.

SECTION X - EARTHING SYSTEM
1. EARTHING INSTALLATION
All metal work associated with the electrical installation but not forming fart
of a live conductor, including exposed conductive parts, shall be solidly and
effectively bonded and earthed in accordance with the latest edition of the
LEE. Wiring Regulations and the British standard codes of practive CP
1013.
A solid copper main earthing terminal of ample size shall provided at a

position near the main incoming switchboard for the connection of the circuit
protective cond1ict~rs, the main equipotential bonding conductors and the
earthing conductors to create the equipotential zone. The main earthing
terminal shall be connected to earth via an erathing terminal shall be
connected to earthing conductor to an earth electrode or a group of
electrodes.
Earth electrodes shall be in rods of mild steel inner core with a bonded hard
drawn copper selve of an approved type. The overall diameter of the rod
shall not be less than 12.7 mm and the thickness of the copper sleeve shall
not be less than 1 ohm. The minimum length shall be 2.4 m. Additional
lengths, whenever required, shall each be of I .2m, connected together by a
coupling. The penertrating end of the rod electrode shall be a hardened
steel point.
Electrodes shall be driven in to the ground within an earth pit. Only

approved tools, e.g. electric hammer or pneumatic hammer, shall be used
for their installation.

In case the earthing resistance achieved by bone rod is not sufficienctly low
for the purpose required, additional length or additional rods shall be driven
into the ground outside the resistance area of the other rods. A mutual
separation of 3,5m is required.
Earth resistance ~ 10 must be achieved.
2. CIRCUIT PROTECTIVE CONDUCTOR
Circuit protective conductors my be formed by a separate conductor/cable,

the metallic sheath or armoured of a cable, part of the same cable as the
associated live conductor, trunking or ducting, or the metal enclosure of the
wiring system. Flexible conduits, PVC conduits, the exposed conductive
parts of equipment shall not from part of the circuit protective conductors.
For every socket outlet7 a separate circuit protective conductor shall be

provided connecting the earth terminal of the socket outlet and that inside
the enclosure accommodating the socket outlet.
For every length of flexible conduit, PVC conduit, a separate circuit

protective conductor shall be provide inside the conduit to ensure the earth
continuity of the installation between the two ends of the conduit.
For wiring system using PVC insulated, PVC sheated cables, the circuit
protective conductor of every ring final circuit shall also be run in the form of
a ring having both ends connected to the earth terminal ar the origin of the
circuit.
Provision shall be made in an accessible position for disconnecting a

protective conductor from the main earthing terminal or the earth electrode
to permit testing and measurements of earthing resistance. No switching
device shall be inserted in a protective conductor.
All cables used protective conductors, including earthing conductors, main

equipotent ail bonding conductors, supplementary bonding conductors and
circuit protective conductors shall be identified by the color combination
“green and yellow”.
A bare conductors used as protective conductors shall be identified by the

application of tapes, sleeves or disc, or by painting with the same colour

combination.
3. RATING OF EARTHING CONDUCTORS AND BARS
The earthing system shall be earthed with conductors able to carry

maximum short-circuit currents.
4. EARTHING FOR OTHER EQUIPMENT
(a) Telephone Earths

The Telephone Company requires a separate earth for the telephone
system which shall be supplied and installed under this contract to the
approval of the perucnt~I and the Building Services Engineer.
(b) Earth System for Generators

the neutral point of the generator alternator and the casing shaH be
solidily also separated for lighting protection earthed, by means of a BC
connected to the generator earth pit as shown on the drawings.
(c) Earth system for board cast facility (separated)
(d) Earth system for IT Centre (Specified)
(e) Earth system for Bank Vault (Specified)
5. LABELLING
At the ear-thing terminal, a permanent label marked with the works

“SAFETY ELECTRICAL EARTH-DO NOT REMOVE” in English and
Indonesian shall be permanently attached to the final ear-thing leads
connection. In addition to the above label, a further label shall be attached
to the earth indicating the system to which the system belongs and the
number of pits involved, i.e. “NEUTRAL EARTH-PIT NO.20F 3”.
The size of lettering shall be 6mm and the laminations shall be green white

green.
6. PARTICULAR FOR THIS PROJECT
(a) The sub contractor shall supply, install, test, commission and set to
work an ear-thing system as shown on the drawings and specified
herein.
(b) Earth pits shall be provided by Main Contractor. The contractor shall
liaise with the main Contractor in determing the exact locations of the
earth pits on site.
(c) All switchboard shall be fitted with tinned copper earth bar over its entire
length to which the building main earth network shall be connected.
(d) All distribution boards shall be fitted with tinned copper earth bar over its
entire length to which the building main earth network shall be
connected.
(e) On completion of the earth bed installation, the ear-thing resistance

shaH be tested and the result shall be presented to the satisfaction of
supply Company and the Engineer.
(f) Equipotentiality must be achieved by means of bonding all circuits and

conductor on manner that reduces potential differences between
elements of the lighting protection system, metal installation, conductive
parts, electrical and IT, telecommunications installation at the facility.
(g) All grounding connections of copper to copper and copper to steel

conductors of 2,5 mm2 and large sized conductor shall be ex other mic
welded connection.

SECTION Xl - LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
1. GENERAL
The lighting protection system shall be installed generally in accordance

with British Standard Code of practice CP 326. and PUIPP (Peraturan
Umum Installasi Penangkal Petir).
2. SCOPE OF WORK
This section includes supply & install lighting head, down conductor,
earthing control, testing and repair during maintenance period of the
complete lighting system according to this specification and also the
arrangement of the permit from the~ authoritative body (safety department).
3. AIR TERMINATION
The mast shall be adequately supported on the Antenna of the building and
shall be sized to withstand wind velocities of up to 120km hour. Support by

means of guy ropes or similar will not be permitted.
The masts shall be made of fiberglass. The terminations shall be similar to

EF model LT or approved equivalent with adequate protection radius to
cover the entire building. The locations of the masts and terminations show
on the drawings are approximate only. The sub-contractor shall verify on
site the best location to cover the building from lighting strike. The top of the
mast shall be at least 6m above any highest point of roof.
4. DOWN CONDUCTORS
The sub-contractor shall supply and install down conductors in the location
shown on the Drawings.
The down conductor shall be of screened coaxial down cable similar to EF

or approved equivalent and shall be fixed at one metre centre and shall be
connected to the earth electrodes via test links.
The down cable shall be coaxial with one conductor placed coaxially with a
second conductor, each conductor placed conductor of 50mm of copper. I
The insulation medium between inner and outer conductor shall have a 1/50
microsecond impulse withstand not less than 209 KV.
The coaxial cables shall be located at least 600mm away from any other
cables. Manufacturer’s instruction shall be strictly adhered to during
installation.
5. TEST LINES
The sub-contractor supply and install test links in the down conductor. The
test links be of phosphor bronze and shall be located in an easily accessible
position for testing.
6. JOINTS AND BOND
No joints and bonds in the systems, except at test links, air termination shall

be allowed.
7. EARTH TERMINATION
Each down conductor shall be connected to an earth termination network.
Each of these terminations should have a resistance to earth not exceeding

2 ohms. The whole of the lighting protective system would have a combined
resistance to earth not exceeding 2 ohms before any bonding has been
affected to metal in or on a structure to services below ground.
Earthing points shall be as shown on the drawings.
8. TESTING
All tests all shall be carried out in accordance with the British Standard
Code of Practice OP 362 :1013.
All tests shall be carried out in presence of and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
9. TRENCHING
Trenching where required for running the lighting earth connection leads
shall be excavated to a depth of 1 meter.
The trench shall be back filled and compacted with earth to its original level.

SECTION XII - POWER FACTOR CORRECTION EQUIPMENT
1. GENERAL
The equipment shall comply with B.S. 1850, IEC 60831-1 (1996), IEC
60831-2 (1995) and the admissible ambient temperature shall be ranged
from 0°C to 45°C.
2. SCOPE OF WORK.
On the whole the scope of work will cover supply, install capacitor bank
complete with accessories material and testing commissioning.
3 CAPACITOR SPECIFICATION

The capacitor shall be dry type metal film capacitor and provided with and
adequate discharge circuit. The residual voltage shall be reduced to 50V or
less within one minute after the capacitor is disconnected from the source.
The capacitor losses shall be less than 0.5 watt/KVAr.

Insulation level 3KV rms/15KV erest standard voltage available 380 Volt to
525 volt. The dielectric shall be made of plastic film (polypropylene)
impregnated with a non PCB agent.
Capacitor liquid shall be inflammable and non-toxic.
The reactive power control relay shall be fully electronic and automatically
generate switching impulse to the contactors for increasing or decreasing
the capacitance to the circuit. An automatic discharge to earth mechanism
shall be incorporated.
The installation shall in clued a series of capasitors with automatic step

control and power factor sensing relay so that automatic p.f. regulation in
accordance to the PLN requirement is achieved.
The capacitor shall be installed and secured on rigid steel support.

Capacitor case shall be earthed.
The sub-contractor shall be responsible for applying to the power

companies for the necessary testing and acceptance of capacitor
installation on completion.
Complete installation shall be carried out accordance with the lEE
Regulation, 15th edition end to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
AU switchgear, capacitor bank shall be properly labeled. HRC fuses of

adequate rating shall be used to protect each step of the capacitor bank in
the circuit.

SECTION XIII - PAINTING, LABELLING AND FINISHING
1. GENERAL
To maintain all mechanical & electrical equipment easily, it shall to be

marked with painting, labeling or colour finishing.
2. SCOPE OF WORK

(a) Installation inside internal conditioned space, the external surfaces of all
equipment, fitting and services including supports, hangers and
brackets shall be painted.
(b) All sheet metal control cabinets, switchboards and contribution board
enclosures and similar shall be painted internally and externally.
(c) All surface to be painted shall be cleaned, prime coated, undercoated

and then finished with two finishing coats. Each coating (including
priming, undercoating and the first finishing coat) shall be allowed to dry
and shall be rubbed down before the next coat is applied. The minimum
thickness of each layer of paint shall be 50 micro-metre.
(d) The requirement for painting of all pipework, conduits etc, is in addition
to the colour coding or banding specified in this Specification.
(e) All fibreclass and plastic surfaces.
(f) Galvanized metal work installed in false ceilings, bulk head and vertical
ducts.
(g) Chrome plated and stainless steel surfaces.
(h) Bearing surfaces, slides, adjusting screws and any surface that is
required to be unpainted for the correct operation or adjustment of the
equipment.
3. PAINT MATERIAL
All plant and other preparation shall be non-poisonous, lead-free prepared

synthetic products of approved brand, conforming to the relevant British
Standard, brought onto the site ready mixed in manufacturer’s sealed
containers and used to the manufacturer’s specification.


conditions in which it shall be located, In particular, painting for generator

exhaust pipes shall be of head resistant type capable of with standing the
high exhaust gas temperature.
All paint used shall be of one approved manufacture, and finishes shall be
Before ordering any primer, under coat and finishing paint, the Sub-
contractor shall propose the color scheme to the satisfaction of the
Engineer.
Before ordering any painting materials, the Sub-contractor satisfy the

Engineer the type and manufacturer of all materials.
The Sub-contractor shall select all finishing and painting materials from
types suitable for the surfaces to which they are applied and for the
environmental conditions in each area.
4. PREPARATION OF SURFACES AND PRIME COATING
Metal surfaces shall be wire-brushed to remove loose rust and scale.

Castings shall be either ground smooth or alternatively filled with approved
filling compound and the rubbed to a smooth finish.
Steel plate and all rooled steel sections including brackets and support not
galvanized, shall be given an application of cold phosphating compound
before being prime coated with red zinc chromated primer. Steel pipes and
conduits delivered to the site unpainted shall be prime coated as specified
for steel plate.
All galvanized or zing coated steel surfaces and all non-ferrous surfaces
shall be given and application of PVB/Zinc chromate self-etching primer
before being prime coated as specified above.
Machinery, apparatus, equipment and fittings deliverd to the site already

prime or finish painted shall be thoroughly cleaned down.
5. FINISHES

Each finishing coat shall be of a different shade. The final coat shall be left
smooth, even and free from the visible brush marks and other defects.
For surfaces which shall operate below 9°C, the finishing coat shall be high
grade alkyd enamel.
Piping, cable enclosure and conduits shall be painted to a glass finish in

color or colors to satisfaction of the Engineer.
The entire ‘ength of piping, cable enclosures and conduit installed in the
following locations shall be painted :
 Plant rooms.
 Piping in trenches.
 Piping in the underground floors and in vertical ducts.
• Wherever exposed to the weather or to view.
All piping, cable enclosure and conduits installed in ceilings and similar
concealed spaces have the identification colour applied in bands spaced at
6 metre centres except that ground colour bands shall be provided adjacent
to branches, junctions, valves, floors and walls (both sides).
All supports, hangers and brackets, where associated piping or duct work is
to be finish painted shall be painted to gloss finish of colour black.
Machinery, apparatus, equipment and fittings (including equipment

delivered to site already painted) shall be painted to gloss finish in colour to
the satisfaction of the Engineer.
AU sheet metal control cabinets, switchboard and distribution board
enclosures and similar shall be painted inside and outside to a gloss finish.
6. LABELS
Inscription of labels and engraving shall be in both English and Indonesia

characters.
Labels shall be made of sandwich plastic material with white outer layers
and a block or red inner layer as required. Lettering shall be engraved on
the plastic material by cutting away one of the outer layers to the outline of
the required letters, exposing the inner layers underneath.

Labeles shall be fixed to switchgear and distribution board by screws.

Where drilling on tapping of the equipment is impracticable, approved
adhesive means my be used subject to prior endorsement of the Engineer.
The front plate of each switch socker or socket or control switch feeding an
essential circuit ao a fixed electrical appliance, such as water heater,
cooker, wall-mounted fan, exhaust fan, room cooler, etc., shall be engraved
according to the appliance being controlled. Detail of the inscription shall be
submitted to the Engineer for endorsement.
All instruments, gauges, indicators, control equipment, contractors, circuit

breakers, switches, starters, relays and cable terminals on switchboard, etc.
Shall be clearly labeled and identified with their associated function.

Lettering, shall not be less than 12mm high or otherwise required or
approved. Details of the exact lettering shall be as agreed with the Engineer
prior to manufacture
7. SCHEDULE OF COLOURS
The whole of the installation shall be fainted in accordance with the

following schedule:
Pipe works:
a. Identification - B.S. 1710 :1984
b. Color coding - B.S. 4800 1981
AU pipes etc. shall be identified in accordance with B.S. 1710: 1984.
Circumferential bands of standard ground colours shall not be less than

100mm wide on pipes up to 50mm nominal diameter. Supplementary colors
shall be displayed as bands not less than 25mm wide in the centre of the
ground color bands.
Where lettering is required it shall be painted in contrasting colors in

accordance with the standard, in block letters not less than 15mm high for

pipes up to 50mm nominal diameter, and in block letter not less than 40mm
high for larger pipes.
Identification bands shall be located where they ere clearly visible in each
room or compartment through which the pipe runs, and shall be placed at
centers not exceeding 6m.

nominal diameter, and 150 mm long on larger pipes.
Equipment shall be painted and color coded to BS 381C : 1980 as agreed

with the Engineer.
.

SEXTION XIV - FIRE STOP SYSTEM
1. FIRE STOP SYSTEM
Prevention and installation of Fire stop System must be done by the

specialist from that Product,
Prevention and installation of Fire stop System complete with material, such
as fire seal and supporter/complementary which must be procured, will have
a function to protect the cable or to prevent the fire spread through the
electric cable.
Places where the cable will pass through on every floor are electric and
telecommunication at office.
The requirements for the raw material/material of the fire stop system are
- Heat-resistant up to 1000 degree of Celsius within 2 hours,
- No Flame point.
- Flexible and there is no difficulty when changing or adding new
cable.
- All the materials have no characteristic to be dusty.
- Shock/tremble-proof/not cracked.
- Not consist of asbestos.
2. STANDARD AND REFERENCE

- CIass A1 DIN 4102 Sec.4
- IMO A 472 (XIII).
- BS476:4.
- IEC-311992.

SECTION XV - COMMISSIONING. TESTING AND MAINTENANCE
1. COMMISSIONING AND TESTING
A. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
1) Commissioning of the equipment must be carried out by the
Contractor together with experts from the relevant manufacturer or
supplier. Commissioning must also be coordinated with other work
disciplines.
2) Commissioning experts from the relevant Contractor must be
experienced and trained in their field. Qualifications of
commissioning experts must be submitted to MK / the Planner for
approval.
3) Testing of all installations must be carried out either in per-
area/part as well as a whole to indicate that the Contractor's work
has been carried out in accordance with the requirements in
technical specifications.
4) All equipments, including supervision personnel and other
personnel for commissioning must be prepared by the Contractor.
All equipments must be calibrated the accuracy and must be
approved by MK / the Planner prior to the commencement of
commissioning.
5) All the commissioning results must be recorded in test record
format. The Contractor shall submit testing procedures and test
records format to MK / the Planner for approval. At the completion
of commissioning and prior to final inspection and handover, the
commissioning results must be submitted in a form that has been
recorded (bounding) to MK / the Planner who have the authority to
witness the execution and commissioning procedures as required.
6) Testing shall follow the related PUIL, ISO or other standards, such
as the British Standard (BS) and the Australian Standard (AS).
7) All testings must be witnessed by MK / the Planner and, in the
circumstances to do routine / type test at the manufacturer, the
Contractor shall inform a minimum of 14 days in advance for that
purpose.
8) All equipment testing results must be bundled in a format
approved by MK / the Planner and submitted in triplicate (3).
The Contractor shall include in the tender all the costs associated
with commissioning and testing work including all works of repair
of damages that may occur when the testing is required and if
necessary re-testing. Such costs must also include the cost of
equipment for commissioning and testing.
B. CERTIFICATES AND COMMISSIONING DATA

1) The Contractor shall submit the test certificate, in triplicate (3) to
MK / the Planner that has been signed by the Contractor and
representatives of MK / the Planner who witnessed the testing.
2) The certificate submitted must show all data of test results
conducted to fulfill the requirements specified in technical
specifications, PUIL 2000 and other standards.
3) Test certificate must be a clear dated, numbered and reference to
any equipment in the test in terms of number series, chassis, or
other reference number from the manufacturer makers listed on
the equipment / machinery.
4) The Contractor shall submit to MK/ the Planner complete data
from all equipments and systems in the commission. Commission
data submitted must be in A4 or A3 format which the
commissioning format has been approved by MK / the Planner in
advance. Data submitted shall show the planning data to the data
at the time operated which the systems and equipment has been
pegged by commissioning expert personnel. Actually from system

after.
5) Immediately after the commissioning work is done, the Contractor
shall submit all complete data of commissioning results in an
agreed format to MK / the Planner for all equipments and systems
as stated in the technical specifications ini. mmediately.
C. FACTORY TEST
1) MK / the Planner has the right to review and examine the electrical
equipment which is in fabrication to ensure that the equipment is in
accordance with the standards and requirements as specified in
technical specifications. The electrical equipment requires tests to
be performed in the presence of MK / the Planner to prove that the
equipment meets the requirements of this specification. All costs
incurred in carrying out tests at the manufacturer must be included
in the cost of the Contractor.
2) The contractor is required to submit immediately to MK / the
Planner in writing, in 3 (three) triplicate, a list of all equipments both
local and imported which need to be inspected and tested are
witnessed by MK / the Planner prior to the equipment will be sent
to the project site.
3) Upon completion of manufacture, or prior to delivery to the project,
all intended device materials and equipments must be inspected
and tested before MK/the Planner. Tests are conducted in
accordance with the needs and requirements of MK / the Planner.
4) The Contractor shall be responsible and ensure that MK/the
Planner has been notified in writing at least a week before the date of
the test.
D. FIELD TEST

1) MK / the Planner has the power to inspect all works in progress,

once completed or partially completed and requires the contractor
to carry out tests to prove that all works performed including its
materials and installation, fully satisfactory and meets the
requirements of this specification.
2) After completing the electricity installation, or any part thereof, the
installation or part and all related equipment must be subject to the
relevant tests set out in PUIL-2000, IEC, British Standards, the
latest edition IEE Wiring Regulations, or AS 3017 "Electrical
Testing and Guidelines ", to prove the installation installed in
accordance with this specification.
3) Testing without the presence of MK / the Planner is deemed invalid
unless there is any prior official written notice from MK/the Planner
so that the contractor can proceed with the testing process.
4) The Contractor shall ensure that MK/the Planner is provided with
adequate facilities to carry out an inspection that all tests are
conducted in a safe manner and comply with all safety
requirements of prevailing laws and regulations.
5) There is no painting work of equipment until after being reviewed
by MK/the Planner.
6) The Contractor shall be fully responsible for his work schedule so
that the inspection and testing can be performed as specified and
the completion of work beyond the date specified in the schedule
will be deemed completed and ready to be handed over until after
all the inspections and testing carried out has been satisfactory
and good results.
7) MK / the Planner has the right to withdraw, in its sole discretion,
the requirements in relation to the examination of materials,
equipments and installation and testing witness on it. The
implementation of these rights by MK / the Planner will not in any

way reduce the contractor from the obligations to carry out tests
assigned to submit a test certificate.
8) If there are errors or defects that arise during the maintenance
period in one plantroom, its equipment or installation, MK / the
Planner has the right to ask the contractor to carry out further tests
to isolate errors or defects that are occurred and then prove that
the errors or defect has been repaired.
E. TEST ELECTRICAL WORK

The following test must be done:
1) Testing in accordance with PUIL 2000, AS 3017 or latest
edition IEE Wiring Regulations:
 Continuity test of grounding conductor (PE), including the main
condu ctor and additional equipotential bonding conductor
 Resistance test of grounding electrode.
 Insulation resistance Test
 Polarity Test.
 Operation of residual current devices (RCCD/ELCB)
2) Busbar test
3) The main panel and distribution Test
4) Protection relays test
Test execution method must be approved by MK/ the Planning
The Contractor shall give notice two (2) days prior to testing. Each test
must be witnessed by MK/the Planner. Test results must be submitted
to MK/the Planner in triplicate no later than 1 week after testing is
carried out.
F. GROUNDING CABLE CONTINUITY TEST

It is implemented in accordance with the directions on PUIL 2000 or AS
NZS 3017.

G. GROUNDING RESISTANCE TEST

NZS 3017
H. CABLE INSULATION RESISTANCE TEST

Using a 500 VDC megger equipment at:
- All installation cables
- All sub-distribution cables
- All distribution cables
I. POLARITY TEST
NZS 3017
J. TR MAIN PANEL TEST

1) This testing shall be done after the main panel is completely
fabricated, but before the incoming cable is connected
2) 2kV voltage test for 1 minute
3) Secondary Injection Test
4) Primary Injection Test
K. AFTER ALL INSTALLATIONS AND SYSTEMS

After all installations are completely installed the system has been and
implemented, it must be done testing witnessed by the Owner / MK and
the Planner a minimum of 1 week prior the notification in writing. The
cost of such testing and other shall be borne by the Contractor along
with the Minutes of Testing and Commissioning.
L. BEFORE THE INSTALLATION HANDOVER IN THE FIELD

Before the submission of the installation must be tested before the

project Owner / MK and the Planner with a maximum load capacity and
continuously for 3 x 24 hours.
If during the testing process took place occurred damages the
Contractor shall restore such in its original state as soon as possible
and over burden / responsibility of work executor.
2. LIGHTNING ROD INSTALLATION WORK
A. GENERAL
1) All materials, equipments and safe and reliable lightning protection
system components shall refer to the BS EN 50 164standard
2) All lightning rod and grounding work must be carried out by
specialist subcontractors who have expertise in their field and
minimum of 10 years experience.
B. SCOPE OF WORK
The scope of work of the contractor is the design, procurement,
installation and testing of protection systems / lightning rod and
grounding as set out in the drawings and technical specifications.
C. STANDARDS AND REFERENCES

Apart from changes in the contract documents, it refer to the latest
regulations and recommendations of:
• PUIL 2000 : General Regulations on Electrical Installation
- 2000
• SNI 03-7015-2004 : Indonesian National Standard
• IEC 62305 : Lightning Protection

• BS 7430 : Practical Guide for Grounding

• BS EN 50 164 : Lightning Protection Components Test
• BS 6651:1992 : Building Structure Protection against
lightning
D. MATERIAL
The main components of lightning protection system are:
• Termination water
• Down Conductor
• Clamps, Clips and Furseweld Exothermic connections Test Joints
• Earth Termination c/w earthing loops
E. INSTALLATION
1) The installation of all the conductors and components must be
correct, so that the work that has been already done does not
damage the appearance of the buildings, while still considering the
necessary checks and maintenance for such buildings stand.
2) All components must have adequate mechanical and electrical
characteristics and was chosen to achieve a minimum lifetime of 20
years. All materials must be prepared to obtain approval from
MK/the Planner.
3) Planning of lightning protection can not only ensure the protection
of buildings from the downward stroke only, but also flashes upward
into consideration the height position of the building. The design
must have the principle of a Faraday cage to protect humans and
equipments in the building, as well as flashes from the side is not
allowed.
F. TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
1) Termination Water (Terminal Trunk)

Termination water (terminal stem) must be installed firmly and

securely as bolts, nuts and clamps to generate a good electric
current flow, starting from the terminal water to the structure
conductor of the roof of the buildings and ensured all equipments
are installed properly even under mechanical stress during the
current delivery from lightning. Termination Network for equipment
or building transmission can be generated through the 10mx20m
mesh network or terminal vertical. Roof conductors of buildings
shall be installed with a clamp for every distance of 1m. Overall
must be connected into one to form a lightning protection system
which is paralleled by the structure of the building.
2) Down Conductor
The number of conductors conductivity connecting the conductors
conductivity shall be installed as shown in the planning drawings.
Each delivery down to the room or the roof of the building using
coppers having the high productivity with the size of 25mm x 3mm,
in accordance with BSEN 13601 or can also use aluminum tape in
accordance with the BS 2898-1350 standard, drawn from the roof of
the building to fall into any grounding termination on the ground
floor, with connections in parallel so as to avoid pressure from large
electrical currents during the process of lightning current delivery.
Each conductor conductivity must be securely installed with a
distance of 1m, and is connected with the termination of grounding,
and shall be able to withstand the mechanical pressure during
channeling the lightning. The copper ribbon or aluminum used as a
conductor conductivity must have the same size as the conductor
on the roof. The conductors conductivity shall be installed on a
regular basis around the column structure of the building.
3) Bonding of metal material

All metal materials must be bonded to the lightning protection
system. For long-sized metal objects such as pipes, plates, cable
tray, etc., must be done bonding.
4) Corrosion
All materials used for lightning protection systems must be resistant
to corrosion. A care must be given to the relationship between
different metals materials such as copper and aluminum, bimetallic
connectors must be installed.
5) Joints
Down conductors shall be carried out joint test, which is useful to
avoid interference at the time of the grounding measurement.
Conductivity down which always used to connecting the joint test of
the disc type and grounding systems, must be made of copper and
has the same size as the above conductivity.
6) Termination of Lightning Grounding
Grounding termination must be connected to each down
conductivity from the roof of the building. Any termination of
grounding must have resistance of grounding no more than 5 ohms.
All grounding terminations must be connected Furseweld together
with the electrode grounding of any lightning protection system,
which it is connected with a grounding network circle. The circle of
the grounding system must be planted with a minimum depth of
600mm. All grounding rods must be bonded with 25mm x 3mm
copper tape, thus forming a closed loop. All connections except for
those in control tanks shall use such high-quality clamps such as
Furse.
7) Grounding Termination for electrical and equipment
All insulator materials related to electrical devices, each electrical
substations, casing, and armoured cable, must be grounded with
25mm x 3mm copper ribbon to the grounding network located
around the location of electrical equipments. The main grounding

network and potential equation bonding must use copper tape
conductor with high conductivity and PVC insulation that is
green/yellow. The conductors must have continuity, and there
should be no connection.
Non-metal equipment such as cables, the main antenna, etc., must
be connected to 2 separate grounding cables. Cross-sectional area
of bonding cables for electrical equipment that is vulnerable to
lightning (eg cables) can not be less than 70mm2 and the bonding
cables for other non-electrical equipment can not be less than
25mm. All connections must be made by way of pinned, similar to
Thomas & Betts skun cable, done at the time of completion with the
perfect to protect skun and all the coppers from the influence of the
air. Any electrical equipment, grounding termination should have
ground resistance no more 1-5 ohm of the number of grounding
termination. All grounding terminations must be connected together
with the grounding rod from any electrical equipment grounding
system and create a network of grounding. This network must be
planted at a depth of 600mm. All rod grounding must be
interconnected with 25mm x 3mm copper tape and form a circle
closed. Installing grounding must be maintained from corrosion and
mechanical damage.
8) Main Bar Grounding and Liaison Conductor
Grounding bar with 6 hole is similar to the Furse artificial namely LK
and Polymer inspection pit shall be installed in a safe area,
preferably on a cable channel which is 600mm above the floor
surface. The main bar grounding must have a high conductivity and
equipped with ceramic insulator material, and attach to the wall.
Grounding bar must have sufficient length to accommodate a cable
connection / copper tape to:

• Grounding conductor between the ground bars and rods

grounding,
• Circuit Protective conductors between the ground bars and other
conductive materials.
• The main conductor equalizing the voltage between bars that
looked and conductive bars. Grounding stud must have a
minimum size M8
The size of the main grounding bar must have a cross-sectional
area of not less than 300mm2.
The main grounding conductor must be prepared with a sufficient
number of terminals holes, such as cables skun, bolts, etc.
9) Electrodes
Each grounding point must have UL 467 & BS 7430 standard, each
rod-plated copper and has a diameter of not less than 14.2 mm with
a standard length of 1800mm, and made of steel core wrapped in
copper with threaded and socket joint, the tip of the head that can
be rotated and Furseweld connection. Copper rod must have a
copper electrolyte layer with a thickness of 0.25 mm. The
Contractor shall determine the length and number of electrodes
required for each grounding, after the soil resistance measurements
are performed at a location. Electrodes must be connected with
copper tape of 25mm x 3mm Furse which is columned at a depth of
600mm underground.
10) The minimum distance between two electrodes.
The minimum distance between two electrodes must be twice the
length of these electrodes.
When soil conditions led to a ground rod is not likely to achieve the
desired soil resistance, it is necessary to use a series of electrodes
that are combined with copper tape of 25mm x 3mm with depth of

600mm below ground, thus forming the copper network to achieve

the desired resistance value.
All connections and Furseweld connections must be used to obtain
a secure connection and sufficient size to avoid corrosion.
Grounding network must generally be installed at a depth of 600mm
along with 25mm x 3mm copper tape that is connected with circuit
circle around the building complete with grounding terminations.
After completion of installation, the contractor needs to perform
testing and measurements as requested by the officer supervisors,
to ensure a good job. The Contractor do not need to give the cost of
the above.
Each grounding point must use a clamp to connect tape copper and
electrode. This connection must be kept in the inspection box. The
inspection Box must be made of qualified polymer material, and UV
resistant. Have a resistance of 5 tons, and cover with the
dimensions of 300 x 212. Furse has it with PT205 type.
3. MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. GENERAL
All materials or equipment supplied and installed by the Contractor shall
be new in the sense that no salvage or outcome of repairs and materials
shall be suitable for incorporation in the tropics. Materials must be of
good quality products from the latest production. Materials or
equipments shall have sufficient capacity or rating it must comply with
technical specifications or requirements.
If deemed necessary the contractor may choose a larger capacity with
the terms:
• Does not cause the system becomes more difficult
• Does not cause additional material
• Does not cause additional space

• Does not cause additional costs

For the materials mentioned below then the Contractor shall ensure that
the goods are good and new by the way of showing the letter delivery
orders from dealers / agents / factory.
Panel equipment: Switches, circuit breakers, relays and contractors.
Lighting equipment: Armature, light bulbs, ballasts and capacitors
Installation Equipment: sockets, switches.
Cable: NYM, NYY, NYFGbY, BC, XLPE
In Door Cable Stel-K-002/SII.0621-82
On completion of the work, the Contractor shall commissioning the entire

installation and pit it into operation in accordance with the intent of this
Specification.
After commissioning and prior to Practical Completion’, the Contractor shall

provide all necessary facilities and instruments to satisfy the Engineer that
the installation meets the requirements of the Specification, and when so
satisfied the representative of the Engineer shall issue a Certificate of
Practical completion. The Defects Liability Period will Commence from the
date of Practical Completion, Immediately after the practical completion, the
sub contractor shall also be responsible for providing adequate training of
two (2) plant attendants for a duration of not less than one week. During
thee Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall carry out regular
preventive maintenance in accordance with the recommendations of the
manufacture of equipment installed under this Specification, or otherwise as
directed, and shall provide a fast, efficient and comprehensive breakdown
service.
B. SCOPE OF WORK
The precise method and requirement of carrying out tests on the installation
shall be agreed with the engineer and shall meet with supply company’s
requirement. The following are minimum tests that shall be carried out by
the Contractor after the installation has been completely erected and
connected up (except for those equipment which tests have to be carried
out before connection is made) on site.
The Contractor shall submit testing and commissioning procedure and

sample tests records to the Engineer for approval within I month of award of
contract. The Contractor shall notify the representative of the Engineer a
minimum of 7 days in advance of tests to be carried out so that witness of
the tests can arranges properly.
All instruments, tools, materials and labours required to perform these shall
be provided by Electrical Contractor.
(1) Main Switchboard
In addition to the factory tests as stipulated in the relevant section,

Electrical Subcontractor shall perform the sita tests in accordance with
the following specified requirement.
High voltage pressure tests at 20KV for a period of one minute.

Insulation resistance tests on all main and secondary circuits at 1,000
volts D.C. and 500 volts respectively.
Mechanical Inspection of relays to ensure that:
- Relay movement is free, after removal of all transport packing

- Magnet gap and induction disc are clean.
- Gap teeth are clean
- Contacts are clean and make simultaneously
- Contact make when the time multipler setting in zero.
- The resetting times are within prescribed limit for the relay.
- Flag mechanism operate in correct sequence with respect to
contacts.
- Flag and reset knobs operate with the relay cover on.
- Relay cover glass and gasket provide effective seal.
- C.T. shorting and D.C. isolating contacts for switches operate
satisfactorily.
CT’s and VT’s Test
- Polarity markings and connections verification of each CT. AND vt.

by D.C. battery galvanometer ‘kickback’ method.
- CT. ration a verification by local primary injection.
- Magnetization curve plotting of each CT. up to the saturation point.

Secondary Injection Test on Relays. Secondary injection on all

protection and alarm relays using voltage and current of sinusoidal
wave form to test the operation of the relays. Secondary current and
voltage measurements to be made by an instrument of know accuracy
conforming to the relevant Remote Control System recommendations.
Primary injection tests to prove the correctness of interconnections

between C.T groups and relays and to prove the satisfaction operation
of the Over-all protecifon system of the switchboards. Injection currents
shall be at least equal to the full load currents of the switchboards and
of sinusoidal wave form at 50Hz.
Mechanical Operation Tests of Switchgears Each switchgear to be

operated through at least three (3) open-close-open cycles in both
operating and tests positions by manual or electrical operations.
All control circuit, automatic change over operations and interlocks shall
be tested for correct operation. Checks for ease of rack-in and rack-out
all with drawable equipment to be carried out.
Trip test of circuit breakers by manually making every control relay

contacts.
• Phase sequence test
A tests on phase sequence shall be made on the main switch

/switchboard to ensure that the switch has been connected in the
correct sequence.
(2) Power Cables and busbar Trunking
• All power cables and risers shall be tested at 2KV for one minute.
All power cables and risers shall be tested for insulation with a 1000
Volt megger. Insulation values shall be obtaines between conductors
and ground and between phase; and before and after the pressure
tests.
(3) L.V Distribution and Final Sub-circuit Wiring

• Verification of Polarity (lEE Reg. 613-14):

These test may be carried out by using proper tests probes and a test
lamp where mains supply is available or using a continuity tester where
mains supply is mot available. The use of neon indicators for polarity
testing is not reliable and they shall not be used for this purpose.
Measurement of the Resistance of the Earth Electrode (lEE Reg.

6134):
The resistance to earth of the main, and any auxiliary earthing systems
shall be measured, both at the earthing electrode position, and at the
main switch/switchboard.
Insulation Resistance/tests of Completed Installation (lEE Reg. 613-5 to
8)
Tests required are show in the able below-
Minimum
Insulation
Tests Conditions of Tests Resistance
1. Insulation Resistance to earth to earth 1 Mega - ohm
2 Insulation Resistance 1 Mega - ohm

between poles or phases
3 Insulation resistance 0,5 Mega - ohm

to case or frame work of
live parts of fixed apparatus where
disconnected for purposes of tests 1 and 2.
Test of Ring-circuit Countinuity (lEE Reg, 613-2): For the purpose of

this tests the supply must be disconnected and the ring conductor
must be disconnected at the point of test.
(4) Lighting Protection System
The earthing resistance of the lighting protection system earth electrode

or electrodes shall be measured if this electrode is separate from the

main installation earth. The resistance of each electrode to earth shall
not exceed 2 ohm. Where more than one electrode is installed at an
earthing position the resistance of all the electrodes in parallel shall be
taken to be the earthing resistance.
(5) Other Tests
The contractor shaD carry out any other tests that may be required by
the Engineer or the local supply company. All the costs for these tests
shall be deemed to be included in the sub-contract prices.
(6) Test Report and Records
Test reports of site test shall be submitted to the Engineer within 7 days
from the date of testing carried out.
Manufacturer’s test reports and type test certificates on major

equipment such as L.V. switchboards and generators shall be provided
with the equipment. Records of all the readings taken from the
miscellaneous tests shall be submitted to the prepresentative of the
Engineer for inspection and comments.
C. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTION MANUAL
The contractor shall within 14 days of reaching Practical Completion

handover to the Engineer three (3) copies of a Maintenance Instruction
Manual. Manual should comprise the following:
(1) A cover giving the name of the development the title of the
document the name and address of the installation contractor
(2) Inside page giving similar information to the cover but including
contact telephone numbers for normal and emergency use
(3) Contents page.
(4) Description of the installation.

(5) Scheduled details of all equipment and plant.
(6) Operating instructions including details of any automatic control

system.
(7) Maintenance and fault finding instructions including composite

schedule of routine maintenance.
(8) Test reports and commissioning records.
(9) Recommended spare part and lubricants.

(10) List of equipment and plant with manufacturer’s name and address
and local agent, if applicable.
(11) Manufacturer’s literature suitably index to include shop drawings,

(12) List of as-installed drawings.

suitably separated and readily indentifiable or pages should be
numbered consecutively and pages numbers included in the contents
page.
Finally, approved manuals should be submitted in loose leaf ring

binders with hard cover to facilitate storage.

appropriate. As-installed drawings should include a diagrammatic layout
of the complete installation with major items of plant suitable referenced
to the schedules (item ‘e’ above).
A set of the as-installed drawings should be provided for each copy of

the C & M Manual required to be provided. In addition one set of copy
negatives should be provided.
The Electrical contractor shall state in the operating and Maintenance

manual that all electrical connections have been checked and indicate

when re-check is to be carned out.
D. SERVICE
The contractor shall undertake to provide a comprehensive breakdown
service whereby a qualified electrician attends to breakdowns as soon as
practicable after a breakdown is reported and carries out immediate
remedial work during the defect liability period.
Where the contractor fails to attent the plant, with six (6) normal working
hours of notification of a break down and where remedial work is
interrupted during normal working hours for purposes other than obtaining
replacement parts prom the nearest source, the representatives of the
Engineer reserves the righ to order such action as may reasonably
expedite completion of remedial work at the contractor expense without
abrogation of the contractor’s responsibilities.
E. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
The Contractor Shall carry out regular inspections at periods not exceeding
one calendar month, and shall fully service all plat installed under this
specification within the Defects Liability Period, and during that period.
At each maintenance visit, the sub-contractor shall:
(1) Check all lighting and power circuits.
(2) Check all light fittings., wiring accessories.
(3) Check all phase loading and phase balance the circuit if required.
(4) Service all circuit breaker, switches, socket outlets, swith panels
starters, motors, transformerts etc. and check their proper
operation.
(5) Inspect all cables, conduits, trunking, distribution boards etc.
(6) Check the proper functioning of all control circuits, sensing and

indicating devicxes, etc.

(7) Check the accuracy of all timers and reset if required.
(8) Test for the proper functioning of all protective devices.
(9) Check the battery charger and battery condition.
(10) Record all meter readings

(11) Record all services and replacement carried out and inform the
owner’s maintenance Engineer of any work that needs rectification.
In addition to the monthly maintenance schedule, the contractor
shall at interval not exceeding six months:
(a) Inspect and clean as necessary all items of plant and
equipment;
(b) Clean and adjust all switchgear, contactors and starters; and
(c) Prove operation of all thermal overloads.

SECTION XVI - SAFETY REQUIREMENT.SPARE PARTS AND

TOOLS
1. SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
The contractor shall allow for the following items related to safety in switch
rooms.
(a) Rubber Mats
The contractor shall provide in front of all floor mounted switchboards

rubber mats 1000 mm wide, 6mm thick and the length of the
switchboards.
(b) Single Line Diagram
The contractor shall provided in the main L.V. switch room- ‘as installed’
single line diagram framed behind glass.
The diagram shall be not smaller 1000 x 800.
2. SPARE PART
(a) The Contractor shall include in his tender an itemized priced list for the
supply and delivery of spare part recommended by him for the
continuous operation of the plant for a period of two years, The spare
parts listed in spare parts schedule may be ordered in part or not at all.
The contractor shall undertake that in the event of a contract being
placed with him the itemized list of prices will remain valid for a period of
12 months from the date of acceptance of tender.
(b) All spare part supplied shall be new, unused interchangeable with the

parts for which they are intended to be replacements and shall be

treated and packed for long storage under the climatic conditions
prevailing at the site. They shall not be packed with any items of plant to
be erected but shall be clearly marked or labeled on the outside of their
packing with their description, including part number, purpose and more
than one spare is packed in a single case or other container, a general
description of its contents shall be shown on the outside of such case or
container and a detailed list, including part numbers, enclosed. All
cases, containers and other packages shall be marked and numbered in
an approved manner for purpose of identification. They shall be clearly
marked ‘SPARE PART’. Electrical and mechanical spares shall be
packed and crated separately.
The entire ‘ength of piping, cable enclosures and conduit installed in the
following locations shall be painted:
(c) All cases, containers or other packages are liable to be opened for such
examination as Engineer may require and packings shall be designed to
facilities opening and subsequent repacking/
3 TOOLS
(a) A complete set of all necessary tools shall be specified by the Contract
to enable any action, dismantling or testing to be carried out any part of
the plant by the purchaser after the work have been take over, whether
of an electrical, mechanical or any other nature. The contractor shall
ender take that in the event of a contract months from the date of
acceptance.
(b) The tools specified may be ordered in part or not all.
(c) Any tools ordered together with the contract shall be dispatched at the
same time as the plant.
(d) The shall not be used for the erection of the equipment being supplied
and must be handed over the purchaser in a completely new and
unused condition, should the contractor require any such tools at site for
erection, he should provide his own.

(e) The tools provide shall included special tools and auxiliary equipment
required for to the operation and maintenance of the switchboard and
generator. All tools shall be supplied in suitable tool boxes complete
with a list of parts contained in each box.
SECTION XVII - TELEPHONE SYSTEM (not in the scope of work)
1. GENERAL
The installation shall comprise generally of the following:
a) PABX type is IP PHONE PABX
b) Operator Consoles;
c) Power Source;
d) MDF (Main Distribution Frame);
e) Cables between MDF and Telephone set via PABX
f) The types and nos. of telephone sets specified below and shown on the
Drawing
g) Separate grounding 1~2~ Ohm, the minimum distance is 20 m from

Electrical grounding and 40m from lighting protection grounding.
All equipment shall be checked and approved by the Engineer and PU
before installation. AU parts shall be mutually compatible and properly
integrated to function and operate as intended. Components shall as far
as possible be the products of one manufacturer who is regularly
engaged in the production of telephone system equipment.
2. SCOPE OF WORK

On the whole the scope of work will cover the following:
a. Procurement and installation of one IP PHONE PABX Capacity 8 CO

and 64 Extension together with the Billing charge system. The one that
must be procured is a PABX with European/American standard.
b. Procurement and installation of connection for line telephone extension

and direct line.
c. Procurement and installation of the IP PHONE PABX system to the

public line network of the Telecommunication Company.
d. Conducting the entire system test so that the said telephone system can
function exactly and rightly.
e. Arranging the license for testing and the connection of the said
telephone system with Telecommunication Company.
f. Preparing the indoor network (indoor wiring system) from the

subscription connection Company, covering the procurement and
installation
- Cable using UTP Cat 6, and telephone installation pipe

- Telephone feeder cable Using UTP Cat 6
- Telephone contact box
- Lighting arrester
- Grounding system
- Other equipments which support this work
g. Procurement and installation of service hand set (operator console),

standard hand set, executive hand set complete with display and hands
free.
h. Holding the maintenance for the system including the supply of spare
parts for minimal of 3 (three) years.
Conducting training to the personnel who will use the telephone system.

3. PABX I IP PHONE PABX
a) The PABX I IP PHONE PABX shall be the electronic system and be

pulse code modulation time division multiplex system type. Only CPU of
simplex system.
b) Generally the PABX I IP PHONE PABX shall provide the following

functions :
i) Intercommunication for internal extensions.
ii) Direct access to external lines from designated extensions.
iii) Access to external lines from undesignated extensions.
iv) Voice mail (voice messaging).
c) The IP PHONE PABX shall be capable of providing the following special

functions -
I) Automatic holding-on of on-line calls by pressing a switch or dialing

on extension telephones when connected.
ii) Call transfer from one extension to another.

iii) Add another extension to an existing on-line cafl,
iv) When console is unattended the designated extensions shall be

connected to incoming calls directly.
v) Automatic attendance.
vi) The system support paging (pager) and local GSM — expandable.
vii) Extension automatically disconnected after pitch tone has been

transmitted for a predetermined period of time.
viii) Barring direct toll calls from specific extensions.
ix) When an extension or attendant at console encounters a called

busy extension, incoming call may be stepped to a second

extension line by dialing last digit of second extension if preceding
digits of first and second extension are the same (“call advance”).
x) An incoming call transferred by attendant to a busy extension may

be held waiting and then automatically connected when called
extension becomes idle (“attendant camp-on”).
d) All PABX / IP PHONE PABX equipment shall be mounted in a proper

metal enclosure.
4 OPERATOR CONSOLE
The operator console shall be of a desk top, cordless/hand type. Type

complete with display specifically designed for console and be provided
complete with headset.
5 POWER SOURCE
The equipment required for power source shall include batteries, rectifier
and enclosure. The batteries shall be of the Nicad in a transparent
polystyrene case with clad positive plates and paste negative plates for a
total of 48V and with a capacity of 100 AH or minimum 6 hours operation.
The rectifier shall have a capacity of 70 A and be of full wave bridged
metallic silicon operated type with a rated input of 380V AC, 50 Hz, three
phase and having rated output of 48V DC. Both batteries and rectifier shall
be mounted in the same cabinet.
All related equipment to be provided shall include automatic voltage

regulator. meters. switches, indication lamps and other accessories required
for a complete system. Meters and indication lamps shall he mounted in a
visible location
6 MDF
The MDF shall be of floor mounted, metal (2 mm mild sheet steel) enclosure
type and be same dimension as Supply cabinet. Test and arrester springs
shall be provided

7 SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
a) System Capacity
1) CO line and Extension lines Refer to drawing (8 CO and 64 Ext)
2) Perumtel Line Capacity Refer to drawing (6 PSTN Lines)
b) Numbering Schema
1) Call back and transfer Hook flash of telephone set.

2) Extension to extension 4-digit”XXXX”
3) Paging call 1-digit, Dialing’s”
4) Paging answer 1-digit, Dialing “7”
5) Add-on conference
6) Exchange line call via operator and operator call recall 1-digit,
Dialing “9”
7) Direct outward dialing access code 1-digit, Dialing 0”
c) Operator Console
The operator console shall be provided with the following features :
1) Desk-top-mounting, complete with busy indication amp field and

digital display.
2) Provided with handset and push button dial.
3) Matrix key array.
4) Separate call recording printed for SMDR service with CRT.
d) D.C. Power Supply
1) Rectifier Full wave rectifier current 25 (rated A)

2) Battery Capacity 6-hour Operation NICAD (Cubicle Type)
e) Telephone Sets:
Both of desk and wall type DTMF push button telephone sets fl Testers

and tools for maintenance
The following are to be provided by the Contractor for the retention of

the Employer
- Oscilloscope
- Test handset
- Line test console
- Electric cable wrapping tool
- IC logic tester
- Multi tester
- Consumables
8 TELEPHONE INCOMING CABLES
Main incoming telephone cable swill be brought into junction box by

Perumtel~t location as shown on the drawings Pipes, trunkings, cable trays
etc. That are required for installing the incoming telephone cables from
outside of the building into the room shall be by this contractor.
9 BLOCK WIRING SYSTEM
Connecting from the Perumtel junction box to main distribution frame and
also TBT (Terminal Box Telephone) and to the final outlets, etc. shall be by
this contractor.
Interconnection jumper wiring between incoming/outgoing terminal of all

distribution frames shall be provided and connected by this Contractor.
Telephone cables shall be tinned annealed copper conductors, size 0.6mm 2

insulated with PVC which is self colored or color banded to provide circuit
distinction. The wires shall be twisted in pairs and the required number of
pairs shall be laid up in concentric layer formation into a compact cabe core
over which is applied a layer of hygrocopic tape. A sheathing of PVC shall
be then be applied. The colour coding of the wires shall conform to IEC
Publication 189
Cable for The Extension line Phone will be use LAN cable which is use UTP
Cat 6 and cable for Co line which is connect to Telkom Line (PSTN) will be
use Jelly Armoured type.

All cables shall be labeled at each end showing where the cables are
connected at the other end.
Multi-pair cables connecting junction box, main distribution frames and TBT
shall be labeled with sandwich type plastic sheets with letters engraved on
the first layer. The plastic sheets shall be tied to the cables nearby the end
by releasable cable tie (type RELIOO by Heller Mann Insulin). The words
engraved shall indicate the type of the cable (number of pairs), to which
terminal boxes it is connected (at both side) and the number of terminations.
Empty conduit with draw wires shall be provided by this Contractor panel
from the TBT’s to the outlet points as shown on drawings.
10 CONTRACTOR REQUIREMENTS
(a) The Contractor shall designate an Engineer to represent him in all

technical matters relating to building, installation. Supervision and
commissioning of the system. The sub-contractors shall provide all
cabling required for system to work in a manner implicit and am plied in
these specification. The Contractor shall commission the system and
bring same to 95% of performance requirements prior to requesting
acceptance by Engineer.
(b) Furnish a floor plan and necessary elevations indicating area

requirements for equipment as well as height, lighting levels and fixture
layout and environmental conditions and tolerances.
(c) Provide a letter from the telephone company confirming acceptance and
compability of the proposed system, prior to contract award
(d) Provide recommended list of parts for estimated two-year operational

requirements
(e) Submit proposal for total system maintenance for a two-year period
which is to commence as soon as the one year period of maintenance
expires.

(f) Guarantee system and all components for a period of one year which
shall begin at date of substantial completion.
11. OPERATIONAL MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
(a) Carry out additional service work required to ensure the correct
operation, performance and function of the telephone system.
(b) Check and ensure that the whole system is working properly.
(c) Vacuum all dirt’s.
(d) Check for loose connection and rectify
(e) Check for broken telephone lines and rectify
12. TESTING AND COMMISIONING.
The contractor must conduct aD tests to demonstrate that the operation of

the installed cable and material has really conformed to this requirement.
The Contractor must provide, at its own expense, all equipments and
personnel which is necessary to conduct the trial. The installation work is
considered as finish if it has been tested by the Telecommunication
Company (Perum Telkom)
and is acknowledged as good.
13. WARRANTY
All work, material and equipment must be guaranteed within 360 (three
hundred and sixty) days. All equipments, material and work, which is not
good must be quickly replaced or repaired by the Contractor, without
additional expense and must of the same brand name/type of material.
14. AFTER SALES SERVICE
The Contractor must enclose in the proposal about the list of the address of
the representative agency and workshop is able to provide after sales

service for the proposed IP PHONE PABX type.
SECTION XVIII - FIRE ALARM SYSTEM & FIRE FIGHTING

TELEPHONE
1. GENERAL
a. This technical specification describes the requirements in providing and

installing all equipment, and their operation as contract drawings required
or other parts of this technical specification.
b. Contractor is required to check the design against the possibilities of

failure / impropriety in terms of their electric scalars and/or installation
and others. The above mentioned issues must be installed as contract
requirement proposed in writing for Construction Management approval

prior to commencing installation.
c. Contract is to ensure that the system installation completed with the local
authorities requirement.
.
2. STANDARD / REGULATION
All materials and installations should meet the requirement / standard from
NFPA (National Fire Protection Association) UL listed (USA) and
requirements of Fire Extinguishers from local Government.
3LIST OF MATERIAL
The contractor must submit to Construction Management approval the

following :
- Capacity of the equipment.

- Installation procedure.
- Characteristic of the operation mode.
- Dimension.
- Others.
4. MANUFACTURER
The completed with contract list and subject to Construction Management

approval.
5. SAMPLE MATERIAL
For all materials and equipment the Contractor is required to obtain the
Construction Management approval.

6. COORDINATION
The Contractor must coordinate with other Contractor as necessary.
7. TRAINING OPERATOR AND OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
The Contractors shall provide 4 (four) sets of operational manual including

maintenance procedures to Construction Management. This includes
training for Owner operator.
8. SCOPE OF WORK
The scope of works include all items for the system to function as specified
including but not limited to the below item :
- Procurement and installation of all fire alarm equipment such as : smoke

Detectors, IR/UV Laser Detector, manual break glass, Alarm Bells,
sirens, lamp indicators (LCB), hand set fire fighting telephones and their
wiring installation, etc.
- Procurement and installation of Master Control Fire Alarm panel and
master control fire fighting telephone and their wiring installation.
- Procurement and installation of power supply and battery to serve the
above mentioned system.
- Procurement and installation of grounding units.
- Testing and commissioning.
- License (permit) arrangement to the local fire office.
9. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS OF FIRE ALARM SYSTEM WORK
a. GENERAL Requirements
This technical specification explains the description and requirements in

terms of supply and installation of all equipment as well as the operation of
all fire alarm and portable extinguisher installations, either attached or
constructed outside the building, as shown in the drawings or in other parts
of this technical specification.

b. Drawings
In the Tender Documents, the drawings in the planning which include the
work scope of fire alarm installation work are drawings coded with EF.
Contractor shall check the design against the possibility of errors /
incompatibility in terms of electrical quantities as well as installation and
the like. The above matter must be in writing or the drawings submitted at
the time of tender bidding orientation / aanwaijzing. Before the work is
submitted entirely or in stages, Contractor shall submit to MK 3 (three) sets
of drawings to be called "as built drawings" which are drawings of all
materials and Fire Alarm 3 installation.
c. Working Drawings / Shop Drawings
For each execution prior to installation or provision of materials, Contractor

shall submit to MK / Planner for approval of the working drawings / shop
drawings at least 30 (thirty) working days from issuance of the SPK.
d. Standards / Regulations
All materials and installations in this work must meet the General
Requirements for Electrical Installation (PUIL) 2000 SPLN and
international standards for Fire Alarms Systems, applicable in the Republic
of Indonesia.
e. Material List
At the time of bidding, Contractor must include / attach the "Material List”
which should be more detailed, listing all the material that will be installed
later in this project and all according to the requirements in the
specification.
In the Material List, name of manufacturer of brand and type must be
mentioned, complete with brochures/ catalogs or any other information on
specifications regarding technical working voltage, power frequency,
physical dimensions, etc.
f. Specified Name of Manufacturer / Brand
If the name of manufacturer / brand from one type of material is mentioned

in the technical specification, Contractor then shall deliver and install

according to what has been determined. If at the time of installation the

said material / brand is not available / hard to get, MK / Planner will appoint
other brands but with the same and equal specification.
g. Material Samples
Pertaining to the materials mentioned below, prior to installation,
Contractor must show the material samples to MK / Planner for approval.
If deemed necessary by MK / Planner, and it may be possible, Contractor
is obliged to show the samples to MK / Planners. If the samples are
rejected by MK / Planner, Contractor shall then, for approval, replace and
show that it is in accordance with the specifications.
Technical quality / power, brand / manufacturer, physical characteristics of
work, and aesthetic quality of work of the material samples as well as
installations that have been approved, is binding.
Procurement cost of material samples are the responsibility of and for the
account of Contractor. Material samples must be submitted to MK /
Planner at not more than 14 (fourteen) calendar days after issuance of the
SPK.
h. Clause on Returned Goods
If there are clauses in the Tender Documents mentioning the items / other
paragraphs it does not mean eliminating these items but more so to
emphasize the matter.
If there is a contradiction between the drawings or to specifications, then
as a benchmark, technical or highest cost consideration should be taken.
i. Claim Waiver
Project Owner is exempted from all patents and the like for all kinds of
material procurement and setup. Owner is free from any claims or charges
against special rights such as patents and the like.
j. Coordination
At the time of procurement of materials and installation, Contractor shall

coordinate with parts of the job / other contractors or appointed by MK /
Planner. If there is an item of work to be done by another contractor,
Contractor must then l prepare / submit the said materials and
explanations for installations. During installation by another contractor, it is
mandatory for the Fire Alarm Contractor to be present and jointly with MK /

Planner give directions in order to get results in line with the installation
requirements.
k. Manual, Spare-parts and Instructions
At least 1 (one) month before the project is handed over to Owner,

Contractor shall submit the manual, spare-parts information, and
instructions, all of which are necessary for installing all equipment.
l. Built-in Insert
Contractor shall provide all "insert" and other additional equipment which
are needed to be immersed in concrete and other installations.
m. Grounding
All equipment must be grounded according to the prevailing regulations.

For that, Contractor must make working drawings / shop drawings for
approval by MK / Planner.
n. Finishing
All materials installed must already be in a good finished state as required;
finishing after installation is a requirement and this includes all
improvements the said materials and other works, resulting from
installation works which include: repairing, repainting, cleaning and the
like.
All equipment of the fire alarm which are visible such as a conduit pipe
which are not implanted, manual call, bell, signal / location lamp, fire-
fighting units and the like, must be finished in red paint, or another paint
color according to MK’s approval.
o. Warranty
All installation work and the relevant equipment must be guaranteed
working perfectly. All works are included in the scope of this job should be
given free maintenance for a period of 1 (one) year.
After the period of free maintenance, Contractor may submit a proposal to
have a maintenance contract to Owner, unless otherwise specified by
Owner.
p. Training
To train operator or persons designated by Owner, to run, carry out the

necessary tests and maintenance of installations. All costs are borne by

Contractor.
10. SPECIAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
a. Scope of Work
Encompassed within the scope of work and fire alarm and fire extinguisher
installation is to provide, fix, test / trial-run, all the fire alarm installationand
fire-fighting; as specified in the job description below and shown in the
drawings planning.
The scope of work here means that the unit must work well for each part
as well as the entire installation that is attached as a whole unit.
• Procurement and installation of the Master Control Fire Alarm, Fire
Detector, Manual Call, Alarm Bell, Signal / Location Lamp, Siren and
wiring installation.
• Procurement and installation of Addressable Module Box (AmB) and
accessories Procurement and installation of fire extinguisher units.
• Conducting trial-runs and testing all installation as well as
demonstrating how fighting units are used.
• Board will indicate the availability of manual push button fire-fighting
units, the place / direction of escape hatch / ladder hazards (fire
escape).
• Making of cabinets / panels for fire extinguishers, alarm calls, and
buttons at the places specified.
b. Execution Terms and Conditions
• Contractor must assure task giver that the work is carried out by
experienced staff who will follow standards determined.
• During installation, Contractor must deploy an expert who always
supervise the job execution.
• Contractor must replace damaged material to meet physical and
technical requirements.
• Contractor shall ensure cleanliness of work area i.e. free of any pieces
of wood, wire, metal resulting from boring into walls / concrete or the
like.
• Contractor shall conduct testing, start-up and demonstration if need

be. This is the responsibility of and costs for Contractor.
c. Master Control Fire Alarm Panel, Auxiliary Monitor Panel
1. Master Control Fire Alarm (MCFA) to be used is the Semi Addressable

type of UL Capacity (according to drawing plans) with complete
Terminal equipment:
• Indicator/ signal zones
• Buzzer/ horn
• Fire Brigade telephone line
• Fire Fighting (fire pump) line
• Monitor line
2. To facilitate identification, signs must be put up for indicator/ signal
zones in each zone location.
d. Power Supply
Voltage that may be applied is the DC voltage of not more than 100 V
voltage generated by the rectifier. In an emergency or PLN power supply
loss, batteries which can serve system for 4 (four) hours should be used.
The batteries must be Nickel Cadmium (NiCad). Battery capacity and
rectifier system must be according to performance and fire alarm
installation as a whole.
e. Fire Alarm Detector
Fixed temperature detector of maximum cover area:

± 40 m² at 65°C maximum temperature
± 30 m² at 75°C maximum temperature
A combination rate of rise and fixed temperature detectors for 40 m² cover
area at 65 ° C maximum temperature while for cover area of 30 m² at 75 °
C maximum temperature.
f. Smoke Detector and UV/IR Laser Detector (flame Detector)

Smoke Detector is a detector that works on the basis of fume consistency
limits. Smoke detectors can be: Photo Electric Smoke Detector: that
works on the principle of reduced light caused by smoke of a certain
concentration. Lonization Smoke Detector: that works on the principle of
ionization currents caused by smoke of a certain concentration. The flame
detector detects infrared radiation (IR-radiation). Fires of organic materials
have a very high spectrum in the range .The infrared flame detectors
FDF221-9 and FDF241-9 are intended for the detection of smokeless
liquid and gas fires as well as smoke-generating open fires which are
generated in the combustion of carbonaceous substances, e.g. wood,

plastics, gases, oil products, etc Infrared flame detectors cannot detect fires
of inorganic substances, e.g. hydrogen, phosphorus, sodium, magnesium,
sulfur etc. However, if such substances are burned together with
organic materials, e.g. packaging material, the detection is again
ensured. The unit UV/IR laser type should be Sensitiveness type with coverage
range length in 18 m straight and 10 m high installation
g. Alarm Bell
Supply must be not more than 100 V. DC, indoor type. Bell is fitted into the
building and must have enough frequency to overpower the noise level at
medium level. Installation of alarm bell is placed according to the location
approved by MK.
h. Manual Call Box
Indoor type, mounted on either a wall or door. Supply should not be more
than 100 volt DC.
i. Siren / Horn Alarm
Installed outdoor, in open areas, parking or the like, complete with poles.
Have sufficient frequency to be heard clearly either in buildings or other
place.
11. WORKINGS OF DESIRED TYPE OF ALARM
Master Control Fire Alarm works in a few sequences. If one of the

detectors / zones is working, it will send a signal to the Master Control
which will activate the alarm bell to ring and thus lighting up the signal
lamp. If a general alarm occurs, Master Control will send a signal to
ground the lift, ignite Pressuation Fan at the fire escape and the like. To re-
set the system, Master Control is done manually.
12. INSTALLATION AND CONDUIT
• Master Control Fire Alarm is placed in operator monitoring room,

mounted on the wall.
• Auxiliary monitor panel is installed on a desk monitor in the monitor
room, on guard for 24 hours. The cable connecting the Master
Addressable Control Panel and Module Box (AmB) is in the wire rack /
cable tray.
• Each floor inside the building is served by an Amb located in the panel
space. To connect each AmB at each floor with Fire Equipment
Master Control, 3 TP 2 cores cable 18 AWG is used, placed in the wire
rack / cable tray, clamped on the shaft wall.
• For installation system of AmB into manual call box fire detector or
bell, HIS cable size 1.5 mm ² is used and placed into the PVC pipe
conduit, installed above the ceiling.
• For installing the wiring in series, tap point each fixture at the end of
the installation, using the End Of Line Resistor.
• Each deflection / bifurcation / continuation must use junction box,
strongly mounted on each holder, clamped onto a wooden frame or
the like.
• For pipe conduit, junction box is embedded in the concrete, walls or on
the floor.
• Contractor shall coordinate with Field Supervisor / MK to place it
before casting.
• For fire extinguisher, the fixed type unit is hung on hanging holder,
mounted onto the wall anchor, or placed in the provided and specified
fire hydrant closet. Or placed as specified by MK and adjusted to field
condition.
• The signboards must be made of iron plate, 0.8 mm thick plate size,
adjusted according to number of alphabets in yellow, red primary color,
legible from a minimum distance of 10 m for normal eyesight.
• Contractor shall conduct testing on all installations and fire alarm
equipment, to be witnessed by Project Owner / his representative,
Planner, MK.
In the testing process, Contractor must guarantee all results of his
work with a report / warranty stating that the work done is according to
tender offer and additional attachments and that all installations are
working properly and perfectly.
Hence, the Licence on Use Worthiness from the Fire Department
(DPK) is the responsibility of Contractor.
13. MATERIAL REQUIREMENTS
General
All materials supplied and installed by Contractor must be new, specifically

for tropic installation; written approval from MK / Planner is mandatory.
Contractor must be willing to replace materials which are not approved
becauseof deviation from the specifications or the like; such replacements
are at no extra cost. The components of the materials which may be often
replaced must be selected on easy obtaining in the free market.
14. WARANTY I MAINTENANCE PERIOD.
12 month for date Owner acceptance of the system.
15. PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT.
(a) Main Control Fire Alarm
Main Control Fire Alarm shall be NFPA/UL listed/Local authorities

approved is installed in the basement at the control room where it is
considered as a strategic place so that it can be easily reached by the
Fire officers.
(b) Status Panel
Indicating LED”s shall be provided in twin pairs , the other shall still be
able to indicate the alarm at reduced illuminated.
The ilimuninated light on the panel must be capable of being turned off
until the alarm inititing points have been restored to normal.
The panel shall be provided with a buzzer which shall sound when any
alarm is received ,A buzzer isolating key witch shall be provided on the
panel for acknow ledgement purpose.
Indication of the following monitoring signals shall be provided as a

minimum on the status panel:
• Running and overload of each fire pump

• Power failure for each fire pump set
• F.S .tank over flow alarm
• F.S .tank low level alarm

• Power failure of each hydrant set

• Hydrant box break glass unit alarm
• Charger Fault for each battery charger of all panels
• Others shown on drawing
The status panel shall also include the following:

24V D.C. 5 amp. Normally open dry contacts to be wired to the lift motor
control panels at the lift motor rooms for lift homing and escalator
control panel for tripping of escalator equipment in case of fire (i.e. any
smoke/heat detector, break glass).
A buzzer shall be provided at the status panel which shall sound when
any alarm is actuated.
A buzzer isolation key switch shall be provided on the panel to enable
the operating staff to isolate the buzzer at his sole discretion.
“Power Supply ON” indicator, green.
“System On” indicator, green.
“Battery On” indicator green.
A push button I key switch for lamp testing.
(c) Battery Charger and Batteries
The contractor shall supply and install individual automatic 24 V D.C.

trickle battery charger and batteries with sufficient capacity to supply
master fire alarm and control panel and stratus panel.
The charger shall have facility for manually operated boost charger,
capable of re-charging the batteries from fully discharged to fully
charger condition in not more than eight (8) hour.
The unit shall be suitable for use on a 220V A.C. 50 Hz single phase
supply and shall automatically maintain the 24 V nickel cadmium
batteries in a stat approximate to full charger and at the same time to
compensate for the standing load.
The batteries shall be capable of maintaining the system for not less
than 24hours and then be able to operate in the “alarm” condition for all
bells for not less than 2 hours.

Fault indication shall be given in the status panel when any one of the
battery charger is faulty or when the D.C. voltage is low.
(d). Heat Detector
Automatic heat sensitive detectors shall be suitable for open circuit

working and surface mounting onto 50mm dia. BESA boxes.
Where rate-of-rise response is undesirable due to the probability of false

alarms and shall be of self non-resettable type conforming to BS 5445
Part 5 : 1977 and rated to response a fixed temperature not less than 54
degrees C and not more than 62 degrees C.
The heat detectors shall have a status indicating LED for visual
supervision. When the detector is actiated, the LED shall lacth on
steady and at full
brilliance. The detector shall have auxiliary relay and connections for a
remote LED alarm indicator.
Where false ceiling is present, decorative mounting plates shall be

provided for flush mounting of the detector onto the false ceiling.
Where the detector is fixed inside hidden places such as false ceiling
voids, remote indication lamps with decorative base plate shall be
provided and mounted at ceiling level or high level directly under the
hidden detector.
No address or code shall be set neither on the smoke I heat detectors

nor in the detector bases.
The heat detector shall be approved by U.L.
(e). Ionization smoke detector
Smoke detector (ionization smoke detector) has a coverage area

around 75 m2. Smoke detector is equipped with indicator lamp that can
flicker and this means that the detector is still well functioning and is not
in trouble, on the other hand, if the indicator lamp continuously on, this
means that the smoke detector detects a fire danger.

The automatic smoke detectors shall be of the AM 241 ionization

chamber type conforming to B.S. 5446 : Part 1 :1977. The smoke
detector shall have a reversible response delay such as a detachable
factory pre-set 30 seconds signal integration feature.
Alternatively the reversible response delay feature in the smoke

detector can be waived provided that the fire control panel is built in with
reversible response delay feature (such as a detachable factory pre-set
30 seconds delay) for each smoke detector zone.
The smoke detector shall have a status indicating LED for visual
supervision. When the detector is actuated, the LED shall latch on
steady and at full brilliance. The detector shall be resettable after being
cleared of products of combustion. The detector base shall have
auxiliary relay and connections for a remote LED alarm indicator.
The detector shall be capable of operating satisfactorily under a
reasonable variation in supply voltage, such as normally occur in
service due to charge and discharge of the alarm system battery.
When false ceiling is present, decorative mounting plates shall be

provided for flush mounting of the detector onto the false ceiling.
Where the detector is fixed inside hidden places such as false ceiling
voids, remote indication lamps with decorative base plate shall be
provided and mounted at ceiling level or high level directly under the
hidden detector.
Detectors shall be suitable for proper functioning in environment with

temperature ranging from 10°C to 60°C, relative humidity not less than
90%. The smoke detectors shall be approved by U.L. and local
authonties.
(f) Alarm Bell
Alarm bells shall be ironclad, corrosion proof 24 V DC operation, 150

mm round gong pattern suitable for 20mm conduit entry. Red gongs
shall be provided.

200/230 mm diameter. Weather proof type alarm bells shall be mounted

on external walls as directed by the Engineer.
In situations where the same lamps or LED’s are required both for fire
alarm/status indication and fault alarm indication, they shall be of twin-
color type, of suitable colors to B.S. 4099:1976 and B.S. 5378: 1976
and of the type approved by the Engineer.
Other items shall conform to the “Electrical Equipment and Installation”

Section.
(g) Manual Break Glass
Fire alarm break glass units conform to B.S. 5346: Part 1:1977 and shall
be suitable for 24 V D.C. operation. They shall have open circuit
contacts arranged for surface fixing with the front cover finished in red.
The contact shall close immediately after the glass is smashed.
The work “In Case of Fire Break Glass” shall be engraved both in
English and Indonesia.
The unit shall be of flush mounted and is generally adjacent to the hose
reel cabinet or positioned as shown on the drawings and to the approval
of the Engineer.
(h) Beam Detector or UV/IR Laser Detector
This detector consist 2 part, first part generate infra red signal, and the
other part for receiving the infra red signal, this equipment used for long
range area such as ware house, and will detected the smoke.
16. DESIGN INSTALLATION
(a). Installation and Piping (Conduit)
- Master control fire alarm is placed in control room.

- Every floor is served by one terminal Box (TB). To connect TB with

master control fire equipment, 4 x 2.5 mm2 NYA cable is used. All
cables must be Solid Cable and not stranded cable.
- From TB to fire detector, manual call box or bell, it 1.5 mm2 NYA
cable Is used.
- E very bend/branch/connectIon must use junction box.
- To identify T-dus, clamp and every 1.5 meter on the conduit to be
painted red.
- Cable tray to be used for vertical/horizontal cable installed out bow.
(b). Grounding
All equipments must be grounded according to system requirement and

regulation
(c). Finishing
All finishing to system to be as Construction Management Director and

requirement.
(d). Spare-part manual and Instruction
At least 3 (three) months prior to hand over of the project Contractor

must deliver manual, spare-part information and instructions as
necessary.
17. MAIN CONTROL FIRE FIGHTING TELEPHONE
(a). the type which is used conforms to standard for fire fighting telephone
complete jack ,hand set battery back up, and other
(b). At floor is divided into several zone and the number of fire telephone
jack, hand set units will be conformed to the square meter of the room.
(c) Main control is located adjacent to the master control fire alarm in the
control room.
(d). Telephone Jacks are installed inside the fire hose cabinet.

18. REQUIREMENT FOR RAW MATERIAL, MATERIAL AND BRAND NAME
(a) All materials supplied and installed by the Contractor, must be new and
is specially for installation in the tropical area, and must get the written
of Construction Management approval.
b. Components materials of system should be those which can be easily

procured in the market.
SECTION XX - CCTV SYTEM
1. GENERAL
CCTV System comprise of IP camera, Monitor, device to move Scanner, Pan

Tilt multiplexer and video recorderm (Can be use PC Desk Computer). The
CCTV system is in color.
2. CCTV SYSTEM WORKS
The general requirements and specific requirements including instructions to

auction Participants are an integral part of the work description field and the
requirements of this implementation. This technical specification describes
the description and the requirements in terms of the provision and installation
of all equipment and operation of all installations of CCTV systems installed
inside or outside the building, as shown in the pictures of other parts of this
technical specification.
3. ILLUSTRATIONS
a. The pictures for the installation work of CCTV to be included in the Tender
Documents are the pictures with code numbers of the CCTV.
b. Contractor shall check the design against the possibility of errors /

mismatch of electrical quantities as well as installation and other such
matters. The said things above should be submitted either in writing or
drawing at the time of clarification of the tender / aanwijzing.
c. Before the work is submitted totally or in stages, Contractor shall submit to

MK, 4 (four) sets of blueprints, 1 (one) set tracing, 1 (one) set of electronic
files / copy shop to be called as “build drawings" i.e. all images from all the
materials, equipment and installation of electrical systems.
d. In the case when there is technical or physical disparity, it should be

reported in writing four days before the Board of Directors of Planning and
Supervision/MK takes to the field; costs should already be integrated in the
unit price of the said item.
4. STANDARDS/ REGULATIONS
All materials and installation in this work must comply to the General
Electrical Installation (PUIL 2000), SPLN / SNI No. 04-0225-2000,
Indonesia’s National Standard and other international standards.
5. APPOINTED MANUFACTURER / BRAND
If the name of the manufacturer / brand from one type material /

component is mentioned in this technical specification, then Contractor
shall deliver and install the appropriate item component according to
specification. If at the time of installation, the said material/brand is not
available/difficult to get, then Planning and Supervision/MK shall specify
another brand having the same specifications.
6. MATERIAL SAMPLES
• For the materials mentioned below, Contractor shall pay attention to

the sample material and shall obtain approval before it is installed at
the Planning and Supervision/MK.
• If deemed necessary by Contractor and it might be possible, then
Contractor is obliged to show the sample from Planning and

Supervision/MK. If the samples are rejected by Planning and
Supervision/MK, then in order to obtain approval, Contractor shall
replace and show that the item is in accordance with the
specifications.
• Approved technical quality / electric, brand / manufacturer, working
characteristics, physical and quality of aesthetics of the sample
material / material / or installation is binding.
• Cost of procurement of material samples are borne by and cost of
Contractor, material samples must be submitted to Planning and
supervision/MK not more than 14 (fourteen) calendar days after being
appointed.
7. CLAUSE ON RETURNED GOODS
If there are clauses referring to other items/articles in the Tender

Documents, it does not mean the elimination of these items but more so to
emphasize the problem. If there is a contradiction between pictures or
specifications, then the benchmark would be the one that has a technical
consideration and/or having the highest cost consideration.
8. COORDINATION
At the time of procurement of materials and installation, the CCTV

Contractor shall coordinate with other contractors on appointment by
MK /Planning and Supervision. If there is an item of work to be done by
other contractors, the Contractor shall set up/deliver materials and give
explanations for installation. During installation by another contractor, the
CCTV Contractor must be present to give directions together with Planning
and Supervision/MK so that the result will be such as in accordance to the
installation requirements.(e.g. installation of conduit in concrete and the
like.)
9. WORK IMAGE/SHOP DRAWING
Prior to installation or material procurement, and in executing, it is

mandatory for the Contractor to submit to Planning and Supervision, work
images/shop drawings in 4 (four) sets for review of /approval from MK at

least 14 (fourteen) working days after the issuance Surat Perintah Kerja
(SPK).
10. INSTRUCTION ON USE & OPERATION AND TRAINING
The Contractor is obliged to submit 4 (four) sets of instructions on

use/operation as well as maintenance methods to the Owner, 1 (one)
month before handover. This includes training the operator or persons
appointed by the Owner to run, use/operate, take the necessary tests and
carry out relevant maintenance of the installed CCTV. All costs are to be
borne by Contractor.
11. CLAIM WAIVER
Project owner is exempted from patents and the like on all kinds of
material procurement and installation. Owner is exempted from any
claims or charges against special rights such as patents and the like.
12. SPECIAL TECHNICAL REQUIREMENTS
a. IP Color CCTV System
The CCTV system is planned to support the security system of the building
by continually monitoring movements displayed on the screen around the
area where the IP CCTV camera is installed. The placement plan of the
CCTV cameras should be according to the drawings; cameras to be
placed in specific areas are required to use outdoor / indoor housing
adjustments in line with the drawing plan.
b. Scope of Work
• Supply and installation of the IP CCTV system consists of Digital

Network Video Recorder (NVR), Camera / lens, monitor and
accessories
• Supply and installation of cable is from the DVR to camera, complete
with its support.
• Supply and installation of the shelf/table is the major equipment in the
operator’s room.
• Supply and installation of power cable/power points for the IP CCTV

system.
c.. IP CCTV Equipment
1. IP Camera and Lens

The camera used for the CCTV is the determinant of picture quality
resulting from the CCTV system as a whole. Selection of lens type and
camera is defined according to the size of the room and strong light in the
said zone. Type of lens and camera used are:
• Camera CCD 1/3 inch
- Standard High Resolution Camera
- High Resolution Day and Night Camera
- Interior Dome Shaped Camera
• Lens Size 1/3 inch

- Fixed Wide Angle
- Fixed Standard
- Motorized Zoom
• Technical data for camera:

- Sensitivity : 1 lux
- Resolution : 250 TV lines
- Image Device : 1/3 inch interline transfer CCD
- Ambient Temperature : -10 ºC ± 50 ºC
- Power Consumption : 12 V DC/ 24 AC /220 V AC
- Sync System : Internal
- Video Output : 1V p-p / 75 ohm
• High Resolution Day and Night Camera:

- Sensitivity : 0.03 lux
• Interior Dome-Shaped Camera:

- Sensitivity : 2 lux
• Technical data for lens:
• Fixed Wide Angle

- Focal Length (mm) : 4 mm
- Maximum Aperture : F1.2
- Nearest Distance : 0.2m
- Horizontal Field Angle : 66.1 º
• Fixed Standard
- Focal Length (mm) : 8mm
- Maximum Aperture : F1.2
- Nearest Distance : 0.3 m
- Horizontal Field Angle : 34.8 º
• Motorized Zoom
.- Focal Length (mm) : 5.7 – 34.2 mm
.- Maximum Aperture : F1.2
- Nearest Distance : 0.3 m
- Horizontal Field Angle: 45.9 - 8.1º
2. Housing
Housing is used to protect the camera from around especially if placed in
areas disturbance and dirt potential.
Housing specifications:
• Outdoor Housing
- Window : 80.5 ( W ) x 72 ( H )m thick glass
- Construction : Aluminium
- Mounting : From Bottom
- Active Cap : Available to adjustable camera angle
• Indoor Housing
- Window : 64 ( W ) x 49 ( H )m thick glass

- Construction : Aluminium
- Mounting : From Bottom
- Active Cap : Available to adjustable camera angle
3 Monitor
The monitor to be used is SVGA, size 19”; technical data as follows:
-Screen size : 19”W 10%
-Ambient Temperature : 0 C - 40 C
- Resolution :1280 x 1024 pixel
- Input Impedance :75 ohm / high-Z,(switchable)
- Humidity : max.80%
- Power Consumption : 80 W
Monitor size 15” (15 inch)
- Multi stereo system
- Melody on – off
- Equalizer
- Zoom & wide
- Plug & Play
- Turbo sound
- Absent power off
- Graphic DSD
4. Digital Network Video Recorder (DVR)

This equipment comprised the Multiplexer and Recorder which digitally
records pictures. Display monitor can be selected from 1 (Full Screen), 4
(quad), 9 and 16; has freeze function and digital zoom. This NVR is
Personal Computer-based (PC) so that it can be connected through a
computer network via modem, ISDN, LAN or TCP/IP and can back-up by
using CD RW or Floppy Disk. It has also a User Code facility which allows
use either locally or via computer network. This NVR has a number of
recording functions which can be programmed in advance, both
Continous, Motion Detector, Alarm+Motion or Not Recording in each
camera.
The facility contained in this NVR is:

- Multiplexer and Recorder in one unit
- Digital Recording in format MJPEG or MPEG4
- Multiple display ( 1,4,9,19 )

- High Resolution ( 720 x 576 )
- Digital Zoom and Freeze
- Programmed recording
- Easy to find recordings
- Capacity Hard Disk size ( 1000 GB expandable )
- User Code Security
- Input alarm
- Network Controlling via modem, ISDN,LAN or TCP / IP
DVR Specifications
- CPU : I7
- RAM : Min 8 GB
- HDD : 1000 GB ( Expandable )
- VGA Card : AGP 126 Mbyte – ATI
- O/S : Windows 7 or 8
- Camera input :16 Port ( RJ 45)
- Sensor Input :16Port
- Controller Output :16 Port
- Display Speed : 480 FPS
- Recording Speed : 360 x 288 : Max 480 FPS
- Recording Resolution :360 x 288,720 x 576
- Image Compression Size : - MPEG 4+ 360 x 288 : about 1~5 KB
- JPEG 360 x 288 : about 3 ~ 10 KB
- Voice Recording : 16 Chanel
- Compression Mode : MPEG 4+ / JPEG
- Motion Detection :10 Area by each channel ( Pre-even recording)
- Networking : Modem, ISDN ,LAN, TCP/IP
- Backup Device (Option) : 3.5”FDD,HDD, DVD-RAM,CD-RW,ZIP- Drive
- Pan/Tilt/Zoom Control : RS-422/485 Interface
- Size (WHD) : 480 x 178 x 450 (mm),19” x 7” x 18” ( inch )
- Weight : 16 Kg ( 35 lbs )
d. Wiring
CCTV installation comprises:

• UTP CAT 6
• Control Cable
Control cable consists of unshielded type with fiber content (12 x AWG
22 or AWG 24) or single cable (ITC 6 x 2 x 0,6 mm).

• Power Cable
Type of power cable is NYMHY or NYA 2 x 1,5 mm
• Pipe Protector
Type used for PVC pipe with clamp, tee, socket (fittings) and so on.
13. LIST OF MATERIAL

It is mandatory for the Contractor to draw up a list of material for all
materials offered. This list should state the brand and class, complete with
brochure, all to be attached at the bid of tender.
14. CAMERA (IP CAMERA)

Technical specification of a CCTV camera is:
- Fixed color camera (wall/ceiling mounted)/ dome color camera.

• Resolution : 1280 x 720
(minimum)
• Minimum illumination : 0,04 lux (sensitivity Lux)
• Operating temperature : - 10°C - 50°C.
- Pan/Tilt, auto focus, zoom, dynamic color camera for wall /ceiling
mounted)/ dome system, Infra Red for Night Operating
• Pan range : 0° C to 360°C
continuous.
Tilt range : 0° C to 90°C from
horizontal plane.
Pan/Tilt : Manual /Sequential
position/sort position/auto pan
Lens : Zoom, auto / manual focus, auto /
manual Iris, iris ALC, Iris level.
• Zoom ratio : 12 x (minimum).
Zoom speed : 6 second (tele/wide) minimum.
• Focus speed Minimum : 5 second (far/near)
• Power supply : 12 VDC, 24 VAC, 50 Hz or PoE
15. MONITOR
Technical specification of monitor is:

- Screen Size : 42” (inch)

- Resolution (Minimum) : 800 Line Typical
- Display Tube : High Resolution, 900 depletion
- Color System : EIA/NTSC color system
- Impedance : 75 Ohms
- Power : 220-240 VAC / 50 Hz
- Monitor Control : Power, Contrast, Brightness, H-Hold, V-Hold,
: V- Linearity, Height and H-With
16. NETWORK VIDEO RECORDER (NVR) 32 CAHNNEL ANALOG / IP

RECORDER OR MULTIPEXER VIDEO RECORDER
Technical specification of NVR or multiplexer is :
Operating Mode Display : Simultaneous recording and multi screen

display
Display Mode : Full screen, life quad display
(individual, dual, quad or custom
sequencing) or multi screen mode decode
full, quad or multi screen display
Control Indicator : Full screen, quad screen, multi screen,

cameo,zoom, freeze, ALT, Action Clear/Menu
alarm clear/enter, channel I thru 32, power
LED.
Power Supply : 220-240 VAC, 50 Hz

Connectors : Video Inputs, Camera 32 input, video output
Accessories I/O : - 25 pin connector for alarm and accessories
(32 selectable NO or NC), One for action!
alarm and one for video loss.
Temperature : Operating + 00ºC to + 50ºC
Alarm Programmed Multiplexer or Network Vodeo Recorder (NVR)
This NVR (multiplexer) work not only as multiplexer, but is already completed
with facility which connected to alarm contractor ( remote switch) If the alarm
signal ( contactor) is received then automatically will display the picture of
location on the monitor screen, and will interrupt (stop ) the observation
sequence on the programmed multiplexer
17. PAN & TILT
Technical specification of Pan & Tilt is;
- Angular Travel : Pan 350 degree Maximum

Tilt 90 degrees Maximum
- Speed Travel : Pan 7 degrees Maximum
: Tilt 4 degrees Maximum
- Power : 12 VDC, 24 VAC, 50 Hz or PoE
18. SCANNER
Technical specification of Scanner is Indoor type :

- Pan Speed : 5 degrees / second
- Pan Travel : 360 degrees maximum, completed with limit stop
- Power : 12 VDC, 24 VAC, 50 Hz or PoE
19. ZOOM LENS
Technical specification of:

a. FIXED LENS : 4.5 V – 1.4
- Focal Length range : 4,5mm
- Effective aperture range : F 1.2
- Speed rating :-
b. FIXED LENSES : 4.5V – 1.43

- Effective aperture range : F 1.2
- Speed rating :-
c. ZOOM LENSES : V 6 – 60
- Focal Length range : 6 – 60mm
- Effective aperture range : 1.2 – 360
- Minimum focusing distance : 3.9 (1,2) ft (m)

- Speed rating : 6.5 degrees / second
d. ZOOM LENSES : V 5 – 50
- Effective aperture range : 1.0 – 360
- Minimum focusing distance: 3.9 (1,2) ft (m)
20. INSTALLATIONS CABLE
Using LAN Cable UTP Cat 6 or and for control purpose and use NYA 0.5
mm.
TIME LAPSE VIDEO RECORDER.

Technical specification of time lapse video recorder is:
- Recording and play : 24 hours

- Number of camera : 32 but use for 20
- Video System : PAL color
- Horizontal resolution (minimum) : 350 Lines
- Tape format : VHS Tape
- Alarm command : Initiate selectable recording rate of 50,
(from the recording or stop mode) 10, or
5 field / second at the 3, 12 or 24 hours
rate for the best documentation during
alarm
- Valuable recording features : Emergency recording, alarm
Recording,
weekly time recording, External time
recording, Repeat recording & Select
Alarm recording
- Time memory power loss : More than back-up 700 hours
- Power supply : 220-240 VAC, 50 Hz
OUTLINE TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION
LIST OF MATERIAL
HVAC

NO MATERIAL / COMPONENT PRODUCT Original

1 Air Conditioner (AC)
a. A/C unit 1. Daikin Ex-Japan
2. Carrier Ex-USA
3. Mc Quay Ex-USA
b Diffuser grille 1. Comfort Air Lokal

2. Dinamis Lokal
3. Prima Wangi Lokal
2 Fan 1. Conexa Australia

2. System Air Swedia
3. Nicotra Italia / German
3 Pipa PPR 1. SD Germany

2. Agrusan USA
3. Koprax USA
4 Isulasion Pipe 1. Armaflex Thailand

(Elastomerik/Close Cell) 2. Thermaflex Scotlandia
5 Valve-valve (Gate valve, 1.Toyo Japan

2. Kitz (Sinar Mas
Globe valve, Check valve) Andika) Japan
3. Socla Japan
6 Valve-valve khusus 1.Toyo Japan

2. Kitz (Sinar Mas
Endika) Japan
3. Socla Japan
7 Glass Wool 3. Kimko Japan

32/24 kg/m3 2. Thermaflex Thailand
8 Pipa Tembaga 1. Inaba Japan

2. Kembla Japan
3. Denji Japan

9 Sound Attenuator 1. Sonic Malaysia

2. Krueger Singapura
3. SAL USA
10 Pipa Drain (Drain pipe) 1. Pralon Indonesia/Lokal

2. Wavin Indonesia/Lokal
3. Rucika Indonesia/Lokal
11 Almunium Foil 1. Thermofoil (730) Malaysia

2. Sisalation Malaysia
3. Harvifoli Malaysia
4. Insfoil Malaysia
1. K'Flex Alu AA
12 Almunium Tape China
130
2. Idenden Japan
3. AB Foli Malaysia
13 Vibration isolator 1. Kinetek USA

2. Tosen Japan
3. Myson USA
4. Amber both England
14 Penggantung pipa (Support) LOKAL
15 Panel Maker 1. Tamco Indonesia

2. Cejete Industira Indonesia
3. Schneider Indonesia
16 Component panel 1.Schneider France

2. Moeller Germany
3. ABB England
17 Almunium sheet 1. Elsindo Indonesia

2. Indalex Indonesia
3. Alkan Indonesia
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

NO MATERIAL / COMPONENT PRODUCT Original

1 Tranformer (1600 kVA) - Unindo - Indonesia
- Trafindo - Indonesia
2 Trafo Isolasi , Auto transformer - Bender / Isotrol - USA / Kanada
3. UPS - Power Ware - USA

- Aros - Italia
4 MVDP MEDIUM VOLTAGE 20kV 1.Schneider France

2. ABB England
3. Moeller Germany
4. Floukit France
5 LVMDP/PUTR & Distribution Panel
a. LV Panel Maker 1. Tamco Indonesia
b. Component panel 1. Schneider Franc

2. ABB England
3. Moeller Germany
c. Capacitor Bank 1. Alpivar Franc

2. Nokian Germany
3. ABB Germany
6 Low VoltageCable 1. Kabelindo Indonesia

2. Kabelmetal Indonesia
3. Supreme Indonesia
7 FRC Cable 1. Fuji Japan

2. Nexan USA
3. Radox USA
4. shan China
8 Housing Lampu / Armature: 1. Interlite Indonesia
(type sesuai gambar/BoQ) 2. Visilite Indonesia
3. Industira Indonesia
9 Lamp Component :
a Tube Lampu TL, PLC, PLS, Osram, Philips UK, Deutch
Nedherland,
b Ballast type Low Loss West Aust/WA, Australia,
May + Christy England
c Fitting Vosloh Sweden
Aid
d Capacitor
Electronic,Philips
e Emergency Lighting 1. Interlite Indonesia
2. Visilite Indonesia
3. Industira Indonesia
10 Lampu Sorot Out Door, LED 1. ThornLighting France

(Specialist Ligthing system)
11 Receptacle 1.Legrand France
12 Switch 1.Legrand France
13 Grid Switch 1.Legrand France
14 Cable Tray 1. Nobi Indonesia

2. Interack Indonesia
3. Visirack Indonesia
15 Push Button 1. Telemechanic Franc

2. Fuji Japan
3. AEG Germany
KW, Frequentie, hour, Ampere

16 1. GAE Germany
Volt
17 Penangkal Petir Type EF 1. EF Germany

Radius sesuai gambar 2. Erico Australia
(LIGHTNING Protection) 3. AEG German
18 GENSET 1. Caterpilar USA

2. FG Wilson-
Perkin England
19 Alternator 1.Stamford
2.Marathon
3.Leroy Somer
20 Control Genset (Type Digital) Woodward USA
FIRE FIGHTING HYDRANT
N MATERIAL / COMPONENT PRODUCT Original

O
1 Black steel pipe sch-40 1. Bakrie Indonesia
2. PPI Indonesia
2 Fitting class 20 K 1. FKK Japan

2. Benken Japan
3 Fitting class 10 K 1. FKK Japan

2. Benken Japan
4 Safety Valve 1. Socla Japan

Pompa pemadam kebakaran 2. Muesco
3. Fushiman Germany
5 Pompa Electric 1. ITT USA

(NFPA-20) / UL Listed 2. Nijhuis Belanda
3. SPP USA
6 Pompa Jockey 1. ITT USA

2. Nijhuis Belanda
3. SPP USA
4.Peerless USA
7 Pompa Diesel Cadangan : Pompa : USA

1. ITT
(NFPA-20) / UL Listed 2. Nijhuis Belanda
3. SPP USA
4.Peerless USA
Diesel Engine:
1. Caterpilar USA
2. Clarke USA
3. Cummins England
8 Fire Pump Control Panel 1.Firetrol USA

(NFPA-20) / UL Listed 2.Tornatech USA
3.Metron USA
9 Flow switch 1. Penn Germany

2. Sika Germany
3. Potter Germany
10 Pressure gauge 1. Potter Japan

2. Nagano Japan
11 Butterfly Valve class 16/20 K 1. Toyo Japan
2. Kitz (Sinar Mas
Andika) Japan
3. Socla Japan
12 Gate Valve class 16/20 K 1. Toyo Japan

2. Kitz (Sinar Mas
Andika) Japan
3. Socla Japan
13 Globe Valve class 16/20 K 1. Toyo Japan
2. Kitz (Sinar Mas
Andika Japan

3. Socla Japan
14 Check Valve class 16/20 K 1. Toyo Japan

2. Kitz (Sinar Mas
Andika) Japan
3. Socla Japan
15 Y Strainer class 16/20 K 1. Toyo Japan

2. Kitz (Sinar Mas
Andika) Japan
3. Socla Japan
Control Valve / Alarm Gong /

16 1. Potter / Tyco Japan
(UL / FM)
2. Reliable
Pressure Relief Valve ( UL /

17 1. Potter / Tyco Japan
FM)
18 PRV class 16/20 K 1. KKK Japan

2. Claval Germany
19 Automatic Air Vent 1. Yoshitake Japan

2. NBC Japan
3. Toyo Japan
4. Socla Japan
20 Flexible joint class 16/20 K 1. Tozen Japan

2. Toyo Japan
21 Indoor Hydrant Box 1. Ozeki Japan

2. Appron Indonesia
3. Chubb USA
22 Acessories Hydrant Box 1. Ozeki Japan

2. Appron Indonesia
3. Chubb USA

23 Pemadam Api Ringan 1. Chubb USA

2. Yamato Japan
3. Servo
24 Flow Switch 1. Potter / Tyco Japan
2. Fivalco Sweden
25 Main Control Valve 1. Preusag Germany

2. Ozeki Japan
3. Viking USA
4. Grinnel Germany
26 Floating valve 1. KKK Japan
27 Water Hammer Eliminator 1. KKK Japan
28 Kabel Tegangan Rendah 1. Kabelindo Indonesia

29 Kabel FRC 1. Fuji Japan

2. Nexan USA
3. Radox USA
4.Shan China
30 Hydrant Box 1. Ozeki Japan

2. Appron Indonesia
3. Yamato Japan
31 Pylar Hydrant 1. Ozeki Japan

2. Appron Indonesia
32 Seamese Conection 1. Van der Heyden Eropa

2. Ozeki Japan
33 Foot Valve 1. Ebara Japan

2. Socla Japan
3. Kitazawa(SinarMas
A) Japan
34 Flexible Joint Class 10 K 1. Toyo Japan

2. Thermosel
35 Clean Out 1. Toto Japan

2. San-Ei Japan
36 Floor Drain 1. Toto Japan

2. San-Ei Japan
37 P-Trap 1. Toto Japan

2. San-Ei Japan
38 PRV, Floating Valve, 1. Claval Germany

Water Hammer Eliminator 2. Yoshitake Japan
39 Foat Valve 1. FAF Ekoval Turki

2. Kitz (Sinar Mas Japan
Andika)
3. Showa Japan
40 Flexible Joint 1. Tozen Japan

2. Twin Flex Japan
3. Samyang Korea
41 Low Voltage cable 1. Kabelindo Indonesia

4. Tranka Indonesia
42 Low Voltage Panel Maker 1. Tamco Indonesia

43 Panel Component 1. Schneider France

2. ABB England
3. Moeller Germany
ELECTRONIC SYSTEM
N
O MATERIAL / COMPONENT PRODUCT Original
1 TELEPHONE
IP PABX (IP Telephone) 1. Siemens German
Including (Telephone Set), 2. AT&T USA
Billing System 3. Philips Belanda
2 Sarana MDF 1. Philips Belanda

2. Siemens Germany
3. Krone Germany
3 Connecting Wiring 1. Krone Germany

2. Philips Belanda
4 CCTV (IP CAMERA)

Main Equipment
1. Philips / Bosch Nedherland
Camera,Switcher,
DVR, NVR ,TV Monitor, Power
2. Pelco Spanyol
Supply,etc
5 Video Phone / Control 1. Tech Star USA

2. Airphone Japan
3. Urnet
4. ADC, Secuer Spanyol

7 Telephone Outlet 1. Legrand France

2. Berker Germany
3. Merten German
8 Cable 1. Kabelindo Indonesia

9 Fibre Optic Cable 1. Commscope USA

3. Belden France
10 Cable LAN (UTP Cat 6) 1. Belden French
11 Cable Rack / Tray 1. Nobi Lokal

2. Interack Lokal
3. Visirack Lokal
FIRE ALARM SYSTEM
N
O MATERIAL / COMPONENT PRODUCT ORIGINAL
1 FIRE ALARM :
MCFA (semi Addressable) 1. Siemens Germany
Announciator 2. GE-Vigilant USA
Sirine 3. Esser Germany
Detector 4. Simplex USA
Manual Break Glass
Bell
General Alarm
Indicator Lamp
2 FIRE FIGHTING TELEPHONE

Hand Set 1. Thom USA
Jack Outlet 2. Johnson USA

Control Unit 3. Aritech USA
3 CONDUIT 1. Clipsal Australia

2. Ega Indonesia
PLUMBING SYSTEM
N
O MATERIAL / COMPONENT PRODUCT Original
Clean Water Pipe / Pipa Air
1 Bersih Galvanized 1. Bakrie Indonesia
Medium Class 2. PPI Indonesia
Alat Sambung Pipa / Fitting
2
Fixture 1. FKK Japan
2. SNP Japan
3. TG Japan
4. HE Japan
Pipa Air Kotor (Sewage Water)

3
Pipe) 1. Wavin Indonesia
Klas AW 2. Rucika Indonesia
4 Alat Sambung Sesuai Dengan 1. Wavin Indonesia

Produk Pipa (Fitting Pipe) 2. Rucika Indonesia
Pipa Air Bekas (Waste Water

5
Pipe) 1. Wavin Indonesia
Klas AW 2. Rucika Indonesia
6 Pipa Vent (Hawa) (Vent Pipe) 1. Wavin Indonesia

Klas D 2. Rucika Indonesia
7 Alat Sambung Sesuai Dengan 1. Wavin Indonesia

Produk Pipa (Fitting Pipe) 2. Rucika Indonesia

Pompa Air Bersih (Clean Water

8
Pump) 1. Grundfos Australia
(Transfer, Package Booster
Pump) 2. Ebara (Indobara) Japan
9 Gate, Check, Ball Valve 1. Toyo Japan

2. Kitz (Sinar Mas
Andika) Japan
3. Showa Japan
10 Strainer 1. FAF Ekoval Turki

2. Kitz (Sinar Mas
Andika) Japan
3. Showa Japan
11 Foot Valve 1. Misu Japan

2. Ebara Japan
12 Flexible Joint 1. Tozen Japan

2. Proco Japan
13 Water Level Kontrol 1. Omron Japan

2. Telemechanic Japan
14 Faucet 1. Toto Japan

2. San-Ei Japan
15 Float Valve 1. KKK Japan

2. AFA Japan
16 Sum pit Pump 1. Grundfos Australia

2. Ebara (IndoBara) Japan
3. Zenitzh USA
17 Sewage Pump 1. Grundfos Australia

2. Ebara (Indobara) Japan
3. Zenitzh USA


Technical Specification Mep

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Technical Specification Mep

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mechanical & Electrical Works

PT. Barry Callebaut Comextra Indonesia

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL

The contractor is deemed to be familiar with climatic conditions prevailing in

PT. PRAPANCA ENGINEERING TS - 1

d. If the Contractor subsequently fails to place such orders within a period of

a. All equipment supplied shall be in accordance with this specification and

PT. PRAPANCA ENGINEERING TS - 2

5. REJECTION OF UNSUITABLE MATERIALS, ETC.

6. CHECKING DRAWINGS OF OTHER SERVICES

a. During the preparation of working drawings, the contractor shall liaise

a. Within 14 days of reaching the date of practical completion of the works,

PT. PRAPANCA ENGINEERING TS - 3

8. OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

a. Within 14 days of reaching the date of practical completion of the works,

PT. PRAPANCA ENGINEERING TS - 4

10. COORDINATION BETWEEN TRADES

11. SETTING TO WORK

a. As soon as practicable after the completion of any section of the

PT. PRAPANCA ENGINEERING TS - 5

12. RESULTS OF TESTS

13. GUARDS OR RAILINGS

15. DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD

16. AS-NEW CONDITION

17. MAINTENANCE AND SPARES

a. All equipment shall be designed to facilitate inspection , cleaning,

PT. PRAPANCA ENGINEERING TS - 7

19. COORDINATION WITH OTHER PARTIES

20. WARRANTY PERIOD.

21. MAINTENANCE PERIOD

22. WORK HANDOVER

PT. PRAPANCA ENGINEERING TS - 9

I. AIR CONDITIONING WORKS.

be in accordance with the international and national standards such as ARI,

3. WATER DRAINAGE PIPES

PT. PRAPANCA ENGINEERING TS - 11

PT. PRAPANCA ENGINEERING TS - 12

6. HANGER AND THE BUFFER / PIPE LEVERAGE

a. Work by Main Contactor

reinforcement for all pumps shall be provided by main contractor.

Access hatches, doors and panels as required in false ceiling, masonry

Insulation of roof desk, using 50 mm think rock wool of the density 64

All cutting, patching, framing, furring in chasing and making good,

b. Work by electrical contractor

Provision of electricity to all equipment.

PT. PRAPANCA ENGINEERING TS - 15

c. Indonesia Electrical standard ( PUlL).

B. AIR COOLED PACKAGED I SPLIT WALL SYSTEM

PT. PRAPANCA ENGINEERING TS - 16

of units as described in the schedule equipment attached.

2. APPLICABLE PUBLICATION & CODES.

PT. PRAPANCA ENGINEERING TS - 17

a. ASHRAE the guide and date book.

D. DUCTING SYSTEM FOR EXHAUST FAN

This work includes all material procurement, installation and adjustment of

PT. PRAPANCA ENGINEERING TS - 19

c. The contractor is required to make working drawings (shop drawings) that

d. Air chimney dimensions indicated on drawings and specifications is internal

6. TAPERS, OFFEST AND STREAM LINER

PT. PRAPANCA ENGINEERING TS - 21

E. FLEXIBLE JOINT AND DUCTS

a. Flexible connections shall be provided at the suction and delivery

1. GRILLE AND DIFFUSERS

PT. PRAPANCA ENGINEERING TS - 22